Home

9.4 Configuration

1. snnoonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnneenn 194 9 6 3 21 Phase C Apparent EE 195 9 6 3 22Phase ee tu E 195 9 6 3 23Phase C e ET EE 195 9 6 3 24Phase C Line Neutral Voltage AAA 195 9 6 3 25Phase C Power e 196 9 6 3 26 Phase C Reactive EE 196 9 6 3 27 Phase C Real Power 196 9 6 3 28Phase CA Line Line Voltage EEN 196 9 6 3 29 Total Apparent e E 196 9 6 3 30 Total Power Factor eennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnenennnnnevnn 197 9 6 3 31 Total Reactive Power 197 9 6 3 32 Total Real Power 197 96333 Total KEE eeegengeitege eegieegeibegeudteedee Gegen deeg Ee gegeeee 197 96 3 34 Total KW IMPO EE 198 9 6 4 Air Conditioning Heating E 198 9 6 4 1 Elite ArGordnonenuuusssnuinenanemuineaiemmineieiretmisenmm 198 9642 Q Logic Air Conditioner save 198 9 6 5 ue e EEN 198 9 6 5 1 Anchor VV AUGIN EE 198 J66 EE 200 9 6 6 1 Battery State of Charge nn 200 9 6 6 2 Battery Ternes Eed 200 9 6 6 3 Battery Time Hemaimmg 200 E GUTEN E 200 GE 201 9 6 6 6 Ripple VEER 201 96 6 7 MONA EN 201 96 7 Dept EE 202 9 6 7 1 Transducer Offset 202 9 6 7 2 Water Below TESTEN secicenicccncesuncnaertuexncnrenerununternaneviadebansacnipueneuns 202 9 6 7 3 Water Depth includes offset AEN 202 9 6 8 Electrical Distribution cc scasoctasrocessidaesiedsonone shbdeo stad Ssgncnsedeeseaptdaieeaditevntaoeus 203 9 6 8 1 Circuit BIO aK ela cicnccchihenedancdanehantduitadaucledibanidaitadantdadabantdatisenidedidanidutabuaatana 20
2. Degrees Figure 73 Rudder Angle Component Example Min Max Markers may be added to a Rudder Angle Component by clicking ona check box in the Component Editor The markers show the limits of the needle movement in either direction These marks are associated with the control itself That means that if two controls are displaying the same data each will maintain its own values for the min max marks and they can be reset independently Revision 3 6 3 Page 168 Maretron Rudder Angle Order Degrees Figure 74 Rudder Angle with Min Max Marks The marks are two red triangles just inside the gauge perimeter and are pushed left or right by the needle Pressing the Reset button will move both marks to the current needle position The Reset button is displayed only if the marks are enabled Revision 3 6 3 Page 169 Maretron 9 5 25 Tank The Tank control performs the same function as the Bar Graph component and is a direct substitute for use where the value to be displayed is the volume of liquid in a tank It consists of a vertical cylinder which is filled with color from the bottom of the bar graph to a height which corresponds to the value of the parameter The value is also displayed textually under the colored cylinder Similar to the gauge component type a user can define different ranges of parameter values to appear different colors on the component As in the case of the bar graph the filled region itself wil
3. Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Units Hertz Instances 253 Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert 10 4 1 10 Phase C Frequency Monitors the frequency of phase C of an AC bus Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Units Hertz Instances 253 10 4 1 11 Phase C Line Neutral Voltage Monitors the voltage between Phase C and Neutral of an AC bus Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Units Hertz Instances 253 10 4 1 12 Phase CA Line Line Voltage Monitors the voltage between Phase C and Phase A of an AC bus Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Units Hertz Revision 3 6 3 Page 306 Maretron Instances 253 Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert 10 4 2 AC Generator 10 4 2 1 Average Current Monitors the average AC RMS current from a generator across all phases Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 2 2 Average Frequency Monitors the average frequency of the AC power from a generator across all phases Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 2 3 Average Line Line Voltage Monitors the average line to line RMS voltage of the AC power from a generator across all phases Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 2 4 Average Line Neutral Voltage Monitors the
4. re Mo cloud demo Allow Automatic Updates from the Web E Cycle Through Screens Figure 34 Configuration Dialog 9 4 4 1 Configuration Tab The fields in this section are used to control the configuration of the screen 9 4 4 1 1 Label N2KView programs can be given a label so that an installation having multiple copies of N2kView can distinguish between them This is important for the alert management when the identity of the station that responds to an alert can be shown The label defaults to Helm and is displayed at the top left of the window border Revision 3 6 3 Page 92 Maretron N2KView Helm This is a text field into which the label of this copy of N2kView may be entered 9 4 4 1 2 Filename The configuration file contains the layouts of all the favorite screens the definition of the alerts and the cameras and the connections settings that have been entered by the user The file will always have an extension of n2K although this is hidden from the user in this field The configuration file is automatically saved when the system is closed down This field contains the name of the configuration file If there are multiple configuration files on disk the entire database can be swapped out by browsing to the new configuration filename and selecting it or by typing the new name in the field and moving the cursor to another field If a file by that name does not exist then the current configuratio
5. 9 6 1 6 Phase AB Line Line Voltage Displays the RMS voltage between phase A and phase B of an AC bus Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Volts RMS Instances 253 9 6 1 7 Phase B Frequency Displays the frequency of phase B on an AC bus Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units Hertz 9 6 1 8 Phase B Line Neutral Voltage Displays the RMS voltage between phase B and neutral of an AC bus Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Volts RMS Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 182 Maretron 9 6 1 9 Phase BC Line Line Voltage Displays the RMS voltage between phase B and phase C of an AC bus Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Volts RMS Instances 253 9 6 1 10 Phase C Frequency Displays the frequency of phase C on an AC bus Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units Hertz 9 6 1 11 Phase C Line Neutral Voltage Displays the RMS voltage between phase C and neutral of an AC bus Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Volts RMS Instances 253 9 6 1 12 Phase CA Line Line Voltage Displays the RMS voltage between phase C and phase A of an AC bus Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Volts RMS Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 183 Maretron 9 6 2 AC Generator 9 6 2 1 Average Current Displays the average AC RMS electrical current being sourced from a generator on all phases Compon
6. Channel 3 Fire Dining Channel 4 CO Dining Channel 5 Fire Saloon Figure 99 Channel Drop Down List Revision 3 6 3 Page 270 Maretron For indicator channels and Circuit Breakers this field allows you to select the channel field in the message that relates to the channel or breakers you want to monitor If a label has been stored in the transmitting module this will be displayed in parenthesis after the channel number This field may not always be present 10 3 6 1 9 Instance fake ale 0 Upper Deck Alarms e 0 Upper Deck Alarms 1 Lower Deck Alarms 2 Miscellaneous 3 Navigation Lights 4 Figure 100 Instance Drop Down List This combo box identifies the instance number of the device to which the alert applies The instance number may be chosen by pressing the small arrow to the right of the number and selecting from the list of options that drops down If a label has been stored in the transmitting module this will be displayed in parenthesis after the channel number This field may not always be present 10 3 6 2 Alert Enablement Enable Disable Control Enabled Disabled Operating Mode s Moored Undervay Anchored User 1 User 2 The Alert Enablement Section of the Alert Editor is located in the middle of the Alert Editor and contains the controls to enable and disable the alert 10 3 6 2 1 Enable Disable Control In this field you may globally enable or disable this alert from
7. Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Revision 3 6 3 Page 242 Maretron Units degrees Centigrade degrees Fahrenheit Instances 253 9 6 24 16 Transmission Oil Temperature See section 9 6 27 3 9 6 24 17 User Defined nnn Temperature Displays the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of User Defined nnn where nnn is a number from 128 to 144 Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units degrees Centigrade degrees Fahrenheit Instances 253 9 6 24 18 Wind Chill See section 9 6 11 20 Revision 3 6 3 Page 243 Maretran 9 6 25 Text 9 6 25 1 Text This component allows the creation of a single line of fixed user defined text on the screen Component Types Text 9 6 26 Time Date 9 6 26 1 Date Displays the current date The time zone may be entered as part of the component configuration or it may be set to reference the local time offset see Section 9 4 8 3 1 on page 113 for details on how to set the local time offset Component Types Digital Units Default DD MM YYYY DD MMM YYYY MM DD YYYY MMM DD YYYY When the units are set to Default the formatting for the displayed date is obtained from the Units Setup Page 9 6 26 2 Local Time Offset Displays the local time offset as set in the Units Setup Page Component Types Digital Units Hours Minutes 9 6 26 3 Moon Phase Displays the phase of the moon at the current time and locatio
8. Instances 253 10 4 25 4 Over Temperature Generally indicates that the operating temperature of the transmission exceeds some transmission defined limit Please consult the transmission manufacturer s documentation for details Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 356 Maretron 10 4 25 5 Sail Drive Generally indicates that the sail driver mode in the transmission has been activated Please consult the transmission manufacturer s documentation for details Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 357 Maretron 10 4 26 Vessel 10 4 26 1 Pitch Monitors the pitch of the vessel rotation about the horizontal axis perpendicular to the ship s keel Alert Types High Alert Data Unavailable Alert 10 4 26 2 Port Trim Tab Monitors the position of the vessel s Port Trim Tab Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert 10 4 26 3 Roll Monitors the roll of the vessel rotation about the horizontal axis parallel to the ship s keel Alert Types High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 26 4 Starboard Trim Tab Monitors the position of the vessel s Starboard Trim Tab Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Revision 3 6 3 Page 358 Maretron 10 4 27 Vessel Data Recorder 10 4 27 1 VDR Status Alert Types Not Recording Alert Data Unavailable Alert
9. Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 324 Maretron 10 4 8 6 Engine Oil Temperature Monitors the engine s oil temperature Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 8 7 Exhaust Gas Temperature Monitors the temperature of the engine s exhaust gases Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 8 8 Fuel Consumption Vol Dis Monitors the engine s fuel consumption Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 8 9 Fuel Economy Dis Vol Monitors the engine s fuel usage Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 8 10 Fuel Rate Monitors the rate of fuel consumption for the engine Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 8 11 Hours Monitors the number of hours of operation reported by the engine Revision 3 6 3 Page 325 Maretran Alert Types High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 8 12 Percent Load Monitors the current load on the engine as a percentage of its rated load Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 8 13 Percent Torque Monitors the current torque being provided by the engine as a percentage of its rated torque Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 8 14 Tachometer Monitors the rotational speed of the engin
10. The Course Alert is identical to the Direction Alert In the editor the word Direction is replaced by Course 10 3 6 4 14 Time Alert N2K View can be configured with alerts that go active at a predetermined time such as an alarm clock These alerts can also be configured to become active periodically making them useful for signaling watch changes for example every four hours or as a personnel alarm making sure a crew member is at the helm every 15 minutes When a Time Alert with a Repeat Interval of zero is accepted it will be Disabled to prevent further triggering When a Time Alert with a Repeat Interval greater than zero is accepted it will transition to the Inactive state waiting for the next time it should trigger Revision 3 6 3 Page 292 Maretran 10 3 6 4 14 1 Trigger Configuration Time Alert Trigger Configuration e sl UC 0 05 00 hh mm ss W Alarm Time 1505 hours minutes ude meena Fixed Delay Max On Time ma hh mm ss Figure 118 Alert Editor Time Alert Time Alert Set Point The alert will become active at the time specified in this field If the time specified has already passed then the alarm will be set for the next day One of the following options may be selected e Time The time may be specified directly by setting the Alarm Time and Time Zone The repeat interval may be set to determine how frequently the alarm recurs e Sunrise The alert will trigger at Sunrise every day e Su
11. Units Setup Dialog 9 4 8 1 Language From version 3 2 of N2KView multiple languages are supported This is where you select the language in which you want program specific text to be displayed Because you enter the title text N2KView has no control over these values Revision 3 6 3 Page 111 Maretron As soon as you select a language all the displays will be changed to the language chosen However you still need to press the Save button to make this choice permanent Pressing the Cancel button that s the button on the right will cause the language to revert to what it was when you entered the dialog 9 4 8 2 Default Units This section of the Units Setup dialog you to choose the default units which are selected when creating components to measure various types of parameters You are given the opportunity to select units other than the default units when you are creating or modifying components using the Component Editor 9 4 8 2 1 Atmospheric Pressure Bar millibar mbar inches mercury inHg Kilopascal kPa Millimeters Mercury mmHg 9 4 8 2 2 Date Format DD MM YYYY 31 12 2007 DD MMM YYYY 31 DEC 2007 MM DD YYYY 12 31 2007 MMM DD YYYY DEC 31 2007 9 4 8 2 3 Depth Feet Fathoms Meters 9 4 8 2 4 Distance Kilometers Nautical Miles Statute Miles 9 4 8 2 5 Fluid Pressure Bar bar Kilopascal kPa Pounds Square Inch psi 9 4 8 2 6 Speed Kilometers Hour km h Nautical Miles Hour knots Mi
12. X in the extreme upper right hand corner of the window at the right edge of the Windows title bar will also terminate N2KView You may also terminate N2KView using the Alt F4 key combination in full screen mode or in windowed mode when N2K View is the active window A confirmation pop up will be displayed asking you to confirm the shutdown process 9 4 Configuration 9 4 1 Commands and Settings Dialog After you close the opening screen the N2KView software enters normal operating mode You may display the Commands and Settings Dialog at any time by pressing anywhere on the screen and then clicking on the Command amp Revision 3 6 3 Page 88 Maretran Settings tab on the right of the screen The Commands and Settings Dialog appears in the center of the screen as shown below Port Tachometer pa RK Starboard Tachometer Commands amp Settings Alerts Setup Breaker Lockout Configuration Connections Enter Full Screen Load Shedding Night Mode Password Screens Setup Clean Screen Figure 31 N2KView Commands amp Settings Dialog Note that some buttons have been grayed out With the current module licenses that have been checked out these functions are not available In this case the Video Module has not been licensed and so the Cameras Setup Dialog is not available Revision 3 6 3 Page 89 Maretron 9 4 2 About Dialog Pressing the About button will cause the About dialog to be displ
13. if the alert was generated as a result of the Save and Test button being pressed e The word Alert e The description of the Alert as entered by the user e What happened e g the alert went Active The body of the Alert Email contains e The current value of the parameter that triggered the alert e The activated or deactivated message that was entered by the operator 10 3 7 6 SMS Text Actions Tab The SMS Text Actions Tab for the Alert Actions Dialog is shown below Alert Action Editor DC Voltage High Alert x Annunciator Actions Email Actions SMS Text Actions Enable SMS Text Transmission when Alert is Triggered Enable SMS Text Transmission when Alert is Cleared Use Default Phone Number 6028611798 ve ns he nr BEE Message when Alert is Triggered Message when Alert is Cleared Save Cancel Figure 123 Alert Actions Dialog SMS Text Actions Tab Please note that an SMS100 with a valid cellular connection must be available on the NMEA2000 bus for SMS Text messages to be transmitted The title of the Revision 3 6 3 Page 301 Maretron message is pre defined and will contain the description and location of the alarm as well as a description of the type of event N2KView can send an Short Message SMS or Text message when an alert becomes active or inactive N2KView creates a list of recipient phone numbers by concatenating the numbers in the Use Default Phone Number field with the l
14. 10 4 18 2 Compressed Air Pressure Monitors the pressure from a pressure sensor set up with a source of Compressed Air Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 18 3 Engine Boost Pressure Monitors the boost pressure of a supercharger or turbocharger Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 18 4 Engine Coolant Pressure Monitors the engine s water coolant pressure Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 18 5 Engine Fuel Pressure Monitors the pressure of the fuel for the engine Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 346 Maretran 10 4 18 6 Engine Oil Pressure Monitors the engine s oil pressure Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 18 7 Hydraulic Oil Pressure Monitors the pressure from a pressure sensor set up with a source of Hydraulic Oil Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 18 8 Steam Pressure Monitors the pressure from a pressure sensor set up with a source of Steam Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 18 9 Transmission Oil Pressure Monitors the pressure of the oil in the transmission Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 18 10 User Defined P
15. 10 4 9 10 Low Oil Level Generally indicates that the oil level has fallen below some user defined limit Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 9 11 Low Oil Pressure Generally indicates that the oil pressure has fallen below some user defined limit Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 9 12 Low System Voltage Generally indicates that the system voltage has fallen below some user defined limit Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 9 13 Maintenance Needed Generally indicates that the engine is in need of maintenance Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 329 Maretran 10 4 9 14 Neutral Start Protect Generally indicates that the engine will not start because the transmission is not in neutral Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 9 15 Over Temperature Generally indicates that the engine s temperature has exceeded some engine defined limit Please consult th
16. Maretron 6 7 Run N2K View Note Before running N2KView in Live Mode please make sure N2KServer is running either on the same computer or on a different computer whose IP address is accessible from this computer or on a Maretron IPG100 whose IP address is accessible from this computer N2K View will start up with the following warning screen Warning Maretron N2KView Vessel Monitoring and Control System Software Version 3 6 3 20130719 WARNING By pressing Accept you acknowledge that while Maretron products are designed to be accurate and reliable they should be used only as aids to navigation and vessel monitoring and control and not as a replacement for traditional aids and techniques Please give this device running N2KView a name e g Helm or Engine Room Figure 20 N2KView Startup Warning Screen The request to Give this device running N2KView a name will only be shown the first time N2KView is run on the device Please enter a name that uniquely identifies the device This name will be used in the Alerts Module to identify to you which of your devices generated an Alert and which device was used to acknowledge the alerts Later the name may be changed from the Configuration Dialog You are required to press Accept and thereby acknowledge this warning message before N2KView will run in Live Mode Clicking with the right mouse button will force N2KView to the top left of the screen Alternatively
17. NE ENE for example The value of the parameter is in the center of the component the user defined title appears at the top of the component and the Units field in the lower right of the component show whether the angle is Magnetic or True The cardinal component is square in aspect ratio for example a cardinal component that is four grids wide will be four grids high An example of a cardinal component is shown below Wind Direction Degrees mag Figure 51 Cardinal Component Example Revision 3 6 3 Page 141 Maretron 9 5 7 Circuit Breaker Switch The circuit breaker or switch component emulates a physical switch When the monitored value is off the left hand side of the switch which is labeled OFF appears depressed and the switch appears gray in color When the monitored value is on the right hand side of the switch which is labeled ON appears depressed and also lights with a green color as if the switch contained a light or LED The user defined title of the switch appears immediately above the rocker switch itself The rocker switch component is twice as wide as it is tall for example a rocker switch that is two grids tall will be four grids wide Rocker switches may be configured to be toggle i e when you turn it on it stays on or momentary i e when you stop pressing the ON part it will return to the off position An example of a rocker switch component is shown belo
18. nies Longitude Get Current Position Figure 112 Trigger Configuration Outside Radius Alert Accept Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If the condition which caused the alert remains true after the amount of time in this field the alert will return to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert If a value of 0 00 is entered then the alert will never re trigger Outside Radius Alert Set If the distance between the current GPS position and the reference position rises above the value in this field the alert will become active Set Delay The distance between the current GPS position and the reference position must rise above the Outside Radius Alert Set value for longer than the time in this field in order for an alert to become active Outside Radius Alert Clear If the alert is active and the distance between the current GPS position and the reference position falls below the value in this field the alert will become inactive Clear Delay The distance between the current GPS position and the reference position must fall below the Outside Radius Alert Clear value for longer than the time in this field in order for an alert to become inactive Latitude The latitude of the reference position This may be typed in as lt degrees gt lt minu
19. 1 a Windows service to receive the data from the NMEA 2000 network buffer it and transmit it to stations over the TCP IP network connection and 2 a user program to configure and control the Windows service 15 1 1 N2KServer Windows Service The main component of N2KServer is the N2KServer Windows Service This program can automatically be started when Windows starts see Section 15 1 2 for details If the N2KServer Windows Service fails for any reason Windows will automatically re start it This ensures maximum reliability and availability of data The N2KServer Windows Service will write status and log messages to the Windows Event Log under the Application category If you have any problems with the N2KServer Windows Service You can use the Windows Event Viewer located under the Control Panel under the Administrative Tools category to check for any error messages that the N2KServer Windows Service may write there 15 1 2 N2KServer Service Manager The N2KServer Service Manager is used to stop start and configure the N2KServer Windows Service Since this program interacts with a Windows service it must be run under an account that has administrative privileges on the Windows system The N2KServer Service Manager window has the following sections Start button used to start the N2KServer Windows Service If the N2KServer is running this button is grayed out and unavailable Stop button used to stop
20. ASSERTED ON THE BASIS OF CONTRACT WARRANTY CONTRIBUTION STRICT LIABILITY TORT OR OTHER THEORY ARISING OUT OF THIS AGREEMENT OR THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORIES EVEN IF MARETRON OR ITS AGENT OR SUPPLIER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN NO CASE SHALL MARETRON S LIABILITY EXCEED THE LICENSE FEES PAID BY YOU FOR THE SOFTWARE Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of direct indirect incidental or consequential damages so the above exclusions or limitations may not apply to you If a court of competent jurisdiction determines that relevant laws in force may imply warranties and liabilities which cannot be excluded or limited or which can only partly be excluded or limited then the limit on Maretron s liability set forth in this Section 12 shall apply to the fullest extent permitted by law If Maretron cannot exclude or limit a warranty or liability implied by law this Agreement shall be read and construed subject to such provisions of law 12 SOFTWARE OWNERSHIP The SOFTWARE and all copies and derivative works thereof are and shall remain the sole and exclusive property of Maretron or its suppliers and are protected by United States copyrights laws and international treaty provisions Therefore you must treat the SOFTWARE like any other copyrighted material e g a book or musical recording All applicable rights to copyrights patents trade secrets trademark
21. Bar Graph Digital Instances not applicable Units Gigabytes 9 6 18 2 Cloud Server Data Used Maretron s Cloud Server is a subscription based service users purchase monthly bandwidth and the amount of bandwidth used in the current month may be displayed on this control Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Instances not applicable Units Gigabytes Revision 3 6 3 Page 227 Maretron 9 6 18 3 Cloud Server Percent Remaining Maretron s Cloud Server is a subscription based service users purchase monthly bandwidth and the percentage of bandwidth remaining in the current month may be displayed on this control Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Instances not applicable Units 9 6 18 4 Cloud Server Percent Used Maretron s Cloud Server is a subscription based service users purchase monthly bandwidth and the percentage of bandwidth used in the current month may be displayed on this control Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Instances not applicable Units 9 6 18 5 N2KServer This component displays the status of the connection between N2KView and N2KServer Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Instances not applicable Revision 3 6 3 Page 228 Maretran 9 6 19 Navigation N2K View is not a primary navigator that is it does not provide means for entering and storing waypoint and route data N2KView can receive information on the cu
22. Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Hertz Instances 253 9 6 2 25 Phase C Power Factor Displays the Power Factor of phase C of the AC power from a generator Component Types Digital Units Instances 253 9 6 2 26 Phase C Reactive Power Displays the Reactive Power being drawn on Phase C from a generator Revision 3 6 3 Page 189 Maretron Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units VAr 9 6 2 27 AC Generator Phase C Real Power Displays the Real Power being drawn on Phase C from a generator Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units Watts kilowatts 9 6 2 28 Phase CA Line Line Voltage Displays the voltage between Phase C and Phase A of the AC power from a generator Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Hertz Instances 253 9 6 3 AC Utility 9 6 3 1 Average Current Displays the average RMS electrical current being sourced from an AC Utility on all phases Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units Amperes 9 6 3 2 Average Frequency Displays the average frequency of an AC Utility on all phases Revision 3 6 3 Page 190 Maretron Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Hertz Instances 253 9 6 3 3 Average Line Line Voltage Displays the average line to line RMS voltage of an AC Utility on all phases Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Hertz Instances 253 9 6 3 4
23. Instances 253 10 4 27 2 VDR Memory Used Alert Types High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 27 3 VDR Memory Available Alert Types Low Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 27 4 VDR Percent Used Alert Types High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 27 5 VDR Percent Available Alert Types Low Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 359 Maretron 10 4 28 Wind There are several different types of wind measurements They are described in section 9 6 33 10 4 28 1 Wind Direction References Apparent Ground True Alert Types Direction Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 28 2 Wind Speed References Apparent Ground True Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert References Apparent Ground True Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 360 Maretran 11 Breaker Lockout From N2KView version 3 4 N2KView will support LOCKing of breakers From this same version N2KView supports the automated switching of breakers and switches and Breaker Lockout provides the user a method of preventing automated or accidental switching of breakers When working on a circuit that may be switched users should always LOCK that circuit in the OFF state to prevent shocks Circuits that are required for boat safety such as bilge pumps may be locked in the ON state to prevent accidental de activation Breaker Lockout requires
24. The IP address may be entered into one of the IP Address fields just below this box and transferred to the field by pressing one of the two buttons 9 4 5 1 2 Use 15 N2KServer Having this box checked enables the rest of the boxes for the 1st N2KServer and is an overall enable for the 19 N2KServer 9 4 5 1 3 15 IP Address Hostname Please set this field to the Hostname or IP address of the N2KServer to which you wish to connect 9 4 5 1 4 15 Port Please leave this field at the default setting of 6544 unless you have a router between N2KView and N2kServer set up with Port translation see 8 3 9 4 5 1 5 15 Password Please set this field to the same value as you entered in the Server Password text box of the N2KServer to which you are connecting NOTE this is different from the configuration protection password which is changed using the Password tab 9 4 5 1 6 Use 2 N2KServer Having this box checked enables the rest of the boxes for the 219 N2KServer and is an overall enable for the 2 N2KServer Revision 3 6 3 Page 100 Maretran 9 4 5 1 7 279 IP Address Hostname Please set this field to the Hostname or IP address of the N2KServer to which you wish to connect 9 4 5 1 8 2 Port Please leave this field at the default setting of 6544 unless you have a router between N2KView and N2kServer set up with Port translation see 8 3 9 4 5 1 9 2179 Password Please set this field to the same value as you entered in t
25. The larger the resolution the more detail can be seen in the picture and the greater the bandwidth requirement Revision 3 6 3 Page 374 Maretron 13 1 2 7 Data Rate Rather than try to calculate the bandwidth or data rate required to support the camera at the requested Compression Resolution and Frame Rate the Camera Editor will try to connect to the camera and the requested values and display the video and the data rate This will help you decide the balance between quality and cost in real time Revision 3 6 3 Page 375 Maretran 14 N2KView Mobile N2K View stations can run on the iPod Touch iPhone and iPad It must be downloaded from the iStore Each iPhone station will require a connection to N2KServer and a license N2K View can run on Android phones tablets running Android version 2 2 and later on the Arm v7 A processor It must be downloaded from the Play Store formally Android Marketplace N2KView can run on the Barnes and Noble Nook Color It must be downloaded from the Barnes and Noble store N2KView can run on the Kindle Fire It must be downloaded from the Amazon App Store This chapter is applicable to the iPod Touch iPhone iPad Nook Color Kindle Fire and Android devices For brevity unless otherwise stated statements relating to the iPhone will apply to all these devices 14 1 Restrictions N2KView Mobile does not support background processing therefore all functionality that requires data
26. e g Wind Data to 3 seconds When displaying Lat Long minutes are now rounded Alert Modes may be entered through Control Keys ctrl A ctrl D ctrl M and ctrl U New Alert modes of User 1 and User 2 The term Direction is now replaced with Direction Angle with reference to Wind Connection names changed from Primary Secondary to 1st 2nd Version 3 5 introduces the following new features Synchronize Alert Mode between N2KViews and DSM250s Revision 3 6 3 Page 33 Maretron e Support Secure Ports for email sending Also queue emails if email connection cannot be made e Correct Wind Direction with no Speed Through Water STW e Improved options available in Time Alerts e Add Reset of imported exported kWh on ACM100 e Correct Alerts Setup password protection when editing from Alert Screen e Allow Alert Save and Test to work regardless of Alert Mode e Corrected Digital Timer and Counter counting when Switch is controlled e Added more options to Video Controls to enable display of video without a border e Corrected Save to USB Flash Drive e Corrected Display of Moon Phase when N2KView starts on a New Moon e Add second page of Load Shedding e Add support for Vessel Data Recorder VDR100 e Reduce Minimum Screen Size to 800x480 pixels e Corrected save of Configuration under all changes e Corrected Time to Empty not being displayed e Corrected colors in Night Mode e Corrected Cr
27. engine manufacturer s documentation for details Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 212 Maretron 9 6 10 22 Warning Level 1 Generally indicates some engine specific warning condition Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Instances 253 9 6 10 23 Warning Level 2 Generally indicates some engine specific warning condition Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Instances 253 9 6 10 24 Water Flow Generally indicates a lack of water flow in cooling system Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Instances 253 9 6 10 25 Water In Fuel Generally indicates that water has been detected in the engine s fuel Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 213 Maretron 9 6 11 Environment 9 6 11 1 Bait Well Temperature Displays the temperature from a temperature
28. iPhone n2kview config or something similar Then press Save to open the Save Configuration Dialog see section 9 4 7 In the Save Configuration To Server section you will see the filename that you chose and the Send File button This will be grayed out of there is no connection to N2KServer in which case you will need to exit this dialog establish the connection and come back here Press Send File to send the file to the server Reload you normal configuration to continue using N2KView on the PC 14 4Starting N2KView on the iPhone Pee After downloading and installing N2KView and syncing your iPhone with iTunes press the N2KView icon to start N2KView Revision 3 6 3 Page 379 Maretran While N2KView is loading you will see this splash screen Android does not show a splash screen N2KView When that is complete you will be taken to the display screen for the Demo Revision 3 6 3 Page 380 Maretron Engine Room Demo Video Lights or ON O Let s get familiar with the demo version before loading the configuration file just placed on the server From version 3 6 0 N2KView mobile may be viewed in either portrait or landscape mode by rotating the mobile device In portrait mode one of the screens created on the PC is displayed at a time and the pages to the left and right of it are reached by swiping one finger left and right on the screen Swiping and down
29. kilowatts 9 6 3 12 Phase AB Line Line Voltage Displays the voltage between Phase A and Phase B of an AC Utility Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Hertz Instances 253 9 6 3 13 Phase B Apparent Power Displays the Apparent Power being drawn on Phase B from an AC Utility Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units VA 9 6 3 14 Phase B Current Displays the RMS electrical current being sourced from an AC Utility on phase B Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units Amperes 9 6 3 15 Phase B Frequency Displays the frequency of an AC Utility on phase B Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Hertz Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 193 Maretran 9 6 3 16 Phase B Line Neutral Voltage Displays the phase B to neutral RMS voltage of an AC Utility Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Hertz Instances 253 9 6 3 17 Phase B Power Factor Displays the Power Factor of phase B of an AC Utility Component Types Digital Units Instances 253 9 6 3 18 Phase B Reactive Power Displays the Reactive Power being drawn on Phase B from an AC Utility Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units VAr 9 6 3 19 Phase B Real Power Displays the Real Power being drawn on Phase B from an AC Utility Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units Watts kilowatts 9 6 3 20 Phase BC Line
30. you may Enter Demo Mode In Demo Mode you will not be able to connect to a Server and view live data instead simulated data will be provided to Revision 3 6 3 Page 63 Maretron stimulate the controls Clicking with the right mouse button will force N2KView to the top left of the screen The first time you run N2KView you must configure the connection to enable N2KView to receive information from an instance of N2KServer or an IPG100 Server This is done through the following steps N2KView Helm KL Engine 1acnometer S A S Settings og wn Ki E Ki E E o rpm Engine Oil Pressure rpm Engine Fuel Rate Engine Tilt Trim Figure 21 N2KView Window with Tabs Displayed Click anywhere inside the N2KView screen to display the screen tabs as shown in the figure above Click on the Commands amp Settings tab to display the buttons to access the Settings dialogs Revision 3 6 3 Page 64 N2KView Galley ES EN b N2KView N2KView Bridge Connections Settings LR Server Connection Email Connection SMS Text Connection Available N2KServer IP Addresses N2KServer IPG100 SN 1629906 found at 10 0 0 113 N2KServer IPG100 SN 1620002 found at 10 0 0 67 Connection State Connected to 1st N2KServer Figure 22 Connections Settings Dialog Revision 3 6 3 Page 65 Maretran Ensure that N2KView is not connected to a Server by pressing the Disconnect
31. 0 9 4 4 2 5 Default Gateway This is the IP Address of the router 9 4 4 2 6 Default DNS This is the IP address of a computer on the Internet that can identify and locate computer systems and resources on the internet 9 4 4 2 7 Update Pressing this button will cause N2KView to exit update the Network Parameters on the computer and then restart Revision 3 6 3 Page 95 Maretron 9 4 4 3 Screen Configuration Section The fields in this section are used to control whether and how long the computer will wait before blanking the screen in the MBB100 and DSM800 only If a MBB100 or DSM800 is installed in a cabin it may be required to blank the screen when not in use to darken the cabin Blanking the screen leaves the device fully functional capturing data and evaluating alarm conditions and just the screen is switched off On the other hand a MBB100 or DSM800 installed on the bridge may be required to display its information all the time Configuration x Configuration Network Configuration Screen Configuration Enable Screen Blanking reen Resolution Screen Scan Rate Pair Bluetooth Device Calibrate Touch Screen Close 9 4 4 3 1 Enable Screen Blanking When selected the screen will blank after the set amount of time When unchecked the screen will never blank 9 4 4 3 2 Delay Before Screen Blanks This is the delay in minutes and seconds from the last operator input mouse keyboard or touch until t
32. 1 Camera Setup Before the cameras can be accessed from the Screen Setup they must be entered into N2KView in the Camera Setup Screen This screen is entered by selecting the Cameras Setup tab on the Settings Dialog Cameras Setup Dialog CamerasName Name CameraType Network Address Booth 1 Axis 215 Network Camera 10 0 0 91 Engine Room Axis Quad Video Server 2410 127 0 0 1 Stern Deck Axis Single Video Server 2415 10 0 0 94 k EE New Edit Delete Close Figure 127 Camera Setup Dialog The Camera Editor Dialog is entered either be pressing New or by selecting an existing camera from the list in the Cameras Setup Screen and pressing Edit Once in the Camera Editor dialog select the type of camera from the Type Drop Down List Type Axis 215 PTZ Network Camera Axis 212 PTZ Network Camera Axis P3301 Fixed Dome Network Camera Axis Single Video Server 241S Axis Quad Video Server 2419 Figure 128 Camera Type Drop Down List Scroll up and down to see all the choices Revision 3 6 3 Page 371 Maretron Note that one physical camera may be represented by more than one camera in this list possibly with different resolutions or frame rates 13 1 1 Examples of Camera Setup Camera Editor x OCH USB Camera v Mirror Image DW Save Cancel Figure 129 USB Camera Camera Editor x Network Address vr Mirror image ij Reverse Horizontal Controls ij Reverse Vertical Contro
33. 3 x If you are updating from a previous version of N2KView 3 x the following dialog will be shown previous version of N2KView version 3 x exists on this system Uninstall it ONLY if a new version is not going to be installed nDo you want to finally and completely uninstall the previous version of N2KView with all its data ee JS If you want to completely erase the previous version of N2KView and all its data configuration files screen backgrounds etc press Yes In most cases a simple upgrade keeping all the data in place will be preferred and you can press No d The Welcome screen will be shown next Please press Next gt to continue the installation Revision 3 6 3 Page 52 Maretron Welcome to the Maretron N2KView Installer Setup Wizard This will install Maretron N2K View Installer 3 4 on your computer It is recommended that you close all other applications before continuing Click Next to continue or Cancel to exit Setup e If you do not have the Adobe Integrated Runtime AIR installed on your computer you will be instructed to install AIR If you do have AIR already installed skip to section h If you are installing from a CD the Adobe AIR Installer will be included on the CD and the installation will start immediately Skip to section g f Loading AIR from the Adobe website The installer will open a page on the Adobe website from which you must download AIR Adobe A
34. 421 Oo og Be e 94 EEE YG EE 95 94423 Pr EE 95 GE E WEE 95 94425 Default Galewayr unumsmmmannunenninimjnejnisddnvebnte odds 95 9 4 4 2 6 Default DNS Lunsavsesgek edge ud 95 9 44 27 UNNE senere 95 9 4 4 3 Screen Configuration Gechon ENEE EEN 96 9 4 4 3 1 Enable Screen Banking 96 9 4 4 3 2 Delay Before Screen Blanks EEN 96 92433 Screen Peso usvvv422rv44vvec versaler 97 94434 Screen Scan Fate Lavangsdalen 97 92205 UTG undere eegen 97 9 4 4 4 Pair Bluetooth Device Ae 98 9 4 4 5 Calibrate Touch Gcreen eee ceceeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennneeeeeeeees 98 9245 Connections Dialog EE 99 9 4 5 1 N2KServer Connection Gechon EE 99 9 4 5 1 1 Available N2KServer IP Addresses AAA 100 9 4 5 1 2 Use 1 NAS ENE ssncsusiicnshuvaduiamassdanatsisdanctudebavad isnysiSahenchadisunuiens 100 Revision 3 6 3 Page 4 Maretran 9 4 5 1 3 1StIP Address Hostname errrnnnrvnnnnnnvrnnnnnnnvvnnnnnnevvvnnnnnnvrnnnnenevrne 100 JARA Mi l a ea eee ne nS one Se ro on ae 100 9 4 5 1 5 1 Password ujgenenmenmmimemmndedejennndjenbennnie tune tp 100 9 4 5 1 6 Use 2 9N2KServer oo ccccceccccccccceeeeesseneceeeeeeeeesesststeeeeeeeeeeseeteneneees 100 9 4 5 1 7 2 IP Address Hostname ccceeeececceeeeceeeeeeeenteeeeeeeeeeeeeensnneees 101 9 4 5 1 8 209 ER deadiutds 101 94519 209 Password wicccccsescecsesetesecesesssnssssasseccccseesadenssssencossensdinanensezecdannes 101 9 4 5 1 10 Use Maretron Cloud Services cccccscescessessesces
35. 8 Course Up OSS Lua 144 GE Oe e E 145 SERA 146 9 5 11 Dometic Air Conditioning Heating rrnnnnnnnrnnnnnvrrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrrnnnnnnnnnnn 147 9 5 12 Dometic 166 Makeru mmunsuemtunnsnet iter niebascondeecemiulyadeeboiedeends 149 JE RS eee ere TE ere oe rc eee ere eee ere ee 150 9519 EI 152 95 15 _INCINOMETET ee ee 153 9516 Indicator VAM E 155 9 5 17 Small Indicator e EE 155 9 5 18 Indicator Bear E 156 9 5 19 Line Graph Depth Graph Indicator Graphie 158 9 5 20 Moon Phase e ee eeebetetgegegE eeben eege beeggieritegbegebet 162 9 5 21 North Up Rose an 163 9 5 22 Push BOIS Lagesen nanana ananin ana awanan ataa aaa 165 95 23 Rate of TUNM E 166 9 5 24 Rudder Angle RE 168 G EE EEE 170 2520 Tree 171 95 27 pe 171 9 5 28 Vacuum RE EE 173 GEER EE 173 9530 VEN 176 9 5 30 1 Video and Video with PTZ Control 176 9 5 30 23 4 Video No Border een 177 95303433 Video No Border Lemsmmesmresnieemnniininrignyedunjendneidagndndbdasdednt 177 9 5 30 4 16 9 Video No Border EE 178 GE E VTA 179 9 6 Available Data Types nsiccccccsseecssecsccobtestdesnsanccenid eoedeentenssecddensceeniesnaesddeusieonientes 181 GE Ne 181 9 6 1 1 Average Frequency EE 181 9 6 1 2 Average Lin Lin Voltage iiss ccucacexuscnanenanexncnvexexsnentecnannrbedeiansiecnnnavenevans 181 9 6 1 3 Average Line Neutral Voltage AEN 181 EE Eg se eegene Eegbeeiet 181 9 6 1 5 Phase A Line Neutral Voltage AEN 182 Revision 3 6 3 Page 7 Maretran 9 6 1 6 Phase A
36. 96121 Distance to re 220 9 6 12 2 Time to BOP a pecaciesctnjcenseteenitontnpeaneenccrdoadnpieevehanseoacdapedecsdapiadoneanteeondade 220 96 123 Total Fuel Capacity sassmnsmnmeneisisesesesimnmntsjondevjmnsshendnietnine 221 9 6 12 4Total Fuel Consumption Vol Dis 221 9 6 12 5Total Fuel Economy Dis Mol 221 Seeerei eege beet eege Eee 222 9 6 12 7 Total ee NER 222 9 6 12 6 Total Fuel Remaining e egbe e eeeber ieegbide eerbieg eee Sbautnosbocetuaupidesuantvantonte 222 G71 2 9 RR die Fuel UA 223 951210 Total Trip Fuel USE veden 223 9613 Egeter eege 224 9 6 13 1 Course Over Ground E 224 916 EE 224 96 13 Skat LOM EE 224 9 6 13 4Speed Over Ground EEN 224 9614 TAC AIAG E 225 GE ah Min Aee A E E E E E E raey een E E E EA 225 96 142 Rate of EE 225 EES EN 225 9 6 15 Hud Lavere sere OSAR EEN SE E EEANN AERE 226 9 6 16 Ice Makers mmmmmnrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnevnnnnnnnnenennnnneune 226 EEE E AE 226 96 17 ORC AN OW EE EE AN 226 9 6 17 1 Hardware Counter TE 226 961 1 2Hardvare TIME uavgsnedsdedededekeddkekdeddkvddluitdiden 226 Revision 3 6 3 Page 11 Maretran E SE ER de AA E REDE Eaa ENa EA raana aN EEEE 227 9 6 18 N2KServer N2KView Connection rrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnennn 227 9 6 18 1 Cloud Server Data Hemaimmg 227 9 6 18 2Cloud Server Data Used een 227 9 6 18 3Cloud Server Percent Remaining ee 228 9 6 18 4Cloud Server Percent Used EEN 228 TEE ege erte egbee 228 9 6
37. A Reactive Power Monitors the Reactive Power on Phase A of a Utility Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 3 11 Phase A Real Power Monitors the Real Power on Phase A of a Utility Revision 3 6 3 Page 315 Maretron Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 3 12 Phase AB Line Line Voltage Monitors the RMS voltage between Phase A and Phase B of a Utility Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 3 13 Phase B Apparent Power Monitors the Apparent Power being sourced from a Utility on phase B Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 3 14 Phase B Current Monitors the AC RMS electrical current being sourced from a Utility on phase B Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 3 15 Phase B Frequency Monitors the frequency of phase B of a Utility Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 3 16 Phase B Line Neutral Voltage Monitors the RMS voltage between Phase B and neutral of a Utility Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 316 Maretran 10 4 3 17 Phase B Power Factor Monitors the Power Factor of Phase B of a Utility Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 3 18 Phase B Reactive Power M
38. A global alert can be accepted or cancelled by any N2KView Station having a Alerts Module or DSM150 DSM250 on the network When an alert occurs it is displayed on the Alert Status Bar which is always visible in a reserved area at the bottom of the N2KView window You may click on the alert in the Alert Status Bar to take action on it or you may switch to the Alerts tab to view more detailed information about the cause of the alert N2KView can also perform the following actions when an alert becomes active e Send Alert Messages to other N2KView programs or DSM150 DSM250 Displays connected on the same bus or to remote N2KView programs connected over Ethernet e Sound a remote annunciator such as Maretron s ALM100 Alarm Module on the NMEA 2000 bus http www maretron com products alm100 php One or more channels of Maretron s DCR100 Direct Current Module http www maretron com products dcr100 php may also be triggered to drive an external alarm e Sound the speaker on the PC e Send an e mail message e Senda SMS Text Message to a cell phone requires a SMS100 Module e ifthe optional N2k View Control Module is ticensed N2k View can activate and deactivate breakers switches suchas the Maretron DECR100 This feature has been removed for safety reasons Revision 3 6 3 Page 255 Maretran 10 2 Alert Concepts 10 2 1 Alert Types An alert is a signal to a user that there is either an alarm or warning condition
39. AC Controller has Auxiliary Heat capability then this mode will be included in the cycle The following figure shows a Q Logic Air Conditioner with five fan speeds and set to Auto Mode with an Auxiliary Heat option Q Logic Air Conditioner Ambient 75 Set Point 11 et Auto Q Logic cycle Auto w aux heat o v cp Ki a ke a Ne a Ki Figure 57 Q Logic Air Conditioner Component with Aux Heat Please refer to the Marine Air Systems Elite Air Conditioner documentation for further details Revision 3 6 3 Page 148 Maretran 9 5 12 Dometic Ice Maker The Eskimo Ice range of Ice Makers manufactured by Dometic have a J1939 connector With the insertion of a Maretron J2K100 J1939 to NMEA 2000 Gateway http www maretron com products j2k100 php the PGNs from the Ice Makers may be transmitted to N2KView and displayed Each Ice Maker will require a separate J2K100 Gateway With the licensing of the Control Module the Ice Maker may also be switched On and Off remotely Ice Maker Ice Flow Water Flow u High Pres sure e Low Pressure r e fa en e T bk C en Ki Ki Comp Auger ce Bim Full On Off Display Figure 58 Ice Maker Component Example Pressing the On Off button will command the unit to turn On or Off if the Control Module has been licensed Pressing the Display button will cycle the display through Status Compressor Current Auger Current and AC Vo
40. AC power from a Utility across all phases Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 3 3 Average Line Line Voltage Monitors the average line to line RMS voltage of the AC power from a Utility across all phases Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 3 4 Average Line Neutral Voltage Monitors the average line to neutral RMS voltage of the AC power from a Utility across all phases Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 3 5 Phase A Apparent Power Monitors the Apparent Power being sourced from a Utility on phase A Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 314 Maretran 10 4 3 6 Phase A Current Monitors the AC RMS electrical current being sourced from a Utility on phase A Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 3 7 Phase A Frequency Monitors the frequency of phase A of a Utility Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 3 8 Phase A Line Neutral Voltage Monitors the RMS voltage between Phase A and neutral of a Utility Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 3 9 Phase A Power Factor Monitors the Power Factor of Phase A of a Utility Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 3 10 Phase
41. Average Line Neutral Voltage Displays the average line to neutral RMS voltage of an AC Utility on all phases Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Hertz Instances 253 9 6 3 5 AC Utility Phase A Apparent Power Displays the Apparent Power being drawn on Phase A from an AC Utility Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units VA 9 6 3 6 Phase A Current Displays the RMS electrical current being sourced from an AC Utility on phase A Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units Amperes Revision 3 6 3 Page 191 Maretron 9 6 3 7 Phase A Frequency Displays the frequency of an AC Utility on phase A Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Hertz Instances 253 9 6 3 8 Phase A Line Neutral Voltage Displays the phase A to neutral RMS voltage of an AC Utility Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Hertz Instances 253 9 6 3 9 Phase A Power Factor Displays the Power Factor of phase A of an AC Utility Component Types Digital Units Instances 253 9 6 3 10 Phase A Reactive Power Displays the Reactive Power being drawn on Phase A from an AC Utility Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units VAr 9 6 3 11 Phase A Real Power Displays the Real Power being drawn on Phase A from an AC Utility Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Revision 3 6 3 Page 192 Maretran Instances 253 Units Watts
42. Course Bearing This selection box allows you to decide whether headings course and bearing information are displayed as True relative to the geographic North Pole or Magnetic relative to the magnetic north pole 9 4 8 3 3 Wind True Vessel Ref Wind True Vessel Ref defines the reference used to calculate the speed and direction of the wind as if the boat were stopped This global setting determines whether stopped means relative to a point on the ground or to the water e Power boaters may prefer to use the Ground setting of this parameter This gives the speed and direction of the Wind as if the receiver were sitting on the ground facing in the same direction as the bow of the boat To calculate True wind speed with a Ground reference from the Apparent Wind requires o Course over Ground from a GPS e g GPS200 o Speed over Ground from a GPS e g GPS200 o Heading from a Compass e g SSC200 e Sail boaters may prefer to use the Water setting This gives the speed and direction of the wind as if the receiver were drifting in the water facing in the same direction as the bow of the boat To calculate True wind speed with a Ground reference from the Apparent Wind requires o Speed though Water from a Log e g DST110 e The last setting Station should only be used for land based installations where there is no movement This requires no other data assuming that all speeds are zero Revision 3 6 3 Page
43. Factor of phase A of the AC power from a generator Revision 3 6 3 Page 185 Maretron Component Types Digital Units Instances 253 9 6 2 10 Phase A Reactive Power Displays the Reactive Power being drawn on Phase A from a generator Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units VAr 9 6 2 11 Phase A Real Power Displays the Real Power being drawn on Phase A from a generator Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units Watts kilowatts 9 6 2 12 Phase AB Line Line Voltage Displays the voltage between Phase A and Phase B of the AC power from a generator Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Hertz Instances 253 9 6 2 13 Phase B Apparent Power Displays the Apparent Power being drawn on Phase B from a generator Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 186 Maretron Units VA 9 6 2 14 Phase B Current Displays the AC RMS electrical current being sourced from a generator on phase B Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units Amperes 9 6 2 15 Phase B Frequency Displays the frequency of the AC power from a generator on phase B Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Hertz Instances 253 9 6 2 16 Phase B Line Neutral Voltage Displays the phase B to neutral RMS voltage of the AC power from a generator Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Hertz Inst
44. Line Graph Units degrees Centigrade degrees Fahrenheit Instances 253 9 6 24 10 Inside Temperature Displays the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Inside Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units degrees Centigrade degrees Fahrenheit Instances 253 9 6 24 11 Live Well Temperature Displays the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Live Well Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Revision 3 6 3 Page 241 Maretron Units degrees Centigrade degrees Fahrenheit Instances 253 9 6 24 12 Main Cabin Temperature Displays the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Main Cabin Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units degrees Centigrade degrees Fahrenheit Instances 253 9 6 24 13 Outside Temperature Displays the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Outside Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units degrees Centigrade degrees Fahrenheit Instances 253 9 6 24 14 Refrigeration Temperature Displays the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Refrigeration Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units degrees Centigrade degrees Fahrenheit Instances 253 9 6 24 15 Sea Temperature Displays the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Sea
45. Maretron s entire liability and your sole and exclusive remedy This remedy shall not apply if the storage device on which the SOFTWARE is stored has been damaged by negligence accident improper or unreasonable use or by any other cause unrelated to defective material or workmanship If you have a warranty claim you must contact the Maretron customer services department for a return authorization during the warranty period If the customer service representative is unable to correct your problem you will be provided with a return authorization number and an address for returning the defective item for warranty service or replacement You must either return the defective item post paid postmarked within the time period stated above You must either insure the defective item being returned or assume the risk of loss or damage in transit Any claim under the above warranty must include a copy of your receipt or invoice or other proof of the date of delivery No warranty claims will be honored which are made after the expiration of the warranty period 11 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY MARETRON AND ITS SUPPLIERS SHALL NOT IN ANY CASE BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR DIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL INDIRECT CONSEQUENTIAL PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF USE REVENUE PROFIT Revision 3 6 3 Page 404 Maretron DATA PROPERTY DAMAGE OR INJURY WHETHER SUCH LIABILITY IS
46. Minutes Seconds Low Alert Set Point 11 5 Volts Set Delay Minutes Seconds Low Alert Clear Point 12 5 Volts Clear Delay Minutes Seconds Save and Test Actions Save Cancel Figure 97 Alert Editor Example Revision 3 6 3 Page 267 Maretran 10 3 6 1 Alert Definition Section Alert Editor Engine Tachometer High Alert x GEN Revs too High Location Instance 2 Port Generator Figure 98 Alert Editor Alert Definition Section The Alert Definition Section of the Alert Editor is located at the top of the Alert Editor and contains the description of the alert and the parameter that is to be monitored 10 3 6 1 1 Type Type Alarm v am Warning In this field you may classify the alert as either an Alarm or a Warning see Section 10 2 for details 10 3 6 1 2 Priority Priority iS Here you program a priority for the alert that allows you to rank it in importance compared to other alerts The priority value can range from 0 to 4000 with 0 Revision 3 6 3 Page 268 Maretran being the most important N2KView will ensure that every alert has a unique priority number by omitting used priorities from the drop down list You can have an Alarm and a Warning with the same Priority Implicitly all Alarms have a higher Priority than all Warnings i e Alarm 567 has a higher Priority than Warning 0 10 3 6 1 3 Scope Seeli Global This field allows you to determin
47. Mismatch 10 0 0 94 00408C8D336C AXIS 2415 i lid New Devices 2 T AXIS 241Q 00408C93AD7A Credentials Mismatch axis 00408c93ad7a phx aiec com 00408C93AD7A AXIS 241Q l Wamings Erors 2 Je My Groups 1 objects selected Revision 3 6 3 Page 408 Maretron c Double click on the name Axis 241Q to log on to the video server You will be prompted for a username and password The default username is root and the default password pass d The camera will provide the following web page to your default browser sila br Basic Configuration Instructions A i Before using the AXIS 241Q Video Server there are certain settings that should be 1 Users made most of vhich require Administrator access privileges To quickly access these 2 TCP IP settings use the numbered shortcuts to the left All the settings are also available 3 Date amp Time from the standard setup links in the menu 4 Video amp Image Note that the only required setting is the IP address which is set on the TCP IP page All other settings are optional Please see the online help for more information gt Video amp Image L Firmware ion 4 40 2 gt Live View Config MAC address 00 40 8C 93 AD 74 gt Event Configuration gt System Options About S Basic Configuration Basic Configuration AXIS 241Q Video Server Mozilla Firefox ess File Edit View History Bookmarks Yahoo Tool
48. Multiple Monitor Support Dedicated Video Cards with Minimum 64 MB memory per monitor e Touch Screen or Mouse with Windows Compatible Driver e Keyboard for assigning user defined titles to components entering passwords and connection information 4 2 N2KServer The following requirements must be met in order to successfully run N2KServer onaPC e Operating System Windows XP Home Edition Professional Microsoft Vista 32 or 64 bit or Windows 7 32 or 64 bit e CPU Minimum Pentium 4 or Equivalent Recommended Pentium 4 3 0 GHz e Memory Minimum 512 MB RAM Recommended 1 GB RAM e Hard Drive Space 40 MB e CD ROM or DVD Drive e Video Card Minimum 128 MB memory Recommended 256 MB e USB Ports Two 1 1 or 2 0 compatible ports e Network Connection 10BASE T or 100BASE TX or 802 1 1a b g e ANMEA 2000 gateway Currently compatible gateways include the following Revision 3 6 3 Page 37 Maretron o Maretron USB100 with firmware revision 1 7 1 or greater contact Maretron for any necessary firmware updates with a Maretron USB100 Windows driver dated 8 3 2007 version 1 0 0 0 or a more recent revision This version of the driver is installed by default by the Maretron N2KServer Setup Wizard but you may need to manually update the USB100 driver using the Windows Device Manager in order to use the updated driver if you are using a NMEA 2000 gateway you installed previously to installing N2KServer N2KServer can operate with
49. Point Volts Set Delay Minutes Seconds High Alert Clear Point Volts Clear Delay Minutes Seconds Figure 103 Trigger Configuration High Alert Accept Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If the condition which caused the alert remains true after the amount of time in this field the alert will return to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert The value is entered as minutes seconds If only one number is entered it will be interpreted as seconds If a value of 0 00 is entered then the alert will never re trigger High Alert Set Point If the value of the parameter being monitored rises above the value in this field the alert will become active Set Delay The parameter being monitored must rise above the High Alert Set Point value for longer than the time in this field in order for an alert to become active This can be used to prevent false alerts caused by parameter values that briefly have a value that would cause an alert but quickly return to the normal Revision 3 6 3 Page 275 Maretron value range The value is entered as minutes seconds If only one number is entered it will be interpreted as seconds High Alert Clear Point If the alert is active and the parameter value falls below the value in this field the alert will become inactive C
50. Touch RBE e ME 81 9 1 2 Keyboard Operation gege Eege 81 CREMER EE 81 9 1 4 Components E 81 9 1 5 Favorite Screens and Parameter Display 2 cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 82 Revision 3 6 3 Page 3 Maretron 9 1 6 Protecting the System Configuration ccccccceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseneeeeeeees 82 91 7 Grid Layo t Concepts ssrin eaaa a E EE A 83 9 1 8 Hardware License key 84 9 2 Using e EE 85 9 2 1 The Opening SOIC E 85 9 2 2 The Operational Mode Gcreen EE 86 9 3 ee EE 86 9 3 1 Changing Between Favorite screens ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeeeees 87 9 3 2 Entering Configuration Modes rnnnvvrvvnnnnnnnnvrnnnnnrrrrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnrrrnrnnnnennennn 87 9 3 3 Switching Between Day and Night Mode 87 9 3 4 Switching Between Windowed and Full Screen Configurations 87 935 enk Eet 88 936 Terminating NEEN SEe 88 9 4 AONUMA EN ET EN 88 9 4 1 Commands and Settings Dialog ENEE 88 g4 2 About DAM ujevne Ge a iaeiaiai e 90 94 3 Change Password Dialog EE 91 944 Configuration Dialog EE 92 9 4 4 1 Configuration TAD E 92 EE G E A T oedegaesoa dea abioadinethad Maceve 92 9 4412 E iiser onsin oaii eea eee EEE Eaa 93 EE OA ME 93 EEE EEE 93 9 4 4 1 5 Allow Automatic Updates from Web 93 9 4 4 1 6 Cycle Through Screens urnnrrrnnnnrrrrnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnrrnnnnnne 94 9 4 4 2 Network Configuration Section eennnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnn 94 94
51. Watermaker and an N2KView Control Module e Wind Revision 3 6 3 Page 39 Maretron Provides ability to control compatible NMEA 2000 switches and circuit breakers requires optional Control module Client Server architecture allows monitoring from anywhere in the world with an internet connection If a direct connection to the boat is not possible then Maretron s Cloud Service may be used to make the connection Revision 3 6 3 Page 40 Maretron The optional Alert Module provides the ability to monitor a wide variety of NMEA 2000 data for alert conditions and to perform one or more of the following actions when an alert condition is met Display the alert on any or all N2KView Screens connected to an N2KView Server on the NMEA 2000 network This includes N2KView stations connected remotely through an Internet connection Sound one or more Annunciators connected to the NMEA 2000 network Sound the PC Speaker on local and or remote Alerts Email alert details to one or more email addresses including cell phones Text SMS alert details to one or more cell phones SSL Encryption with password protection for security against eavesdropping Password protected configuration files Password protected server login Gauge components with programmable warning and fault ranges and optional tracking on minimum maximum values Digital components with programmable warning and fault ranges Unlimited number of user configurable
52. alert will become active if the monitored course differs from the Reference Direction by more than the Offset COG Set Point for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field GPS Quality Alert The alert will become active if the GPS Quality drops below the level set in the GPS Quality Alert Set field for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field Outside Radius Alert The alert will become active if the distance between the current GPS position and the Reference Latitude and Longitude rises above the value in the Outside Radius Alert Set field for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field Inside Radius Alert The alert will become active if the distance between the current GPS position and the Reference Latitude and Longitude falls below the value in the Outside Radius Alert Set field for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field Anchor Watch Alert The alert will become active if the distance between the current GPS position and the Reference Latitude and Longitude rises above the value in the Anchor Watch Alert Set Point field for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay Field Direction Alert The alert will become active if the monitored course differs from the Reference Direction by more than the Offset Wind Direction Set Point for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field Timer Alert The alert will become active when the time reaches the time specified
53. and drag it until the component is the desired size then release the mouse button or remove your finger from the screen You may not resize a component so that it overlaps one or more other components Since resizing only works on the lower right hand corner of the component you may want to move the component before resizing it so that the upper left hand corner of the component is in the desired place before you resize it Revision 3 6 3 Page 123 9 4 10 18 Component Editor The Component Editor has a number of different fields only the fields that are applicable to the parameter chosen will be displayed Examples of Component Editors are shown below Component Editor Engine Tachometer l l x ve e yo Sat Averaging Period mn min sec max 10 00 IE Hold Min Value I Hold Max Value Minimum Value 0 CRT 4000 Peng A 5 chometer Figure 42 Component Editor Revision 3 6 3 Page 124 Maretran 9 4 10 18 1 Preview Each component editor has a preview screen so that you can see what the finished component will look like If real data matching the parameter is available it will be displayed in the Preview 9 4 10 18 2 Title ke 2 Port Tachometer m Use Label The title of the component is displayed to the left of Bar Graph Components within Indicators and above all the other types of Components This is a free form text field that should be used to clearly label what is being displayed While t
54. and not for the benefit of any third party Notwithstanding the foregoing you may transfer you rights under this Agreement on a permanent basis provided that you transfer this Agreement and the SOFTWARE and that you do not retain any copies of this Agreement or SOFTWARE and that the transferee agrees to all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement 4 UPGRADES If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade from a Maretron product you now may use that upgraded product only in accordance with this Agreement 5 LICENSE TERM The term of the license granted to you hereunder the License Term will commence upon your opening of the sealed software package and or by using this SOFTWARE and will continue indefinitely unless and until the Agreement is terminated The Agreement shall be terminated as follows a you may terminate the Agreement at any time with or without cause effective upon your delivery to Maretron of written notice of termination or b the Agreement shall terminate immediately and without notice if you fail to comply with any term or condition of this Agreement 6 EFFECT OF TERMINATION All of the provisions of this Agreement which are not expressly limited to the period of the License Term including without limitation the provisions regarding disclaimers of warranties limitations of liability remedies and proprietary rights shall survive the termination of the License Term Promptly following the termination of the License Term you
55. and the Heat symbol shows that it has automatically been placed into Heat mode to try to raise the ambient temperature to the set point value Master Stateroom Ambient F Set Point q 71 et Auto Elite cycle ARMO Figure 56 Air Conditioner Component Example The Buttons from left to right have the following functions O On Off Pressing this button will cycle the Air Conditioner On or Off In the Off ve state it will continue to display the ambient temperature in the room and the fan may be switched ES Ki Adjust Set Point Temperature Pressing these buttons will adjust the Set Point Temperature Up and Down The new temperature is transmitted to the Air Controller which will then transmit the updated Revision 3 6 3 Page 147 Maretron the values on the bus and only on receipt of these values will the Set Point Display be updated Fan Control Pressing this button will cycle the fan through the Auto mode and the speeds allowed by the Air Controller The Elite AC Controller has three manual speeds The Q Logic Controller has either three or five speeds If the button is pressed and held then the Fan will switch between Continuous and Cycled operation Operating Mode Control Pressing this button will cycle through the Operating Modes of the AC Controller These are Auto Cool Heat and Dehumidify the current Operating Mode is shown by lighting one of the symbols directly above the button If the Q Logic
56. average line to neutral RMS voltage of the AC power from a generator Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 307 Maretran 10 4 2 5 Phase A Apparent Power Monitors the Apparent Power being sourced from a generator on phase A Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 2 6 Phase A Current Monitors the AC RMS electrical current being sourced from a generator on phase A Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 2 7 Phase A Frequency Monitors the frequency of phase A of a generator Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 2 8 Phase A Line Neutral Voltage Monitors the RMS voltage between Phase A and neutral of a generator Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 2 9 Phase A Power Factor Monitors the Power Factor of Phase A of a generator Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 2 10 Phase A Reactive Power Monitors the Reactive Power on Phase A of a generator Revision 3 6 3 Page 308 Maretron Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 2 11 Phase A Real Power Monitors the Real Power on Phase A of a generator Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 2 12 Phase AB Line Line Voltage Mon
57. before continuing with the installation Maretron Software License Agreement WARNING CAREFULLY READ THIS ENTIRE SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THE ENCLOSED FTWARE PROGRAM THIS AGREEMENT IS LEGALLY BINDING UPON YOU EITHER AN INDIVIDUAL OR ENTITY AND MARETRON LLP BY OPENING THE SEALED SOFTWARE PACKAGE AND OR BY USING THIS SOFTWARE YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS accept the agreement do not accept the agreement een sst Figure 2 N2KServer Installation Wizard License Agreement Page d The Select Start Menu Folder screen appears next If you wish to change the name of the start menu folder from the default shown enter it in the text box Click Next to continue Select Start Menu Folder Where should Setup place the peogram s shortcuts Setup wil create the program s shortcuts in the following Start Menu folder To continue cick Next If you would like to select a diferent folder click Browse Browse lt Back Next gt Figure 3 N2KServer Installation Wizard Select Start Menu Folder Page e The Select Destination Location screen will display next If you wish to install to a different location from the default shown enter it in the text box or Revision 3 6 3 Page 44 Maretron click the Browse button to navigate to your desired installation directory Click Next to continue eu Setup Maretron N2KServer e
58. being monitored must continually be received with a valid value for longer than the time in this field in order for the alert to become inactive 10 3 6 4 4 On Alert As opposed to high and low alerts that are associated with analog input signals i e many different possible input values there are also switch alerts that are associated with a binary input value sometimes called on or off yes or no enabled or disabled set or reset active or inactive The switch alert is similar to the high and low alert except that there are no set or reset points The mere fact that the switch is seen as On causes the alert to become an active alert assuming the Set Delay is set to zero Likewise if the switch being monitored is seen as false i e binary 0 then the alert becomes inactive assuming the Clear Delay is set to zero If the delays are not programmed to zero then the switch must remain On for the Set Delay before the alert becomes active and must remain Off for the Clear Delay before the alert becomes inactive 10 3 6 4 4 1 Trigger Configuration Trigger Configuration Accept Re trigger Period Minutes Seconds Set Delay Minutes Seconds Clear Delay Minutes Seconds Figure 107 Trigger Configuration On Alert Accept Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If the condition which caused the alert remain
59. box Once you have typed the desired password into the Server Password textbox press the Set button to cause the text to be set as the server password for N2KServer Set this button can be pressed only when the N2KServer is stopped When you press this button the text that has been typed into the Server Password textbox will be set as the server password for N2KServer Revision 3 6 3 Page 394 Maretron 15 1 3 Minimizing N2KServer Service Manager To minimize N2KServer Service Manager to the system tray click on the minimize button with a straight horizontal line in the bottom of the button third from the right in the group of system buttons in the extreme upper right hand corner of the window at the right edge of the Windows title bar 15 1 4 Terminating N2KServer Service Manager To terminate the N2KServer Service Manager click on the red X in the extreme upper right hand corner of the window at the right edge of the Windows title bar You may also terminate N2KServer Service Manager using the Alt F4 key combination when N2KServer Service Manager is the active window In either case the N2KView Service Manager will terminate but the N2KServer Windows Service will continue to run if it is running when the Service Manager is terminated 15 1 5 Security and User Accounts The N2KServer program runs as a Windows service This ensures that the program can start when Windows starts that is no one
60. button The Windows taskbar will then disappear from view but will reappear whenever you move the mouse to the bottom edge of the computer screen Revision 3 6 3 Page 87 Maretron You may also enter Full Screen mode by pressing the Enter Full Scrn button in the Commands and Settings Dialog In Full Screen Mode this button changes to Exit Full Scrn and now can be used to exit Full Screen mode Escape ESC will also transition from Full Screen Mode to Windowed Mode but will not arrange the components to fit the new screen size If the system was shut down in Full Screen mode then it will start up again in Full Screen mode after the initial Warning message has been accepted The MBB100 TSM800 TSM1330 and DSM800 will only operate in Full Screen Mode and has no ability to change out of this mode 9 3 5 Minimizing N2KView To minimize N2KView to the taskbar switch N2KView into windowed mode if it not already there see Section 9 3 4 for details and then click on the minimize button with a straight horizontal line in the bottom of the button third from the right in the group of system buttons in the extreme upper right hand corner of the window at the right edge of the Windows title bar The MBB100 TSM800 TSM1330 and DSM800 may not be minimized 9 3 6 Terminating N2KView To terminate the N2KView program click on the Shutdown tab in the Commands and Settings Dialog If N2KView is in windowed mode clicking on the
61. button While N2KView is connected you are not able to edit fields In the 15 IP Address Hostname text box enter the IP address of the computer or IPG100 running N2KServer If N2KServer is running on this computer enter 127 0 0 1 Leave the Port setting at the initial value of 6544 unless the router between N2KView and N2KServer has been set up to do port translation In the Password text box enter the same server password that you entered into the N2KServer Service Manager If you have purchased optional modules for N2KView and wish to use one or more of these modules select the appropriate licenses that must be checked out from the server If you have not purchased a module or you do not wish to use the module at this station do not check out the license leaving that module s functionality available for another copy of N2KView Click Connect The Connection State part of the window will blink Connecting for a few seconds It will then either display Connected if the connection was successfully made or display a message indicating that the connection was not made and suggesting further action to take If no data is displayed please check the following Make sure the Server Password entered in N2KView matches the Server Password entered into the N2KServer Service Manager on the computer running N2KServer If the server is running on an IPG100 the password in
62. collection while not visible are not available on the N2KView Mobile e Alerts Alerts need to be monitored at all times The iPhone will act as a remote display for Alerts generated by another N2KView station or a DSM250 but will not monitor PGNs and generate the Alerts e Anchor Watch Component This is dependent on having an Anchor Watch Alert and so this component has been removed e Graphs these require data collection at all times and so have been removed e Gauges and Bar Graphs The Max Min Markers on these components are disabled e Counters and Timers these require data collection at all times and so have been removed Revision 3 6 3 Page 376 Maretron 14 2Building the N2KView Mobile Screens Just as in N2KView for the PC the iPhone can display a number of favorite screens These screens are built on the PC and saved to N2KServer see section 9 4 7 2 and then downloaded to the iPhone Before starting save your normal ship s Configuration File so that it does not get confused with the iPhone s Configuration file see section 9 4 7 1 To fit on the iPhone the screens should be constructed with a predefined size Open the Screens Setup Dialog and select a screen size of exactly 20 high and a width that is a multiple of 16 i e 16 for one page 32 for 2 pages 48 for 3 pages etc Different screens can be different widths When displayed on the iPhone each screen will be accessed through its
63. component will be placed You may not add a new component which overlaps components that are already present and the grey area will turn red Press the Add button at the bottom of the screen to display the List of Parameters grouped by Categories that can be displayed Note that if you hold the mouse button down for more than 1 Le seconds in the first step the List of Parameters will be shown automatically Clicking on a category categories are displayed as folders will open the category to display the parameters associated with that category Note that some parameters may appear under more than one category An example screenshot of the Parameter list is shown below Select Parameter gt 7 AC Bus C AC Generator gt CJ AC Utility gt Air Conditioning Heating gt 3 Anchor Lite Battery State of Charge L Battery Temperature L Battery Time Remaining Current Power _ Ripple Voltage _ Voltage gt C Depth gt 7 Electrical Distribution gt 7 Engine gt C Engine Warning Figure 40 Parameter List Clicking on a parameter will open the Component Editor for that parameter Revision 3 6 3 Page 121 Maretran 9 4 10 11 Changing Components on Favorite Screens If you wish to change the data displayed by a particular component on the favorite screen its title its component type or its defined data ranges select the component on the favorite screen by pr
64. current As with the On and Off alerts the Set Delay and Clear Delay values are used to prevent spurious triggering 10 3 6 4 6 1 Trigger Configuration Trigger Configuration Accept Re trigger Period E Minutes Seconds Set Delay 0 05 Minutes Seconds Clear Delay 0 05 Minutes Seconds Figure 109 Trigger Configuration Editor Tripped Alert Accept Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If the condition which caused the alert remains true after the amount of time in this field the alert will return to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert If a value of 0 00 is entered then the alert will never re trigger Set Delay If the switch being monitored is in the Tripped state for the amount of time specified in this field the alert will become active Clear Delay If the switch being monitored is in a state other than Tripped for the amount of time specified in this field the alert will become inactive Revision 3 6 3 Page 282 Maretron 10 3 6 4 7 Server Disconnected Alert The Server Disconnected Alert can be used to raise an alert when the connection to N2KServer is lost due to network problems As with the On and Off alerts the Set Delay and Clear Delay values are used to prevent spurious triggering Note that the Server Disconnected Alert wil
65. equipped with an internal hardware counter Use this parameter to read the value of the internal hardware counter Pressing the reset button will command the counter within the device to Zero Component Types Digital Counter Instances 253 Channels Per Instance 28 9 6 17 2 Hardware Timer Maretron s SIM100 RIM100 and DCR100 are now equipped with an internal hardware timer Use this parameter to read the value of the internal hardware timer Pressing the reset button will command the timer within the device to zero Component Types Digital Timer Instances 253 Channels Per Instance 28 Revision 3 6 3 Page 226 Maretron 9 6 17 3 Status This component displays the status of a switch on the system Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Instances 253 Channels Per Instance 28 Note Choosing a component type of Digital Counter or Timer will create a software timer that counts or times the status changes within N2KView This counter or timer is independent of the counter or timer built in to a device Restarting N2KView will reset the software counters or timers to zero 9 6 18 N2KServer N2KView Connection 9 6 18 1 Cloud Server Data Remaining Maretron s Cloud Server is a subscription based service users purchase monthly bandwidth and the amount of bandwidth remaining in the current month may be displayed on this control Component Types Gauge
66. extends the example shown in Figure 23 by adding an external internet access point across a Wide Area Network WAN Although it is possible to setup the network as shown in Figure 24 ensuring that the remote N2KView clients can find the IP Address of the N2KServer at the correct port 6543 or 6544 requires considerable IT expertise and may depend on the cooperation of independent 3 parties such as the Marina whose network you are using IPG100 Figure 25 LAN Client Server Architecture Example with IPG100 Figure 25 shows an example of an IPG100 connected between the NMEA 2000 network and a Wi Fi router connected to a PC running an N2KView client A copy of N2KServer automatically runs on the IPG100 however an N2KView Hardware License Key must be plugged in to the IPG100 to supply sufficient licenses for the maximum number of simultaneously connected clients As in the Revision 3 6 3 Page 72 Maretron previous examples N2KView Clients may run on any computer able to access the N2KServer on the Ethernet network Figure 26 Single Client Connection to IPG100 Figure 26 shows an example of a single client connection to an IPG100 A DSM800 or a computer TSM800 TSM1330 or MBB100 is connected directly to the IPG100 Figure 27 WAN Client Server Architecture using Cloud Server To overcome the complexities of finding the IP Address of the Server over the Internet Maretron has introduced Maretron Cloud
67. factors that may affect fuel consumption will not change 10 4 11 1 Distance To Empty NOTE This function requires the optional Fuel Management Module and Alerts Module to be Licensed Monitors the distance before the selected engines use all fuel in the selected fuel tanks assuming that all factors affecting fuel consumption remain constant Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Units kilometers nautical miles statute miles Revision 3 6 3 Page 336 Maretran 10 4 11 2 Time to Empty NOTE This function requires the optional Fuel Management Module to be Licensed Monitors the time before the selected engines use all fuel in the selected fuel tanks assuming that all factors affecting fuel consumption remain constant Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Units hours 10 4 11 3 Total Fuel Consumption Vol Dis NOTE This function requires the optional Fuel Management Module and Alerts Module to be Licensed Monitors the total of the fuel consumption per unit time of all selected engines Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Units imp gal hour liter hour gal hour 10 4 11 4 Total Fuel Economy Dis Vol Units NOTE This function requires the optional Fuel Management Module and Alerts Module to be Licensed Monitors the distance traveled per unit of fuel consumed by all selected engines Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Ale
68. favorites screens User graphics and pictures may be added to any screen as a background Individual screen layouts may be imported and exported to other copies of N2KView Revision 3 6 3 Page 41 Maretron 6 Quick Install This section will help you install the software for the first time and get it running as quickly as possible with basic settings 6 1 Unpack the Box The N2KView System is sold in three configurations 1 N2KServer and N2KView a N2KServer Software CD ROM i Installer for N2KServer ii Installer for Adobe Acrobat Reader iii N2KServer Quick Install Guide PDF file iv N2KView System User s Manual PDF file b N2KView System Hardware License Key c N2KServer Quick Setup Guide 2 N2KView only a N2KView Software CD ROM i Installer for N2KView ii Installer for Adobe Acrobat Reader iii N2KView Quick Install Guide PDF file iv N2KView System User s Manual PDF file b N2KView Quick Setup Guide 3 N2KView and IPG100 a N2KServer Software CD ROM i Installer for Adobe Acrobat Reader ii N2KView System User s Manual PDF file b N2KView System Hardware License Key c IPG100 hardware 6 2 Install IPG100 Please refer to the Maretron IPG100 User s Manual 6 3 Install N2KServer This only applies when N2KServer is running on the PC NOTE Since the N2KServer Setup Wizard installs device drivers for the Hardware License Key and the NMEA 2000 gateway the setup wizard must be run from an account with administrato
69. fields 10 3 6 4 10 Inside Radius Alert The Inside Radius Alert is similar to the Outside Radius Alert except that an alert is activated if the vessel comes within a certain distance or radius of a reference point expressed as a longitude and latitude Trigger Configuration Accept Re trigger Period amp Minutes Seconds Inside Radius Alert Set RJ BT Wa 0 05 Minutes Seconds Inside Radius Alert Clear Sa Clear Delay 05 Minutes Seconds ENO 26 28 057 N Get Current Position Renee 22 00025W 82 00 025 W Figure 114 Trigger Configuration Inside Radius Alert Accept Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If the condition which caused the alert remains true after the amount of time in this field the alert will return to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert If a value of 0 00 is entered then the alert will never re trigger Inside Radius Alert Set If the distance between the current GPS position and the reference position falls below above the value in this field the alert will become active Revision 3 6 3 Page 288 Maretran Set Delay The distance between the current GPS position and the reference position must fall below the Inside Radius Alert Set value for longer than the time in this field in order for an alert to become active Insi
70. functioning Selecting Enabled will automatically deselect Disabled and vice versa Changing an Active or Accepted alert from Enabled to Disabled will show a warning Disabling an alert here will take precedence over all other enabling disabling actions Revision 3 6 3 Page 271 Maretran 10 3 6 2 2 Operating Mode s In this field you may choose in which vessel operating modes Moored Underway Anchored User1 or User 2 this alert is enabled You may choose any or all of these modes The default is to have all five modes enabled If the alert is Active or Accepted i e the condition causing the alert is still present and the check box for the current operating mode is disabled a warning will be shown 10 3 6 3 Alert Editor Buttons Save and Test Actions Save Cancel Figure 101 Alert Editor Buttons The Alert Editor Buttons are located at the bottom of the Alert Editor The area above the buttons is used to communicate messages to the user regarding incomplete fields in the editor 10 3 6 3 1 Save and Test Pressing the Save and Test Button will first save the alert in the database and then issue a command to simulate the transition of the monitored value to a value that would activate the alert giving a full test of all the actions associated with the Alert The word Test will be pre pended to all descriptions of the alert including email titles Note that pressing the Test button will The alert will only become acti
71. in all of the selected tanks Component Types Digital Units imp gal Liter gal Source Fuel Fresh Water Waste Water Live Well Oil Black Water Reserved 0 7 Instances 16 Revision 3 6 3 Page 239 Maretron 9 6 24 Temperature 9 6 24 1 Bait Well Temperature Displays the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Bait Well Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units degrees Centigrade degrees Fahrenheit Instances 253 9 6 24 2 Battery Temperature See section 9 6 6 2 9 6 24 3 Dew Point See section 9 6 11 3 9 6 24 4 Engine Coolant Temperature See section 9 6 9 3 9 6 24 5 Engine Oil Temperature See section 9 6 9 6 9 6 24 6 Exhaust Gas Temperature Displays the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Exhaust Gas Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units degrees Centigrade degrees Fahrenheit Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 240 Maretran 9 6 24 7 Freezer Temperature Displays the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Freezer Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units degrees Centigrade degrees Fahrenheit Instances 253 9 6 24 8 Heat Index See section 9 6 11 4 9 6 24 9 Heating System Temperature Displays the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Heating System Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital
72. in this field the alert will return to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert If a value of 0 00 is entered then the alert will never re trigger Offset Heading Set Point Set Delay If the direction being monitored differs from the reference direction by more than the Offset Heading Set Point for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field the alert will become active Offset Heading Clear Point Clear Delay If the alert is active and the direction being monitored differs from the reference direction by less than the Offset Heading Clear Point for longer than the time specified in the Clear Delay field the alert will become inactive Reference Direction Enter the desired reference direction into this field If the monitored value differs from this value by more than the Offset Heading Set Point the alert will be triggered Get Current Heading Pressing or clicking on this button will transfer the current value of the direction being monitored into the Reference Direction Field 10 3 6 4 13 Course Alert A Course Alert is used to indicate that the course over ground COG has changed from the reference direction more than a programmable amount For example once a course has been established an alert can be generated if the course changes more than a specified amount The reference direction can be selected from the current direction COG or it can be manually entered
73. instancing To enable parameters from different devices to be distinguished an instance number is associated with the source of each parameter This may be done as a Device Instance or a Data Instance depending on the message format used to transport the data on the NMEA2000 bus The user does not need to know whether Device Instancing or Data Instancing is used to configure N2KView When configuring each component on the display the instance number associated with the source of the data should be known to ensure that the component is monitoring the correct instance of the parameter For example when configuring a control to monitor the Port Engine Revs the instance number should be set to 0 setting it to 1 would monitor the Revs of the Starboard Engine He component Type GPS Figure 28 Setting Instance Number For simple configurations where there is only one source of data N2KView allows the Instance Number to be set to Any If this is chosen the component will lock on to the first matching parameter received on the NMEA2000 bus regardless of its Instance Number If there are more than two matching parameters on the bus this will lead to unpredictable behavior If there is only one matching parameter it is an easy way to set up the component without knowing what the real Instance Number is Instance Numbers can either be allocated to the Device as a whole Device Instancing or to individual data elements Data Instan
74. keep anyone from viewing your vessel s data without authorization Second and more important it is imperative that no unauthorized persons be able to place data onto your vessel s NMEA 2000 network The N2KView system protects your vessel s data with multiple levels of protection First any data that passes between the N2KServer server component and any N2KView station components is protected using industry standard SSL encryption This encryption standard is widely used to protect financial Revision 3 6 3 Page 76 Maretron information on the internet Each communication session negotiates a random encryption key every time a connection is established This makes the data secure over public and private Wi Fi networks as well as the internet Second each N2K View station that wishes to connect to an N2KServer server component must authenticate itself by means of a server password The server password is transmitted by the N2KView station to the N2KServer server over the encrypted communication link The N2KServer compares the server password to the one it was programmed with Only if the server password received from the station matches the server s stored password is the station granted access to the NMEA 2000 network data 8 8 Using Maretron s Cloud Server To use Maretron s Cloud Server these steps should be followed Contact Maretron or one of Maretron s dealers and establish an account for the Cloud Services You
75. morning e Twilight PM The alert will be accepted at Nautical Twilight every evening e Fixed Delay The alert will be accepted after a fixed delay e None The alert will never be accepted automatically Revision 3 6 3 Page 294 Maretran 10 3 7 Alert Actions Dialog The Alert Actions Dialog is entered from the Alert Edit Dialog by pressing or clicking on the Actions button N2K View allows you to program different actions when an alert becomes active such as sounding annunciators with selected tone patterns activating and deactivating switches and sending e mails with selected text This is done through the Alert Action Editor dialog 10 3 7 1 Annunciator Actions Tab An Annunciator such as Maretron s ALM100 connects to the NMEA2000 bus and will sound an alarm on command The type of alarm is transmitted to the annunciator from N2KView The Annunciator Actions tab for the Alert Actions Dialog is shown below a Alert Action Editor DC Voltage High Alert x Annunciator Actions Email Actions SM S Text Actions Enable Annunciators Enable Computer Sound Bi 0 Deck Alarm Mg Annunciator 4 Mg Annunciator 8 Mg Annunciator12 Mg Annunciator 16 I Annunciator 20 E Annunciator 24 BW Annunciator 28 Mg Annunciator 1 Il 5 Engine Room Mg Annunciator 9 Mg Annunciator13 E Annunciator17 I Annunciator 21 I Annunciator 25 Il Annunciator 29 Mg Annunciator 2 Mg Annunciator 6 Mg Annunciator10 BM Annunciato
76. must choose a password for N2KServer This will allow only your N2KView programs with the same password to view your network data Please choose a password and save it in a safe place The password cannot be recovered from N2KServer so if you misplace or forget this password you will need to reset it Click Next gt to continue 45 Setup Maretron N2KServer Lellig Passwords Setting the N2KServer Server Password NK Server uses server password to ensure secunty This is important to keep others from being able to observe or change settings on your vessel especially if your network is visible to the internet via Wi Fi satelite or other connections When N2KServer first starts it will remind you to set a strong hard to guess password Please choose a strong password enter it into the Server Passwort edit box in N2KServer and write down and keep it in safe place You wil need the server password for N2KView or any other software which needs to connect to N2KServer lt Back Next gt Figure 9 N2KServer Installation Wizard Passwords Page The installation is now complete If you wish to configure the N2KServer software at this time select the Run N2KServer Service Manager checkbox You also have the opportunity to register your software at this time Please make sure to register your software in order to qualify for technical assistance Revision 3 6 3 Page 48 Maretron 5 Setup Maretron N2KSe
77. must fall below the Low Alert Set Point value for longer than the time in this field in order for an alert to become active This can be used to prevent false alerts caused by parameter values that briefly have a value that would cause an alert but quickly return to the normal value range The value is entered as minutes seconds If only one number is entered it will be interpreted as seconds Revision 3 6 3 Page 277 Maretron Low Alert Clear Point If the alert is active and the parameter value rises above the value in this field the alert will become inactive Clear Delay The parameter being monitored must rise above the Low Alert Clear Point value for longer than the time in this field in order for the alert to become inactive The value is entered as minutes seconds If only one number is entered it will be interpreted as seconds In this example the set point may be described in more than one unit so additional fields have been supplied so that the user can select the units of depth Changing the units of the set point will also change the units of the clear point The initial units displayed in these fields will correspond to those set in the Units Dialog see section 9 4 8 1 10 3 6 4 3 Data Unavailable Alert The Data Unavailable Alert can be used in conjunction with other alert types when you need to know if a particular parameter is no longer being sent on the network or is flagged as not available by the transmi
78. of the Maretron USB100 gateway device driver Open Windows Device Manager select the Ports COM amp LPT menu double click on the Maretron NMEA 2000 Gateway select the Driver tab and finally click on the Update Driver button and follow the instructions in the Update Driver Wizard that appears N2KServer Service Manager Ensure that you are running the N2KServer reports an error starting or Service Manager from a Windows account stopping the Windows Service that has administrative rights to the when you try to stop or start the N2KServer computer N2KServer Windows Service The N2KServer computer does Ensure that the requested red N2KServer not have an N2KServer hardware license key is installed hardware key and you keep seeing textboxes warning you If you do not have the hardware license that N2KServer cannot find the key open N2KServer Service Manager red N2KServer hardware license and uncheck the Start N2KServer When key Windows Starts checkbox When you press the switch Switch Actuator components are only fully actuator component the switch operational when the Control Module has does not change state been licensed If you wish to use these features please ensure that you have Revision 3 6 3 Page 398 Maretran purchased a license for the Control Module and that you have requested a license for the Control Module in the Connection Dialog Components display Not Fuel Management componen
79. own tab as shown below Demo Video Lights o ow The pages within a screen are arranged from left to right Swipe left and right with your fingers to move between the pages Revision 3 6 3 Page 377 Maretron Engine Room Demo Video Lights Ce The dots at the bottom of the above example show that this screen has five pages there are five dots and that we are looking at the first page the first dot is brighter than the rest Build all your screens as you would for a PC based version of N2KView and save 14 2 1 Other Configuration Data On the Connections Page of N2KView set up the following e Label When you accept Alerts from the iPhone the What happened field on the Alert Status will show this label as where the alert was accepted from Revision 3 6 3 Page 378 Maretran e Features Requested Unless you specifically want to block switch control features and Alerts set this to Platinum On the Alerts Setup Page set up the following e Remote Alerts Play Computer Sound While active Alerts are being received the iPhone will beep is this is checked 14 3Send the Configuration File to the Server Open the Connections Dialog and change the Label to something that will help you indentify the iPhone later Use iPhone or something similar Change the Filename to something that will help you identify this configuration when you come to download the file to the iPhone Use
80. pan Tilt and Zoom Axis 215 PTZ Network Camera This is a sophisticated camera with hardware Pan Tilt and Zoom It requires a 12V power supply which is supplied with the camera Axis P3301 Fixed Dome Network Camera Axis Single Video Server 2415 Axis Quad Video Server 241Q Axis Q7401 Video Encoder Axis Quad Video Server 240Q Axis M3113 Network Camera Axis M3114 Network Camera Any other Axis Network Camera or Video Server In this case N2KView will not know which picture sizes are valid for the camera and you will need to enter the value manually USB Camera limited functionality The video servers allow the connection of analog cameras to the video server using co axial cable which then serves the video to N2KView via Ethernet The cameras require a separate 12V power supply Connection of IP cameras requires knowledge of computer networks to allocate an address to the cameras The camera is identified by N2KView by this address see 8 5 for more information In simple networks this address the IP address can be permanently set inside the camera in more complex networks a server can dynamically allocate the IP address to the camera and the camera addressed though it s name The software and installation manual supplied by Axis Communications must be used to set up the camera s address Section 19 gives a step by step example of setting up the Axis Quad Video Server 241Q Revision 3 6 3 Page 62
81. range and a high red range Both the minimum and maximum values for a range need to be filled for the range to be valid If ranges overlap red ranges will be drawn on top of yellow ranges and yellow ranges will be drawn on top of the green range Gauges also have an LED below the digital part of the display which will light up in the color of the appropriate range Digital displays also have an LED which can light up in the color of the appropriate range Bar Graphs can be colored in ranges as well The portion of the bar that is displayed is colored to match the range data Revision 3 6 3 Page 130 Example H you are defining a gauge for battery voltage you may decide that the gauge should display between 8 and 16 volts You may also want the range between 11 and 13 volts to be considered normal the range between 10 and 11 volts to be deserving of a low warning led and any voltage below 10 volts to be deserving of a low fault indication You may also wish the range between 13 and 14 volts to be deserving of a high warning led and any voltage above 14 volts to be deserving of a high fault indication In this case you would set the values as shown in the screenshot below Divisions Minimum Value Maximum Value Oil Pressure Major Divisions Minor Divisons Color Bands 3 a3 CO Oo Figure 43 Example of setting Divisions and Ranges 9 4 10 18 16 Indicator Colors Off Color On Color Error C
82. requiring user intervention There are two classes of alerts which are distinguished by their severity e Alarm An alarm is a type of alert announcing a condition requiring immediate attention or user intervention Alarms are shown in red and always appear to the left of warnings in the Alert Ticker and above warnings on the Alert Screen e Warning A warning is a type of alert announcing a condition requiring non immediate attention for precautionary reasons Warnings are shown in yellow and always appear to the right of Alarms in the Alert Ticker and below alarms on the Alert Status Screen 10 2 2 Alert Terminology The following alert terminology is used in N2KView e Accept The user action of acknowledging the existence of an alert Alerts are only accepted when they are Active e Cancel The user action of removing an alert from the list of displayed alerts Alerts may only be cancelled if the condition causing the alert has been removed e Acknowledge From version 3 6 2 the terms Accept and Cancel have been replaced by Acknowledge to conform to changes in the IMO code on Alarms and Indicators An Alert must be Acknowledged by the user and this action can happen when the Alert is Active or the condition causing the alert has been removed without the Alert being previously Acknowledged e Clear An alert is cleared when the condition causing the alert is removed e Trigger An alert is triggered when the condition monito
83. sensor set up with a source of Bait Well Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units degrees Centigrade degrees Fahrenheit Instances 253 9 6 11 2 Barometric Pressure Displays the atmospheric barometric pressure Component Types Bar Graph Line Graph Digital Units bars millibars inches mercury kilopascals millimeters mercury Instances 253 9 6 11 3 Dew Point Displays the current dew point based on air temperature and humidity Component Types Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units degrees Centigrade degrees Fahrenheit 9 6 11 4 Engine Room Temperature Displays the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Engine Room Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units degrees Centigrade degrees Fahrenheit Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 214 Maretran 9 6 11 5 Heat Index Displays the current heat index based on air temperature and humidity Component Types Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units degrees Centigrade degrees Fahrenheit Instances 253 9 6 11 6 Inside Humidity Displays the relative humidity from a humidity sensor set up with a source of Inside Component Types Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units Percent Instances 253 9 6 11 7 Inside Temperature Displays the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Inside Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units degrees Centi
84. shows how many Base Alerts Fuel Management Video and Control licenses are available on the N2KServer Hardware License Key as well as how many of these license are currently in use Statistics This section shows the number of N2KView stations currently connected as well as the number of messages transmitted to and received from the stations The Start button is used to start the N2KServer and the Stop button is used to stop the N2KServer NMEA 2000 Data Selection There are two choices for data Simulated Data is only to be used for product demonstration and testing of network connectivity The N2KServer will output a sequence of simulated NMEA 2000 messages that repeats every few minutes Live Network Data the normal operating mode causes the N2KServer to output data from the NMEA 2000 gateway which is selected in the Gateway Serial Port dropdown list If this list is empty please ensure that the USB gateway is connected Revision 3 6 3 Page 50 Maretran Automatic Startup f the Start N2KServer When Windows Starts box is checked then N2KServer will run whenever the computer is turned on regardless of whether anyone has logged in to the computer If this box is cleared then you must manually start the N2KServer Service Manager and click the Start button in order to start the N2KServer Security You must enter a password into the Server Password text box and then click Set t
85. since last reset for the trip The Component has a reset button in the bottom left to reset the value at the start of the trip Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units imp gal liter gal 9 6 12 10 Total Trip Fuel Used NOTE This function is available in the optional Fuel Management Module If the Fuel Management Module is not licensed the component will display Not Licensed instead of data values This component displays the total amount of fuel used by all Engines whose instance number is included in the supplied list since last reset for the trip Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Units imp gal liter gal Revision 3 6 3 Page 223 Maretron 9 6 13 GPS 9 6 13 1 Course Over Ground Displays the current course over ground Component Types North Up Rose Course Up Rose Cardinal Digital Units Degrees True Degrees Magnetic depends on Global Settings in Units Setup tab Instances 253 9 6 13 2 GPS Status Displays the current operating mode and status of the currently selected GPS received please see Section 9 5 13 on page 152 for more details Component Types GPS Status Instances 253 9 6 13 3 Lat Lon Displays the current latitude and longitude of the vessel Component Types Digital Units Latitude and Longitude in Degrees Minutes and fractions of a minute Instances 253 9 6 13 4 Speed Over Ground Displays the current speed over ground Component Types Gaug
86. since their trip settings were reset Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Units imp gal liter gal Revision 3 6 3 Page 338 Maretron 10 4 12 GPS 10 4 12 1 Course Over Ground Monitors the current course over ground Alert Types Course Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 12 2 GPS Status Monitors the current operating mode and status of the currently selected GPS received please see Section 9 5 13 on page 152 for more details Alert Types GPS Quality Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 12 3 Lat Lon Monitors the current latitude and longitude of the vessel Alert Types Inside Radius Alert Outside Radius Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 12 4 Speed Over Ground Monitors the current speed over ground Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 339 Maretron 10 4 13 Heading 10 4 13 1 Heading Monitors the current heading of the vessel the direction the vessel is pointing relative to true or magnetic north depending on the unit setting of the heading parameter see Section 9 4 8 3 2 on page 114 Alert Types Direction Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 13 2 Rate of Turn Monitors the change in Heading of the vessel Alert Types High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 13 3 Variation Monitors the compass variation Angle between True North and
87. sunrise for the current day and position Component Types Digital Units 12 hour 24 hour Time Zone Selectable 9 6 11 15 Sunset Displays the local time of sunset for the current day and position Component Types Digital Units 12 hour 24 hour Time Zone Selectable 9 6 11 16 Twilight AM Displays the UTC time of nautical twilight before sunrise for the current day Component Types Digital Units 12 hour 24 hour Time Zone Selectable 9 6 11 17 Twilight PM Displays the local time of nautical twilight after sunset for the current day Component Types Digital Units 12 hour 24 hour Time Zone Selectable Revision 3 6 3 Page 217 Maretron 9 6 11 18 User Defined nnn Humidity Displays the relative humidity from a humidity sensor set up with a source of User Defined nnn where nnn is a number from 128 to 144 Component Types Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units Percent Instances 253 9 6 11 19 User Defined nnn Temperature Displays the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of User Defined nnn where nnn is a number from 128 to 144 Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units degrees Centigrade degrees Fahrenheit Instances 253 9 6 11 20 Wind Chill Displays the current wind chill based on outside air temperature and wind speed Component Types Digital Units Degrees Centigrade Degrees Fahrenheit Revision 3 6 3 Page 218 Maretran 9 6 12 Fuel Managemen
88. the source is not providing a current that can be monitored for load shedding If the user disables the source it will show Disabled The LED on the Digital Control will show red when the reported current exceeds the Load Shedding Current yellow when the reported current is within 10 of the Load Shedding Current and green when less than 90 The Source is configured my pressing the Edit Button and may be enabled disabled from this dialog Figure 126 Load Shed Source Dialog The Digital Control shows the current reported by the ACM100 The User can set the parameter to choose the correct ACM100 Device Type and ACM instance number and the Load Shedding Current Revision 3 6 3 Page 368 Maretran 12 6 3 Configuring Loads GC These are edited on the Load Shedding Dialog Individual Loads may be configured to be included or excluded from the Load Shedding by checking the Enabled box The Panel Instance and Breaker Channel are set by the user to identify which breaker is to be switched to shed the load The Current Drawn is set by the user to inform the algorithm how much current will be shed or restored by switching this load The Breaker Status is reported by the system in real time so that the user can see the current state of the breaker Values are Off On Locked Off Locked On Load Shed Tripped and Unknown Revision 3 6 3 Page 369 Maretran 13 Video a
89. the IPG100 is set from a DSM250 or N2KAnalyzer Make sure the Server Address matches the IP address of the computer or IPG100 running N2KServer Make sure you have appropriate instruments on the NMEA 2000 network to provide the data you are trying to view on the N2KView screen To test the network connection between N2KView and the N2KServer you may wish to run N2KServer in Simulated Data mode Make sure that the instances that are being monitored correspond to the instances being transmitted You can set the instance number of the component to Any to make sure that there is any data of that type on the bus Revision 3 6 3 Page 66 Maretron 6 8 Tabs 6 8 1 Favorite Screen Tabs Along the top of the screen are tabs to allow you to access the favorite screens you have defined as well as the Alerts Screen Click on a screen tab to display the corresponding screen Use the left and right arrow keys to cycle between the different user defined screens The tab corresponding to the currently displayed screen is a shade darker than the other tabs Alerts This is always the top leftmost tab and will be semi transparent if the Alerts feature is not licensed 6 8 2 Commands amp Settings Tab On the right hand side of the screen is a single tab to navigate to the Commands and Settings Dialog See section 9 4 1 Revision 3 6 3 Page 67 Maretron 7 Upgrading N2KView As N2KView is released with new features on a re
90. the N2KServer Windows Service If the N2KServer is not running this button is grayed out and unavailable General e N2KServer Status this will show Running when the N2KServer Windows service is running and Stopped when the N2KServer Windows service is stopped Revision 3 6 3 Page 392 Maretron Serial Number this will show the serial number of the software as received from the Hardware License Key Base Licenses this will show the number of Base Licenses that are available on the Hardware License Key as well as the number of Base Licenses that are currently being used Alerts Licenses this will show the number of Alerts Licenses that are available on the Hardware License Key as well as the number of Alerts Licenses that are currently being used Fuel Management Licenses this will show the number of Fuel Management Licenses that are available on the Hardware License Key as well as the number of Fuel Management Licenses that are currently being used Video Licenses this will show the number of Video Licenses that are available on the Hardware License Key as well as the number of Video Licenses that are currently being used Control Licenses this will show the number of Control Licenses that are available on the Hardware License Key as well as the number of Control Licenses that are currently being used Platinum Licenses this will show the number of Platinum Licenses that are p
91. the optional Control Module to be licensed The LOCK status is stored in the switch therefore when one copy of N2KView locks a switch the status is reflected in other copies of N2KView and the DSM250 The switch must support locking for this feature to be used N2KView integrates with the locking features of the Moritz range of AC and DC breakers and Maretron s DCR100 11 1 Displaying LOCKED Status Office Light e o When a breaker is LOCKED a yellow padlock symbol with the word LOCKED will be overlaid on the switch 11 2Locking and Unlocking a Breaker From the Commands amp Settings Dialog press the Breaker Lockout button to enter the Breaker Lockout Dialog If the Password has been set in N2KView you will need to enter it before the dialog will be shown This provides a level of security so that breakers can be locked and the lock protected by a password Whenever you are working on a circuit Maretron advises you to LOCK the circuit OFF and set a password to protect yourself against someone else accidentally switching the circuit on Revision 3 6 3 Page 361 rc N2KView Helm salle or Lockout x Engines Environment gt AV Power Security Heading Ice Maker Security DC Power Video Air Conditioner Load Shedding New Screen New Screen DCR 1 DCR 2 Office Light Lab Light gt on OFF d ON i OFF ON MOORED Figure 124 Breaker Lockout Dialog The breaker dialog is
92. the page iii Set the IP Address to x y z a where the IP Address x y z a is compatible with the addressing mechanism of your network If none of this makes any sense to you contact the person who installed maintains your network iv Set the Subnet Mask to 255 255 255 0 v Set the Default Router to x y z 1 Revision 3 6 3 Page 410 Maretran AXISA AXIS 241Q Video Server Live View Setup Help v Basic Configuration Basic TCP IP Settings Q Instructions Network Settings r eck View current network settings 3 Date amp Time IPv4 Address Configuration 4 Video amp Image BI Enable IPv4 gt Video amp Image Obtain IP address via DHCP Hine View Config d Use the following IP address IP address 10 0 0 92 SES Configuration Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 gt System Options Default router 10 0 0 1 IPv6 Address Configuration About Enable IPv6 Services V Enable ARP Ping setting of IP Address Options for notification of IP address change AXIS Internet Dynamic DNS Service l Save Reset See also the advanced TCP IP settings g Pressing Save will change the address on the server and will require you to log on again at the new address You get the following warnings The page at http lablaptop phx aiec com says EE Q You have changed the Automatic IP Configuration Check that all your TCP IP settings are correct before clicking OK or else the serv
93. the right half of the computer screen Choosing a favorite screen size of 20 grids wide and 30 grids high would allow you to completely fill this window with components If you choose a favorite screen size and decide later that you wish you had chosen different height and width values you can always change these at any time see Section 9 4 9 5 on page 118 for details If you have licensed the Alerts Module the Alert Status bar will be created below the grid on all the screens and will have a height equal to one square Revision 3 6 3 Page 83 Maretran 9 1 8 Hardware License Key The licensing of the N2KView Vessel Monitoring and Control System is controlled by the use of a Hardware License Key which is often referred to by the term dongle This Hardware License Key must be installed into a USB port on any computer or IPG100 running the N2KServer component The software tests for the presence of the appropriate hardware license key before it begins operation If the hardware license key is not detected the software will not run After the software starts running it continually tests for the presence of the hardware license key If the hardware license key is removed from the computer the software will stop functioning and will display a dialog box asking you to reconnect the hardware license key to the system The licenses are controlled by N2KServer which allocates them to the N2KView stations on a first come first served basi
94. the supplied list Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital imp gals kilometer liters kilometer gals kilometer imp gals nautical mile liters nautical mile gals nautical mile imp gals statute mile liters statute mile gals statute mile 9 6 12 4 Total Fuel Consumption Vol Dis Units NOTE This function is available in the optional Fuel Management Module If the Fuel Management Module is not licensed the component will display Not Licensed instead of data values This component displays the total of the fuel consumption of all selected engines per unit distance Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital imp gals kilometer liters kilometer gals kilometer imp gals nautical mile liters nautical mile gals nautical mile imp gals statute mile liters statute mile gals statute mile 9 6 12 5 Total Fuel Economy Dis Vol NOTE This function is available in the optional Fuel Management Module If the Fuel Management Module is not licensed the component will display Not Licensed instead of data values Displays the distance traveled per unit of fuel consumed by all selected engines Revision 3 6 3 Page 221 Maretran Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Units kilometers imp gal kilometers liter kilometers gal nautical miles imp gal nautical miles liter nautical miles gal statute miles imp gal statute miles liter statute miles gal 9 6 12 6 Total Fuel Level NOTE This function is avai
95. to access N2KServer on your boat Note that you use the same password to access through the Cloud Server and when you make a direct connection Check the Use Cloud Server box to enable this communication channel The Select Licenses button shows which additional licenses you have been granted by the N2KServer The symbols for the licenses are from left to right top to bottom Alerts Control Fuel Management and Video Pushing the button allows you to select which licenses you will request Revision 3 6 3 Page 385 Maretron m Request Alerts License PC Request Control License j AEN Request Fuel Management License m 90 Request Video License Once you have selected how to connect to your N2KServer and selected the licenses you will request press the Connect Button This will connect you with your server and also switch the screens to the Active Screens stored in the iPhone N2K View for the iPhone is supplied with two sets of default favorite screens one for the demos and one for the active connection At this point you will be looking at the default favorite screen for the active connection and it will be connected to your N2KServer and trying to display your data Note also that the text on the button will change to Connecting with moving green dots Connected with a green check symbol If the connection is made the Connect Button will change to Disconnect and the top buttons will be disabled Revisio
96. warning in the opening screen it closes and the operational mode screen appears An example of an operational mode screen is shown below D N2KView Helm T Se de Engine Temperature Port Tachometer Starboard Tachometer Alternator Voltage Engine Load Low Coolant Level Low Coolant Level elle Over Temperature Over Temperature Low Oil Pressure Low Oil Pressure Water In Fuel mo Js TI Figure 30 N2KView Operational Mode Screen 9 3 Operation This section describes the activities that you may wish to perform with N2KView once it is fully configured and in operation Revision 3 6 3 Page 86 Maretron 9 3 1 Changing Between Favorite screens You may change between favorite screens in one of two ways First press or click with your mouse on the N2KView window to display the tabs and then press the tab along the top of the N2KView window for the favorite screen you wish to display Second you can cycle through the list of defined favorite screens by using the left arrow or right arrow keys on the computer s keyboard or PageUp PageDown N2KView can be set to automatically cycle though the screens from the Configuration Dialog Screen changes occur every 10 seconds If any user activity takes place then the cycling is paused for 2 minutes 9 3 2 Entering Configuration Modes In operational mode press anywhere on the N2KView window to display the screen tabs While the screen t
97. will move you the next or previous favorite screen In landscape mode two of the pages are displayed side by side If you respect the 20x16 grids when creating the pages you will be assured that your components do not go off the edge of the screen When in Demo mode Demo is displayed in the top left of the screen The first demo screen is the Engines screen and in portrait mode you will display the leftmost page of the Engines Screen The Engines Screen has five pages as shown by the five dots at the bottom of the screen Swipe the page to the left to see the next page Revision 3 6 3 Page 381 Maretron To move to a different favorite screen touch anywhere on the page Similar to the PC version of N2KView navigation button slide into view The actual layout of the navigation buttons depend on the height and width of the mobile device Demo Video Lights or On Explore the other favorite screens by going back to the menu press the Menu Button and choosing a different button and then scrolling left and right Notice the first three tabs Alerts If you have an Alerts License this tab will be enabled and will display the Alerts Page Settings This displays the Settings Page Exit Android only Pressing this button will exit N2KView Note that on the iPad pressing the iPad button will exit N2KView Revision 3 6 3 Page 382 Maretron 14 5Connecting to N2KServer First make sure that N2KServer is r
98. word Cancel will cause the alert to become an Inactive Alert and it will disappear from the table unless the Show Inactive box is checked at the top of the screen If the alert is Inactive or Disabled there will be no entry in this column Edit If the alert is defined in this instance of N2KView the word Edit will appear in this column Pressing on or clicking the word Edit will cause the Alert Editor dialog to appear and will allow you to change the configuration of this alarm If a password has been set in the Password Dialog see 9 4 3 then you will be requested to enter this password to gain access to the Alert Edit Dialog Time The time column will contain the date and time at which the alert first went Active State The entry in this column will describe the state of the alert Please refer to Section 10 2 5 for a description of the different alert states Source The entry in this column reflects the Label of the N2KView instance see section 9 4 4 1 1 on which the alert is configured You may accept or cancel alerts from any N2KView instance that has the Alerts Module licensed but you may only change the configuration of an alert on the instance of N2KView on which it was originally configured Value The entry in this column shows the value of the monitored parameter in real time For time alerts this column shows the time remaining for distance Revision 3 6 3 Page 263 Maretron
99. 10 4 6 Depth 10 4 6 1 Water Below Transducer Monitors the current reading from a depth transducer Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 6 2 Water Depth includes offset Monitors the current reading from a depth transducer plus the offset of the depth transducer Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 7 Electrical Distribution 10 4 7 1 Circuit Breaker Displays whether the specified breaker is open or closed Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Tripped Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 Switches Per Instance 28 Revision 3 6 3 Page 323 Maretron 10 4 8 Engine 10 4 8 1 Engine Boost Pressure Monitors the boost pressure of a supercharger or turbocharger Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 8 2 Engine Coolant Pressure Monitors the engine s water coolant pressure Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 8 3 Engine Coolant Temperature Monitors the engine s water coolant temperature Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 8 4 Engine Fuel Pressure Monitors the pressure of the fuel for the engine Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 8 5 Engine Oil Pressure Monitors the engine s oil pressure Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert
100. 114 Maretran 9 4 9 Clean Screen Dialog The Clean Screen Dialog disables all mouse and Touch Screen activity for 10 seconds so that a touch screen can be cleaned without triggering any undesired actions Pressing the Clean Screen button will disable all user input for 10 seconds so that a touch screen can be cleaned without having N2KView respond TE Degrees Pressing the Clean Screen button will disable all buttons and display a timer which counts down for 20 seconds Revision 3 6 3 Page 115 Maretran Pressing the Clean Screen button will disable all user input for 10 seconds so that a touch screen can be cleaned without having N2KView respond Time Remaining 7 seconds Degrees When the timer reaches 0 the dialog is automatically closed Revision 3 6 3 Page 116 Maretron 9 4 10 Screens Setup Dialog When your start N2KView for the first time you will notice that there are predefined favorite screens already set up for You can use these favorite screens as they are provided modify them to suit your needs or delete them and create your own favorite screens 9 4 10 1 Screens Setup Screen Pressing Ctrl and S is a shortcut to display the Screens Setup Screen This section explains each component of the Screens Setup dialog which is shown below BEGGE x Screens Setup ee Starboard Tachometer Port Tachometer EER EN TN TN EN rn Figure 39 Screen
101. 19 N vgalon nas mesemm nnnut venoldrkomeideenmetnkdnndne 229 9 6 19 1 Bearing Origin to Destnaton EE 229 96 192 Bearing 16 WAP E 229 9 6 19 3Course Over Ground u mu semmemmeinnesdennsneseiinndvvnjnu ide 229 9 6 19 4Cross Track EENEG 230 9 6 19 5 Destination Waypoint N t 0z ee eebe eeler 230 9 6 19 6 Distance to Waypoint susie ie ccencs coeness dep cdensccvevensdessdenes cenesedenedevsdeteresenctent 230 AE en EEN 230 KEENE ee 230 EE EE 231 961910 Speed Over Kat gege eege deer 231 9 6 19 11 Time to QO E 231 26 19 12 VelOGIY Ree e EE 231 9020 Press re Vacu m E 233 9 6 20 1 Barometric Pressure 233 9 6 20 2Compressed Air Pressure EE 233 9 6 20 3Engine Boost Pressure 233 9 6 20 4Engine Coolant Pressure c cccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeeeeeseesenneeeeeeeees 233 96 20 SEnNqin Fuel GE 234 9 6 20 6 Engine e Tt 234 9 6 20 7 Hydraulic Oil PRESSUNG ys coescccsecuticetenedvnubicutvectoeatennsbcninneboeeteaupidesuantventoiue 234 9 6 20 8Steam PES NE Aes 235 9 6 20 9 Transmission Oil Pressure sccece cccceseecnceeceenenedensceues cneeeseceneeevedeneoswenemene 235 9 6 20 10 User Defined nnn Pressure 235 9 6 20 11 Water E 235 9 6 21 SEENEN 236 BG 2 R dder EE 236 9 6 21 2 Rudder Angle Order Aen 236 9 6 21 3Rudd r Order E 236 Ge NR 237 9 6 22 1 Speed Over Ground ee ee 237 9 6 22 2 Speed Through Water 237 9 6 22 3 Total Lg E 237 9 6 22 4 Trip LOg EE 237 9623 e Ku 238 9 623 AE EE EE EE 238 EE EE gt 238 902 ROMA ua
102. 2 94 823 AGE 112 9 4 8 2 4 DENNE 112 9 4 8 2 5 Fl id EE 112 Revision 3 6 3 Page 5 Maretran 94 8 26 JAN 112 9 48 27 TENNE Hk 113 9 4 8 2 8 Time EE 113 948 29 VOUM eege eege 113 94 8 2 10 WING Speed gege EE TRE 113 9 4 8 3 Global Settings EE 113 9 4 8 3 1 Local Time Offset ism sssssssssetsssssssedsnnssssesdsssdansdadededddandet 113 9 4 8 3 2 HeadmoitCourseibearmg 114 9 4 8 3 3 Wind True Vessel Ref rrrrnnnrnnrrnrrrrrrrnrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrssrnrrnnnnnn 114 949 Gen Screer DAN EE 115 9 4 10 Screens Setup DAG Lunestad tende 117 9 4 10 1 Screens Setup Screen w mismmvmmmsiismtsveemeenidanatsdenevnemmebnndkernnnt s ken 117 FA JO STEEN LS aan 117 9 4 10 2Adding EE 118 9 4 10 3 Deleting Screens EE 118 9 4 10 4Renaming Screens mumuesemmmeimsnaisdanijvdnijnse ii vittig 118 9 4 10 5 Exporting Screens ass mdepe mj mejomjuesndhen 118 9 4 10 6lmporting Ee 119 9 4 10 7 Resizing E 119 9 4 10 8Setting a Background Image EEN 120 9 4 10 9 Deleting a Background Image ENEE 120 9 4 10 10 Adding an Component to a Favorite Screen rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr 120 9 4 10 11 Changing Components on Favorite Gcreens 122 9 4 10 12 Deleting Components from Favorite Gcreens 122 9 4 10 13 Cutting Components from Favorite Screens 0aeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeea 122 9 4 10 14 Copying Components from Favorite Gcreens 123 9 4 10 15 Pasting Components into Favorite Screens rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrenr 123 9 4 10 16 Moving Components on F
103. 234567 Lane Manager 1234561234568 After selection the list of phone numbers with names is displayed next to the check box Use Additional Phone Number s Chairman 123 456 1234567 v Revision 3 6 3 Page 302 Maretran Message when Alert is Triggered this text is transmitted when the condition causing the alert becomes true If this field is blank the message will still be transmitted but without user entered details Message when Alert is Cleared this text is transmitted when the condition causing the alert becomes false when the alert transitions from Active to Awaiting Cancel or is disabled If this field is blank the message will still be transmitted but without user entered details Revision 3 6 3 Page 303 Maretron 10 4Available Alerts The N2KView system organizes the various available data types into a two level system of data Categories and data Types Each data category consists of a number of closely related data types This section enumerates all of the data types for which alerts are available and lists the available alerts for each 10 4 1 AC Bus 10 4 1 1 Average Frequency Monitors the average frequency of an AC bus across all phases Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Units Hertz Instances 253 10 4 1 2 Average Line Line Voltage Monitors the average line to line RMS voltage of an AC bus across all phases Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Al
104. 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 249 Maretron 9 6 30 Vessel Data Recorder 9 6 30 1 VDR Status Displays the Status of the Vessel Data Recorder Component Types Digital Instances 253 Values Recording Formatting Erasing No USB Flash Drive Error Initializing 9 6 30 2 VDR Capacity Display the capacity of the USB Flash Drive connected to the VDR Component Types Digital Units GBytes Instances 253 9 6 30 3 VDR Memory Used Display the amount of memory of the USB Flash Drive connected to the VDR that has been used Component Types Digital Units GBytes Instances 253 9 6 30 4 VDR Memory Available Display the amount of memory of the USB Flash Drive connected to the VDR that has not been used Component Types Digital Units GBytes Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 250 Maretran 9 6 30 5 VDR Percent Used Display the percentage of memory of the USB Flash Drive connected to the VDR that has been used Component Types Digital Units Percent Instances 253 9 6 30 6 VDR Percent Available Display the percent of memory of the USB Flash Drive connected to the VDR that has not been used Component Types Digital Units Percent Instances 253 9 6 31 Video 9 6 31 1 Video Video is not received on the NMEA2000 bus It is either received on the Ethernet Bus or directly from a camera connected to the USB port of the computer Component Types Video Video wit
105. 3 Revision 3 6 3 Page 9 Maretran Er Fr 204 9 6 9 1 Engine Boost PRSSSUNG wicca oot co re 204 9 6 9 2 Engine Coolant Pressure EE 204 9 6 9 3 Engine Coolant Temperature EE 204 9 6 9 4 Engine Fuel Oe 204 9 6 9 5 Engine UE 205 9 6 9 6 Engine Oil Temperature EEN 205 9 6 9 7 Exhaust Gas Temperature rrnnnrrvrrnnnnnnnnvnnnnnrrrrrnnnnnnnnernnnrrrrnnennennennn 205 9 6 9 8 Fuel RE e e 205 95502 Piel ee KE 206 KE Re EEE RE seu AN N 206 9 6 9 THOUS eege 206 9 6 9 12Percent Load DEE 206 9 6 9 13 Percent TOG E 207 GR E e 207 GE Eat ra d gira iat orca at ore oer oat E A E 207 GE kee EE 207 9610 Engine Warning EE 208 9 6 10 1 Charge EE EE gege 208 96102060 ENJIN E ssiri EEEeeNe 208 9 610 393 Comm e EE eeii eiea i Saa a e aag 208 9 6 10 4Cranking EE 208 9 6 10 5EGR EE aeactsectmintnastorciancdvimtoastunstinac dotetuanieistundsoasionnteieieneheietuatetetons 209 9 6 10 6 Emergency top 209 9 6 10 7 High OOS agents aan aaa aa a 209 9 6 10 8Low Coolant LEVE E 209 9 6 10 9Low Fuel Pressure enee dee 210 9 6 10 10 EEE EEE 210 9 6 10 11 Low Oil EE 210 9 6 10 12 Low System Voll ge samenes 210 9 6 10 13 Maintenance Needed AAA 210 9 6 10 14 Neutral Start Protect rrrnnnnnnornnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 211 9 6 10 15 Over Temperature mmnnrrrnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnennnnnevnne 211 961016 Power Fl 211 9 6 10 17 POE Lasse 211 96 10 18 Rev Limit Exceeded evercugegeergegegeregrg duer EEESEEE
106. 3 25 Phase C Power Factor set eCeEeINENEEENEEEEEEENENENEEENENEEEEN EENS 318 10 4 3 26 Phase C Reactive Power 318 10 4 3 27 Phase C Real Power 318 10 4 3 28 Phase CA Line Line Voltage EE 319 102329 Total Apparent POW EE 319 10 4 3 30 Total Power Factor EEN 319 10 4 3 31 Total Reactive Power 319 10 4 3 32 Total Real Power 319 10 4 3 33 Total kWh Export 319 10 4 3 34_ TotalkWD IO EE 320 10 44 AA 320 EE Eeg RER 320 125 NB O A 321 10 4 5 1 Battery State of Chappenesgeteeetegkeegeegegerebegkgedetegegedeegkeedetege edegertegetegt 321 10 4 5 2Battery Temperature EEN 321 10 4 5 3Battery Time Remaining AEN 321 I AA EAN IIE ee 321 10 4 e 321 10 4 5 6Voltage see 322 10 4 5 7 Ripple Voltage atesteticnier acral detract ndeeedaid siecvedesadenndedndalvedvadebadededevmdsestsbadetens 322 1046 PEN uvenn 323 10 4 6 1 Water Below Transcducer AEN 323 10 4 6 2Water Depth includes oitset AAA 323 10 4 7 Electrical Distribution Gegugeegegegeerdeigeei eetciee egeglrieeEgeedeee eege eege 323 10 4 7 1 Circuit Breaker en 323 1048 EE en n EEE EE A EAE E E E 324 10 4 8 1 Engine Boost tesselen edseeteekesgrkege dees deed deeg 324 10 4 8 2 Engine Coolant Pressure uunussmmsmnsrinsaemmseamidnesnededonasdkdennta 324 10 4 8 3 Engine Coolant Temperature EEN 324 Revision 3 6 3 Page 17 Maretron 10 4 8 4Engine Fuel Pressure 324 10 4 8 5Engine EES ECEeG 324 10 4 8 6 Engine Oil Temperature EE 325 10 4 8 7 Exhaust Gas Temperature ee 325 10 4 8 8 Fu
107. 35 Maretron 10 4 11 Fuel Management WARNING While Maretron fuel management products are designed to accurate and reliable they should be used only as aids for fuel management and not as a replacement for traditional fuel management techniques BEWARE Conditions can quickly change that drastically affect time and distances to empty NOTE Fuel Management Alerts are operational only when the optional Fuel Management Module and Alerts Module are licensed Without this you may create fuel management components but they will display Not Licensed instead of data values The Distance to Empty and Time to Empty measurements are calculated based on the conditions that are prevalent at the time Changes in wind and current can drastically change the Distance to Empty and Time to Empty measurements that N2KView calculates and displays For example if you are motoring 100 miles out to sea with the current at the end of the 100 miles N2KView might display that you have 120 miles before you run out of fuel If you then turn around and start heading back to land this time against the current the Distance to Empty reading may change to 80 miles Therefore you must always keep in mind the direction and speed of prevailing winds and currents You must always remain aware that N2KView makes Distance to Empty and Time to Empty calculations assuming that your course and speed and the prevailing winds and currents and any other
108. 4 7 1 Save Configuration to Disk Pressing the Save As button will open a browser on the local file system and prompt the user to Enter a New Configuration Filename 9 4 7 2 Save Configuration to Server When saving to N2KServer the existing filename will be used This filename is shown to the left of the Send File button Pressing the Send Configuration button will send the configuration to the server where it will be saved with the associated filename From version 3 6 0 if the configuration contains background images the background images will be transferred to the N2KServer with the configuration file If these images are large the transfer will take longer The progress of each file s transfer will be reported on a progress bar Revision 3 6 3 Page 110 Maretran 9 4 8 Units Setup Dialog Pressing Ctrl and U is a shortcut to display the Units Setup Dialog Pressing the Units Setup button causes the Units Setup dialog to be displayed The Units Setup dialog allows you to set the desired display units for the different parameter types supported by N2KView The following sections provide more detail on the individual unit settings A screenshot of the Units Setup dialog is shown below English v MMM DD YYYY Distance nautical miles Fluid Pressure Speed Temperature Time Format Volume Wind Speed Global Settings Local Time Offset Heading Course Bearing Wind True Vessel Ref Figure 38
109. 6 2 23Phase e Te EE 189 9 6 2 24Phase C Line Neutral Voltage AEN 189 96 2 25Ph s6 C Power Fast te egueugb sgeges eeeekdae ege SOERENSEN 189 9 6 2 26 Phase C Reactive EE 189 9 6 2 27AC Generator Phase C Real Power 190 9 6 2 28Phase CA Line Line Voltage EE 190 96 3 AU e E 190 9 6 3 1 Average UN ee 190 9 6 3 2 Average Frequency eefegreeg iegbgeekeget ieg Seege geb D ee Eise eEEieeh ediet 190 9 6 3 3 Average Line Line Voltage EE 191 9 6 3 4 Average Line Neutral Voltage ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeees 191 9 6 3 5 AC Utility Phase A Apparent Power enn 191 9650 Phase e E 191 9 6 3 7 Phase A Frequency eege 192 9 6 3 8 Phase A Line Neutral Voltage AAA 192 Revision 3 6 3 Page 8 Maretran 9 6 3 9 Phase A Power Factor Wus mmisnmmeinsmekmugnemisnejnten 192 9 6 3 10Ph s A Reactive Eeer oe Guinea 192 9 6 3 11 Phase A Real Power 192 9 6 3 12Phase AB Lnelmnevotage EE 193 9 6 3 13Phase B Apparent PONG E 193 9 6 3 14Phas PO EN Laveste 193 9 6 3 15Phase EE iere eege 193 9 6 3 16Phase B Line Neutral Voltage rrrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnrrrrnnnnnnnnennn 194 9 6 3 17Phase B Power Factor ccccccccccccccceccceccceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 194 9 6 3 1B Phase B Reactive PONG eeugteueteuetsekgeeekeugkgAgEde EERSTEN ENEEeKEEEEEgEEEEn 194 9 6 3 19Phase B Real Power scsccncccsacecncsicarcndsnacrandavetrandenecrundthatruateradeuminateuadtnds 194 9 6 3 20Phase BC Line Line Voltage
110. Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 22 13 Main Cabin Temperature Monitors the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Main Cabin Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 22 14 Outside Temperature Monitors the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Outside Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 22 15 Refrigeration Temperature Monitors the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Refrigeration Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 353 Maretran 10 4 22 16 Sea Temperature Monitors the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Sea Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 22 17 Transmission Oil Temperature Monitors the temperature of the oil in the transmission Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 22 18 User Defined nnn Temperature Monitors the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of User Defined nnn where nnn is a number from 128 to 144 Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 22 19 Wind Chill Monitors the current wind chill based on outside air temperature and wind speed Alert Types
111. Axis 215 Network Camera Network Address 10 0 0 47 Mirror Image ij Reverse Horizontal Controls ij Reverse Vertical Controls ij Compression oi Frame Rate 2 i fps DIEN 320x240 v Data rate 247kbits sec 31 kBytes sec lt ORT 372 Bl e 373 13 121 RE e 373 132 2NaM EE EE OE 373 13 1 2 3Network AddresS ets sinters tcc Ze sed desnnidgnsdoneedepdedsddnsdenndsee 374 13 1 24Gamera ING EE 374 EC E gel 374 13 1 2 6Compression Frame Rate and Resolution rrrrrrvrrrvrrrnrvvrrrrrrnnnnnnn 374 13 1 2 7 Data gt EE 375 14 N2KView Kleber eege 376 14 1 Restrictions Ladere inenie ines ae ene cients So clen cule cde eee baeucdnees 376 14 2 Building the N2KView Mobile Screens sessssssneenneessessrrrnnnneesserrrrrnnrneessee 377 1421 Other Configuration Date iiccakencteocsentcdesvensssecteontdnesmetteyeteacidestionsndnetenscdeenes 378 14 3 Send the Configuration File to the ener 379 14 4 Starting N2KView on the iPhone 0 0 lt 0sccssccesceescnesceescnescsescneccseestessseeanene 379 TAS Connecting to N2KServer ic ciccsiisesinsenad mene vesevedesedueacesedes sauvedenedenedevesetedeenieteceneds 383 14 6 Download the Configuration File earrrrnnnnnrrrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnn 387 14 7 About Screen secre casita tic ceecees eaten sence cuceesraceneesoogenen ere nnaceeeeua cee gue eae 388 EEE E 390 15 N2KSENV E verre 392 15 1 N2KServer Components EEN 392 15 1 1 N2KServe
112. B Unelmnevotage EE 182 9 6 1 7 Phase B FEIE reelle 182 9 6 1 8 Phase B Line Neutral Voltage rrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnrrrrnnnnnnnnennn 182 9 6 1 9 Phase BC Line Line Voltage EE 183 961 10P0456 G Fregen aa kassene 183 9 6 1 11 Phase C Line Neutral Voltage AEN 183 9 6 1 12Phase CA Line Line Voltage EE 183 9 6 2 AC Generator E 184 9621 Ee 184 9622 Av r ge FEIE Baren 184 9 6 2 3 Average Line Line Voltage EE 184 9 6 2 4 Average Line Neutral Voltage AEN 184 9 6 2 5 Phase A Apparent POW g eegente 185 9 6 2 6 Phase e E 185 9627 Phase A FOQUENO EE 185 9 6 2 8 Phase A Line Neutral Voltage AEN 185 96 29 Phase A Power Factor tteseee egen 185 9 6 2 10Phase Reactive POwer mrrrnannnnnnvvrnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 186 9 6 2 11 Phase A Real Power 186 9 6 2 12Phase AB Lnelmnevoltage REENEN 186 96 2 13Ph s B Apparent PONG siccssonccuiviionssenshavataltenanesiaienetadsuerunieieuassdsbedand 186 96 2 14Ph s B Curr enit unumsmnnnminnmn kaien siaakdvnddedahede 187 9 6 2 15Phase B Frequency 2 tegigterg eiezeeeeiieegieie eeg eieigiei ee See eierier egeeet 187 9 6 2 16Phase B Line Neutral Voltage rrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnnnernnnnnrrrrnnnnennennn 187 9 6 2 17 Phase B Power Factor en 187 9 6 2 18Phase B Reactive EE 188 9 6 2 19Phase B Real Power EE 188 9 6 2 20 Phase BC Line Line Voltage EE 188 9 6 2 21 Phase C Apparent e EE 188 9 6 2 22 Phase E EKEEE geeeeegedet eg egebeg eee 189 9
113. CP eu N2KServer Default Gateway Pair Bluetooth Device Calibrate Touch Screen Close 9 4 4 2 1 Use DHCP DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol is a method by which the MBB100 or DSM800 can get its IP address see section 8 2 assigned on startup The IP address is typically assigned by a router on the network If there is no router or the network administrator chooses to allocate all the addresses then this box should be unchecked and the IP address chosen for this MBB100 TSM800 TSM1330 or DSM800 entered in the IP Address field Revision 3 6 3 Page 94 Maretron 9 4 4 2 2 Hostname This is the name by which this MBB100 TSM800 TSM1330 or DSM800 will be known on the network 9 4 4 2 3 IP Address This field is disabled if the use DHCP box is checked This is the IP Address see section 8 2 for this MBB100 TSM800 TSM1330 or DSM800 9 4 4 2 4 Netmask This is a mask used to divide an IP Address into subnets Basically it tells the computer how much of the IP Address defined the network and how much may be used by computers on the network For most networks the first three parts of the IP Address define the network i e every computer on the network must have the same values and the last part defines the computer i e every computer on the network must have a different value Where the value 255 appears in the netmask the values define the network and must be the same The most common value is 255 255 255
114. Configuration Editor Tripped Alert 282 Figure 110 Trigger Configuration Editor Tripped Alert 283 Figure 111 Outside Radius Alert Parameters AA 284 Figure 112 Trigger Configuration Outside Radius Alert 285 Figure 113 Trigger Configuration Anchor Watch Alert 287 Figure 114 Trigger Configuration Inside Radius Alert 288 Figure 115 Trigger Configuration GPS Quality Alert 290 Figure 116 Direction Alert Parameters rrrrrrnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnvrnnnnnrrrrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnn 291 Figure 117 Trigger Configuration Direction Alert 291 Figure 118 Alert Editor Time Alert 293 Figure 119 Alert Action Editor Dialog Annunciator ActHons 295 Figure 120 Annunciator Tone Selection EEN 296 Figure 24 Alert Actions Dialog SwitcehActionsTab m m 297 Figure 122 Alert Actions Dialog Email Actions Tab 298 Figure 123 Alert Actions Dialog SMS Text Actions Tab 301 Figure 124 Breaker Lockout Dialog 362 Figure 125 Load Shedding Dialog A 367 Figure 126 Load Shed Source Dialog svrrorrnnnnvennrnnnnnvennrnnnnnvnnnnnrnnnennnnenrn 368 Figure 127 Camera Setup Dialog 371 Figure 128 Camera Type Drop Down et 371 Figure 129 USB Camera E 372 Figure 130 IP Camera with PTZ Controls seseeeeeeeenennnneenseeeennrnnnnnesseerrene 372 Figure 131 Quad Video Server without PTZ ENNEN 373 Revision 3 6 3 Page 27 Maretran Introduction Thank yo
115. DIS Select Destination Location Where should Maretron N2KServer be installed A Setup wil install Matetron N2KServer into the following folder To continue cick Next If you would like to select a different folder click Browse C Program Files Maretron N2KServer Browse At least 21 8 MB of free disk space is required Ce Gs Figure 4 Select Destination Location Page f The Select Additional Tasks screen will display next Select the appropriate checkboxes to install shortcuts for the program on the desktop or the quick launch bar Click Next gt to continue Revision 3 6 3 Page 45 Maretron fo gt w Select Additional Tasks Which additional tasks should be performed 4 Select the additional tasks you would Ke Setup to perform while installing Maretron N2KServer then cick Next 15 Setup Maretron N2KServer Additional icons d Create a desktop icon d Create a Quick Launch icon ce Je Cees Figure 5 N2KServer Installation Wizard Select Additional Tasks Page g The Ready to Install screen will display next Please verify that all the information on this screen is as desired Click Next gt to continue 3 Setup Maretron N2KServer el BI Ready to Install Setup is now ready to begin instaling Maretron N2KServer on your computer E Click Install to continue with the installation or click Back d you want to review or change any settings Destinati
116. Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Instances 253 9 6 10 17 Preheat Generally indicates that the cylinder preheaters are active Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Revision 3 6 3 Page 211 Maretran Instances 253 9 6 10 18 Rev Limit Exceeded Generally indicates that the engine s RPM has exceeded some engine defined limit Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Instances 253 9 6 10 19 Shutting Down Generally indicates that the engine is in the process of shutting down Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Instances 253 9 6 10 20 Sub Secondary Throttle Generally indicates that the engine has fallen back to a secondary throttle due to some fault detected in the primary throttle Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Instances 253 9 6 10 21 Throttle Position Sensor Generally indicates a fault in the throttle position sensor Please consult the
117. Instance field will be displayed If a label has been stored in the device the label will be appended to the instance number in parenthesis This is a combo box limited by the number of available instances for the parameter These could correspond to device instances or data instances Select the desired Instance by pressing on the combo box and scrolling down to the required value The preview will be updated with the Data Source selected See section 8 9 1 for details on the Any option 9 4 10 18 9 Instances Tank Instances eee When creating a component that computes a value over more than instance of a value e g the sum of the fuel levels in all the tanks these are entered in a comma separated list of numbers When complete moving the cursor off the field will cause the preview to be updated Revision 3 6 3 Page 127 Maretron 9 4 10 18 10 Channel Circuit Breaker Channel 1 Fire Fly Bridge Channel 2 CO Fly Bridge Channel 3 Fire Dining Channel 4 CO Dining Channel 5 Fire Saloon Channel 6 CO Saloon Channel 7 Fire Galley Channel 8 CO Galley Channel 9 Fire Aft Deck Channel 10 CO Aft Deck If the parameter you have selected has multiple indicators for each source Electrical Distribution Circuit Breakers and Indicator Channels are examples of this the Circuit Breaker or Channel field will be displayed This is a drop down list containing the set of available indicators for the paramet
118. LIABILITY AND DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY FOR THE SOFTWARE OR Revision 3 6 3 Page 403 Maretron THE DESIGN ACCURACY SAFETY OR CONFORMANCE WITH ANY GOVERNMENT STANDARDS INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties so the above exclusion may not apply to you This warranty gives you specific rights and you may also have other rights which vary state to state 9 INDEMNIFICATION You agree to indemnify defend and hold harmless Maretron and its suppliers from and against any and all claims costs liabilities damages and expense including but not limited to reasonable attorneys fees and legal costs including claims by third parties which Maretron may suffer sustain or incur as result of a your breach of any of the terms and conditions of this Agreement and or b your use of the SOFTWARE except to the extent that Maretron is liable under any express warranty set forth herein 10 REMEDIES As noted above the limited warranty provided above will be effective for a period of sixty 60 days following your receipt of this SOFTWARE During the warranty period Maretron will at its sole option a repair or replace without charge on an exchange basis any magnetic diskette or optical disk which proves defective in materials or workmanship or b refund the fees paid for licensing the SOFTWARE This is
119. Line Voltage Displays the voltage between Phase B and Phase C of an AC Utility Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Revision 3 6 3 Page 194 Maretron Units Hertz Instances 253 9 6 3 21 Phase C Apparent Power Displays the Apparent Power being drawn on Phase A from an AC Utility Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units VA 9 6 3 22 Phase C Current Displays the RMS electrical current being sourced from an AC Utility on phase C Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units Amperes 9 6 3 23 Phase C Frequency Displays the frequency of an AC Utility on phase C Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Hertz Instances 253 9 6 3 24 Phase C Line Neutral Voltage Displays the phase C to neutral RMS voltage of an AC Utility Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Hertz Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 195 Maretron 9 6 3 25 Phase C Power Factor Displays the Power Factor of phase C of an AC Utility Component Types Digital Units Instances 253 9 6 3 26 Phase C Reactive Power Displays the Reactive Power being drawn on Phase C from an AC Utility Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units VAr 9 6 3 27 Phase C Real Power Displays the Real Power being drawn on Phase C from an AC Utility Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units Watts kilowatts 9 6 3 28 Phase CA Li
120. Local Area Network or LAN on the other side Each computer on the LAN side of the connection will be assigned its own IP address typically in the ranges 192 168 x x 10 x x x and 172 16 x x through 172 31 x x where x can be any number in the range 0 255 The WAN connection will be assigned a single IP address by the ISP Generally network address translation is performed by a router that is connected to the Internet via a Cable or DSL connection on the WAN side and to the local area network LAN via Ethernet or Wi Fi connections In order to access an N2KServer on the local area network from an N2KView outside of the LAN You must configure the router to allow incoming connections on port 6544 and to forward these connections to the IP address of the N2KServer computer Consult the documentation that came with your router for details 8 4 PAT Port Address Translation If you wish to use N2KView to view data from an N2KServer on a WAN through an Internet connection and your Internet Service Provider does not allow communication on port 6544 please read this section If your N2KServer and N2KView computers are on the same LAN or your ISP allows communication over port 6544 you may skip this section N2KServer requires a connection to be made on port 6544 Routers that support Port Address Translation can be set up to accept incoming connections on a different port and to forward these connections to port 6544 on the IP add
121. Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Revision 3 6 3 Page 354 Maretron 10 4 23 Time Date 10 4 23 1 Time Enables the setting of an alarm clock in any time zone Alert Types Timer Alert 10 4 24 Transmission 10 4 24 1 Transmission Oil Pressure Monitors the pressure of the oil in the transmission Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 24 2 Transmission Oil Temperature Monitors the temperature of the oil in the transmission Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 355 Maretran 10 4 25 Transmission Warning 10 4 25 1 Check Transmission Generally indicates some fault condition in the transmission that requires attention Please consult the transmission manufacturer s documentation for details Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 25 2 Low Oil Level Generally indicates that the oil level in the transmission has fallen below some transmission defined limit Please consult the transmission manufacturer s documentation for details Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 25 3 Low Oil Pressure Generally indicates that the oil pressure in the transmission has fallen below some transmission defined limit Please consult the transmission manufacturer s documentation for details Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Data Unavailable Alert
122. Low System Voltage Generally indicates that the system voltage has fallen below some user defined limit Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Instances 253 9 6 10 13 Maintenance Needed Generally indicates that the engine is in need of maintenance Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Revision 3 6 3 Page 210 Maretran Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Instances 253 9 6 10 14 Neutral Start Protect Generally indicates that the engine will not start because the transmission is not in neutral Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Instances 253 9 6 10 15 Over Temperature Generally indicates that the engine s temperature has exceeded some engine defined limit Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Instances 253 9 6 10 16 Power Reduction Generally indicates that the engine is operating in a reduced power mode due to some fault condition Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Component Types
123. Magnetic North Alert Types Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 340 Maretran 10 4 14 Humidity 10 4 14 1 Inside Humidity Monitors the relative humidity from a humidity sensor set up with a source of Inside Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 14 2 Outside Humidity Monitors the relative humidity from a humidity sensor set up with a source of Outside Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 14 3 User Defined nnn Humidity Monitors the relative humidity from a humidity sensor set up with a source of User Defined nnn where nnn is a number from 128 to 144 Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 341 Maretran 10 4 15 Indicator 10 4 15 1 Status Monitors the status of a switch indicator or run indicator on the system Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Error Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 Switches Per Instance 28 10 4 16 N2KServer N2KView Connection 10 4 16 1 Cloud Server Data Remaining Monitors the amount of Data Bandwidth remaining to the Cloud Server for the current month Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Instances not applicable 10 4 16 2 Cloud Server Data Used Monitors the amount of Data Bandwidth used to the Cloud Server for the current month Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Instances n
124. Maretran N2KView Vessel Monitoring and Control Software for N2K Networks User s Manual Revision 3 6 3 Copyright 2013 Maretron LLP All Rights Reserved Maretron LLP 9014 N 23 Ave 10 Phoenix AZ 85021 7850 http www maretron com Revision 3 6 3 Page 1 Maretron Maretron Manual Part M001401 Revision History Rev Description 1 0 Original document 2 2 New release corresponding to Version 2 2 of N2Kview 2 3 New release corresponding to Version 2 3 of N2Kview 2 4 New release corresponding to Version 2 4 of N2KView 2 5 New release corresponding to Version 2 5 of N2Kview 2 6 New release corresponding to Version 2 6 of N2Kview 3 0 New release corresponding to Version 3 0 of N2Kview 3 2 New release corresponding to Version 3 2 of N2Kview 3 4 New release corresponding to Version 3 4 of N2Kview 3 5 New release corresponding to Version 3 5 of N2Kview 3 6 New release corresponding to Version 3 6 of N2Kview 3 6 1 Update for version 3 6 1 of N2KView 3 6 2 Update for version 3 6 2 of N2KView 3 6 3 Update for version 3 6 3 of N2KView Revision 3 6 3 Page 2 ROD 5 6 Maretron Table of Contents 110 Ts 13 9 EE EO eee ere er eee een 28 Software Version xeicesacensotetcecscentdasectet japtcteddaxxstedcecdcighcassctehjapaceeicaxastetvavaseebsecectxisest 29 Software EES ee 30 TSS vvs 36 4T E 36 EEE SE EE NO 37 N2KView System Features ee 39 GUESS A hs ia
125. N2KView Maretron DCR100 switches that are LOCKED will display LOCKED on N2KView Moritz and Maretron switches may be locked and unlocked from within N2KView from a new Breaker Lockout Dialog Load Shedding through Moritz AC and DC panel and Maretron DCR100 Licenses have been broken out into modules Revision 3 6 3 Page 32 Maretron Control tabs are now aggregated onto a Setup Dialog to allow display on smaller screens Support for Cloud Server Maretron s Cloud Server is a new subscription service that allows remote copies of N2KView to access an IPG100 without knowing the IP Address of the vessel New parameters for data used data remaining percent used percent remaining New fields in Connections Dialog Video Frames will be requested from the Cloud Server if the connection to the N2KServer is through the Cloud Server Better layout in Connections Dialog for N2KServers detected Fuel Economy displays No Fuel Rate when fuel rate is not received it was displaying No SOG Minor Improvements to improve consistency and quality Toggling Day Night mode will be saved in the configuration Virtual Keyboard will not be displayed on fields that are disabled Many Parameters that were limited to Digital Controls now also have Gauge Bar Graph and Line Graph options Some Parameters were not associated with Instances that should have been e g Bearing Origin to Destination Some timeouts increased to match DSM250
126. NTLM LOGIN lt 250 AUTH LOGIN lt 250 X LINK2STATE lt 250 XEXCH50 lt 250 OK Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 SMTPMailer authenticate gt AUTH LOGIN SMTPMailer received message lt 334 VXNIcm5hbWU6 decodedResponse username sending username AAAAAAAAA SMTPMailer received message lt 334 UGFzc3dvemQ6 decodedResponse password sending password xxxx SMTPMailer received message lt 235 2 7 0 Authentication successful SMTPMailer sending mail header gt MAIL FROM lt AAAAAAAAA maretron com gt gt RCPT TO lt AAAAAAAAA maretron com gt gt DATA SMTPMailer received message lt 250 2 1 0 AAAAAAAAA maretron com Sender OK SMTPMailer received message lt 250 2 1 5 AAAAAAAAA maretron com lt 354 Start mail input end with lt CRLF gt lt CRLF gt M
127. Outgoing SMTP Server Name in the Connections Settings Dialog must be filled in 9 4 5 2 1 e The Mail Account User Name in the Connections Settings Dialog must be filled in 9 4 5 2 3 e The Enable Email Transmission when Alert is Triggered box for the Alert must be checked and the Alert has just gone into the Active state e The Enable Email Transmission when Alert is Cleared box for the Alert must be checked and the Alert has just gone into the Awaiting Cancel state or Inactive state i e the alert condition has cleared e An Email Address to which the email will be sent must be filled in This can either be a specific email Address for the Alert see above or the Default Email Address in the Connections Setting Dialog 9 4 5 2 6 in which case the Add Default Address box in the Alert Email Edit must be checked see above 10 3 7 5 Email Message Format A typical email message is shown below This message was sent with High importance From AAAAAAAA To AAAAAAAA CE Subject 12 30 01 N2KView Alert Starter Batt Volts gt 15V Went ACTIVE Current value is 14 8V Please check the starter battery voltage Note Some Email Servers do not recognize the subject and will place it as part of the body of the email The subject of the Alert Email consists of the following information e Time at which the alert become active or inactive e The word N2KView Revision 3 6 3 Page 300 Maretron e The word Test
128. Phase C of a generator Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 310 Maretran 10 4 2 21 Phase C Apparent Power Monitors the Apparent Power being sourced from a generator on phase C Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 2 22 Phase C Current Monitors the AC RMS electrical current being sourced from a generator on phase C Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 2 23 Phase C Frequency Monitors the frequency of phase C of a generator Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 2 24 Phase C Line Neutral Voltage Monitors the RMS voltage between Phase C and neutral of a generator Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 2 25 Phase C Power Factor Monitors the Power Factor of Phase C of a generator Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 2 26 Phase C Reactive Power Monitors the Reactive Power on Phase C of a generator Revision 3 6 3 Page 311 Maretron Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 2 27 Phase C Real Power Monitors the Real Power on Phase C of a generator Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 2 28 Phase CA Line Line Voltage Monitors the RMS voltage between Phase C and Pha
129. REeENE E td 212 96 10 19 Sum DOWN scierie esrin eerten tirien eene ayieee 212 96 10 20 Sub Secondary Throtil u humanismens nd 212 961021 Throttle Position Sensor Lunmneusgnenmneistteneenaieesdenn 212 9 6 10 22 Warning Level 1 eietessgetieetteetgetee csduetcamnducheneiduesductdenkicnesdeeudacudecbincateas 213 9 6 10 23 Warning Level 2 213 961024 Water PION ia ien aaen EE EEE EE EEE 213 961025 Water In Fueli 213 9 611 gt eege 214 9 6 11 1 Bait Well Temperature 214 Revision 3 6 3 Page 10 Maretran 9 6 11 2 Barometric Pr ssufG u ussvemmmmpnsmmmmmmemi nn 214 BB Wis DW PO eee 214 9 6 11 4Engine Room Temperature rnnnnrvnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnvrnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrrrnnennnnnennn 214 9 611 5Heat e EE 215 G CET ul e aerate nestrenteerteaut ens setate iueuteaatieeiineltauteey ee 215 9 6 11 7 Inside Temperature ose js aseps iiensig ddteagte sSsente dee anteade acts endene 215 9 6 11 8Live Well Temperature ee 215 9 6 11 9Main Cabin Temperature 216 9 6 11 10 Moon SE 216 9 6 11 11 O tsid UINNOILY viesecrestcentesveeevienuuevivsyneaybemvaueuinee tens beeybemsiuetrevenemas 216 9 6 11 12 Outside Temperature EE 216 96 11 13 Sea Temperature a issiran cscoieiesesiansdncaseconnsvansdeoncionoednneedbiuededanendeons 216 BECK Steed Eeer 217 9 6 11 15 ME pe 217 9 6 11 16 T R AN EE 217 961117 TAP ve 217 9 6 11 18 User Defined nnn Humidity AEN 218 9 6 11 19 User Defined nnn Temperature en 218 9 6 11 20 Wind ME UE 218 GEAR ue En EE 219
130. Server Architecture using Cloud Gener 73 Figure 28 Setting Instance Number 78 Figure 29 N2KView Opening Gcreen EEN 85 Figure 30 N2KView Operational Mode Screen ssssseeeeesssreeesrrrssrrrreserenreee 86 Revision 3 6 3 Page 24 Maretron Port Tachometer REN p Starboard Tachometer Commands amp Settings Alerts Setup Load Shedding 31 N2KView Commands amp Settings Dialog 89 Fig re 32 ODA EE 90 Figure 33 Change Password Dialog 91 Figure 34 Configuration Dialog seseeeterEteeEEeKEESSESEEEEEEECEEEeEEESEEREEEEEESEESENeeEe eg 92 Figure 35 Connections Settings Dialog 2 lt imusmmesemssvummnjemm imineo 99 Figure 36 Load New Configuration Dialog 108 Figure 37 Save Configuration Dialog 110 Figure 38 Units Setup DIO G sce 0eegectegetgeeeutgekgdEueCge Eege 111 Figure 39 Screens Setup Gcreen EE 117 Figure 40 gt Parameter E 121 Figure 41 Selected Component in Screens Setup Mode rrrrrrnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnr 122 Figure 42 Component Edtor EE 124 Figure 43 Example of setting Divisions and Ranges ssssssessererrreeseerree 131 Figure 44 Analog Clock Component Example srrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrrnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnr 133 Figure 45 Disabled Anchor Alert Example Akte 134 Figure 46 Enabled Anchor Alert Example sesesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeerirreeerrnersern 135 Figure 47 Anchor Alert without Heading rrvnnnnnnvvrnnnnnnnvvrnnnnrnnvrrnnrrrnnvr
131. Services This is a subscription Revision 3 6 3 Page 73 Maretron based service that uses a third computer in the cloud Because this computer is always at a known address the IPG100 and N2KView are both able to find it easily without any special configuration of firewalls routers or Marina networks N2KServer running on the PC does not have the ability to use the cloud server Figure 27 shows this topology 8 2 TCP IP Networks The networking protocol that is used for the communication between the server and stations in the N2KView system is the TCP IP protocol This protocol is used by the World Wide Web FTP File Transfer Protocol and many others of the most popular applications on the Internet The TCP IP connection can be made over an Ethernet connection a Wi Fi connection cellular phone data connection and many other types of media In fact a single packet of TCP IP data may traverse multiple types of media on its journey The TCP IP protocol is natively supported by Microsoft Windows XP and Microsoft Windows Vista as well as Internet connected cellular phones Each computer on a TCP IP network is identified by an IP address unique to that network An IP address consists of four numbers each ranging between 0 and 255 separated by periods This is referred to a dotted decimal notation Examples of IP addresses in this format are 10 0 0 1 and 62 12 31 188 The IP address may either be hard coded into the computer thi
132. The initial release includes German Dutch Italian Spanish and Swedish A graph component for switches and indicators New components for counting events and displaying the total time a switch or indicator is in a certain state The ability to cut copy and paste components while editing screen layout Revision 3 6 3 Page 31 Maretron It also has support to run on the MBB100 and DSM800 products from Maretron Version 3 3 was not released Version 3 4 introduces the following new features Total Revision of Cameras users may now specify the quality of the video requested from the camera Alert thresholds may be specified with fractional values Labels from J2K100 are now filtered according to the function of the J2K100 This prevents duplicate labels French Language added for trial Added ability to prevent updates from the web New parameters of Trip Fuel Used and Total Trip Fuel Used Added Reset button to Digital Control to support resetting of trip parameters Improved saving of files to N2KServer Binary Communication with N2KServer if supported on N2KServer This results in a bandwidth use that is cut by over 65 Alert Actions can command switches Moving Averages may be calculated for almost any parameter before display Two types of averages Linear and Angular dependent on Unit Type Support for LOCKing Breakers if supported by the Breakers Moritz AC and DC switches that are LOCKED will display LOCKED on
133. WARE AND ACCOMPANYING MATERIALS INCLUDING THE DISC PACKAGE PRINTED MATERIALS AND BINDERS OR OTHER CONTAINERS TO THE PLACEOF PURCHASE FOR A FULL REFUND ALL MARETRON PROGRAM SOFTWARE COMES WITH A 30 DAY MONEY BACK GUARANTEE IF PURCHASED DIRECTLY FROM MARETRON AN RETURN MERCHANDISE AUTHORIZATION RMA NUMBER MUST ACCOMPANY ALL RETURNED PRODUCTS PLEASE CONTACT MARETRON AT 1 602 861 1707 AND ASK FOR CUSTOMER SERVICE IN ORDER TO OBTAIN ONE IF THE NEED ARISES MARETRON SOFTWARE YOU PURCHASED FROM A DEALER MUST BE RETURNED TO THAT DEALER FOR A REFUND IF THEY HAVE A RETURN POLICY HARDWARE LICENSE KEY DONGLE EXCHANGES REQUIRE THE DONGLE BE RETURNED TO MARETRON FOR REPLACEMENT BEFORE A NEW DONGLE CAN BE ISSUED MARETRON RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REFUSE REFUNDS ON ANY OR ALL MARETRON PRODUCTS This Agreement is proof of license to exercise the rights granted herein Please treat it as valuable property 1 DESCRIPTION OF SOFTWARE The SOFTWARE may include accompanying materials including but not limited to certain portions of the SOFTWARE may be owned by Maretron and other portions of the SOFTWARE may be owned by one or more third parties Your use of this SOFTWARE is subject to all of the terms and conditions of this License Agreement 2 GRANT OF LICENSE Except as otherwise provided for herein Maretron hereby grants to you a non transferable personal non exclusive license to use the SOFTWARE during the License Term as defined below for yo
134. Water 349 104205 Tolga 349 10242024 Trip buede ne 349 10421 TANK EE 350 15 0 6 MR EE 350 124212 R maiNiNg D 350 102213 Total Level EE 350 10 4 21 4 Total Remaining EE 350 10 4 22 Temperature ege Eege eege 351 10 4 22 1 Bait Well Temperature 351 10 4 22 2 Battery Temperature AEN 351 102223 D EE encore epee eens 351 10 4 22 4 Engine Coolant Temperature sessssssnenneeeeseeetrrnrrrenseerrrrrnnnneeeeee 351 10 4 22 5 Engine Oil Temperature ee 351 102226 Engine Room Temperature usanne ENEE 352 10 4 22 7 Exhaust Gas Temperature EE 352 10 4 22 8 Freezer Temperature EE 352 102229 Heat NE sansene ene eee ee ee ee ee ene eee ere 352 10 4 22 10 Heating System Temperature rrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnrrrnnnen 352 10 4 22 11 Inside Temperature eege seess eebe 353 10 4 22 12 Live Well Temperature en 353 10 4 22 13 Main Cabin Temperature 353 10 4 22 14 Outside Temperature ee 353 Revision 3 6 3 Page 20 Maretran 10 4 22 15 Refrigeration Temperature 353 10422216 Sea Tetris 354 10 4 22 17 Transmission Oil Temperature rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvrrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnrrnnnnen 354 10 4 22 18 User Defined nnn Temperature AEN 354 022219 ue Ee UE 354 10 4 23 TG DANG eee 355 10 4231 RE 355 10 4 24 Transmission eegenen WEE REES EE 355 10 4 24 1 Transmission Oil Pressure sseeesesseeennnneeeseeernnnrnrenseerrrrrnnnnnneeet 355 10 4 24 2 Transmission Oil Temperature EE 355 10 4 25 Transmission Warning sesesmessnnmsedsksa
135. abs along the top of the screen display your defined favorite screens the tab on the right hand edge of the screen allow access to the Command and Settings Dialog Section 9 4 on page 88 describes these configuration tabs and the functions they perform 9 3 3 Switching Between Day and Night Mode N2KView supports a Night Mode to enable viewing in dark conditions In this mode all colors are converted to muted red tones so that you can view the favorite screens without reducing your night vision You may enter Night Mode by pressing the Night Mode button in the Commands and Settings Dialog In Night Mode this button changes to read Day Mode which you may press to exit Night Mode and return to Day Mode You may also press Ctrl and the N key to toggle between day and night modes 9 3 4 Switching Between Windowed and Full Screen Configurations You may change the viewing mode of N2KView to take up the entire computer screen Pressing the F11 key will toggle N2KView between full screen mode and windowed mode In full screen mode you may wish to hide the Windows taskbar so that the N2KView window is the only visible element on the computer screen You can do this by right clicking on the Windows taskbar selecting Properties from the pop up menu checking the Auto hide the taskbar box on the Taskbar tab of the Taskbar and Start Menu Properties dialog box that displays then clicking on the OK
136. adius for the Outside Radius Alert are expressed in the same units as distance e g Nautical Miles the units of the Anchor Watch Alert are expressed in the same units as the depth e g feet This is more convenient because the distance from the anchor will be related to amount of anchor chain released which in turn is related to the depth at the point of anchor Revision 3 6 3 Page 286 Maretron Trigger Configuration Accept Re trigger Period amp Minutes Seconds Anchor Watch Alert Set Set Delay Minutes Seconds Anchor Watch Alert Clear Clear EIER oo WGS Seconds 1 attude 256 23 224 N Get Current Position EIER 2200215Ww 82 00 215 W Figure 113 Trigger Configuration Anchor Watch Alert Accept Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If the condition which caused the alert remains true after the amount of time in this field the alert will return to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert If a value of 0 00 is entered then the alert will never re trigger Anchor Watch Alert Set If the distance between the current GPS position and the reference position rises above the value in this field the alert will become active Set Delay The distance between the current GPS position and the reference position must rise above the Outside Radius Al
137. agreement before continuing with the installation Maretron Software License Agreement WARNING CAREFULLY READ THIS ENTIRE SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THE ENCLOSED SOFTWARE PROGRAM THIS AGREEMENT IS LEGALLY BINDING UPON YOU EITHER AN INDIVIDUAL OR ENTITY AND MARETRON LLP BY OPENING THE SEALED SOFTWARE PACKAGE AND OR BY USING THIS SOFTWARE YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS v Figure 13 N2KView Installation Wizard License Agreement Page Revision 3 6 3 Page 56 Maretran The Select Destination Location screen will display next If you wish to install to a different location from the default shown enter it in the text box or click the Browse button to navigate to your desired installation directory Note that we are just installing an installer at this stage Click Next gt to continue JE Setup Maretron N2KView Installer Select Destination Location Where should Maretron N2KView Installer be installed A Setup will install Maretron N2KView Installer into the following folder To continue click Next If you would like to select a different folder click Browse Program Files Maretron N2KView Installer Browse At least 36 8 MB of free disk space is required Figure 14 N2KView Installation Wizard Select Destination Location Page The Select Start Menu Folder screen appears next If you wish to change the name of the start menu folder from the d
138. ail Address from the Connections tab see 9 4 5 2 6 will be added to the list of addresses for this alert If no default address has been established then this field will be disabled The default address will be displayed next to the check box and may not be edited from here Use Default Address Use Additional Address es If this check box is ticked then you will be able to select extra recipients for the email from the Email Address book see 9 4 5 2 8 The recipients are selected from a drop down list Use Additional Address es Selected Names Address v Chairman chairman maretron com FE rek ae After selection the list of addresses is displayed next to the check box Use Additional Address es Chairman chairman maretron com Manager manager maretron com Message when Alert is Triggered this text is transmitted when the condition causing the alert becomes true If this field is blank the message will still be transmitted but without user entered details Message when Alert is Cleared this text is transmitted when the condition causing the alert becomes false when the alert transitions from Active to Awaiting Cancel or is disabled If this field is blank the message will still be transmitted but without user entered details Revision 3 6 3 Page 299 Maretron 10 3 7 4 Conditions for Sending an Email For the transmission of an email to be attempted the following conditions must be met e The
139. alax USB These drivers have been tested on the NavPixel monitors e Hampshire TSHARC USB These drivers have been tested with the Hatteland HD Series monitors e 3M Microtouch USB amp RS232 These drivers have been tested with the Hatteland JH series monitors These drivers have been tested with the Nauticomp Series Il monitors e ELO Intellitouch Drivers version 3 5 2 USB e Penmount RS232 Touch Screen Drivers need to be calibrated to ensure that the position touches are accurately reported to the software Pressing this button will cause N2KView to exit and start a separate program to calibrate the touch screen that you have connected When the program is complete N2KView will restart In some cases the program can take a while up to a minute to start so be patient Each driver has its own calibration program and N2KView will examine the connected screen and choose the appropriate calibration program Revision 3 6 3 Page 98 Maretron 9 4 5 Connections Dialog Pressing the Connections button causes the Connection Settings dialog to be displayed This window allows you to configure the parameters that are used when connecting to the N2KServer and your Email Server 9 4 5 1 N2KServer Connection Section The fields in this section are used to control the connection to N2KServer A screenshot of the Connections Settings dialog showing the N2KServer Connection tab is shown below Connections Settings N2KServer C
140. alerts this column show the distance between the current boat position and the reference position Priority The entry in this column describes the priority you assigned to the alert 0 is the highest priority and 9999 is the lowest Sorting the table on priority will place the alarms above the warnings and then sort in priority order within these groups Description The entry in this column reflects the contents of the Description field in the Alerts Editor for this alert Location The entry in this column reflects the contents of the Location field in the Alerts Editor for this alert What happened The entry in this column summarizes the most recent change in the alert status 10 3 4 Alerts Setup Tab The Alerts Setup Tab appears along the side of the N2KView main screen just as any other administrative tab Pressing or left clicking on the Alerts Setup Tab causes the Alerts Setup Dialog to appear Double clicking on the Vessel Mode in the Alerts Status Bar will also cause the Alerts Setup Dialog to appear Alerts are not licensed in the Standard version of N2kView The Alerts Setup Tab will appear semi transparent and will not respond to pressing or clicking Revision 3 6 3 Page 264 Maretron 10 3 5 Alerts Setup Dialog The Alerts Setup Dialog allows you to create new alerts or delete or re configure existing alerts Also you may change the operating mode of the vessel enabling you to easily enabl
141. amera on the local boat network If your network includes a DNS server this may be entered as a name 13 1 2 4 Camera No When setting up an analog camera attached to the quad video server the channel number is chosen from a drop down list in addition to the name and IP address 1 2 4 13 1 2 5 Mirror Image The image will be flipped to produce a mirror image is this box is checked 13 1 2 6 Compression Frame Rate and Resolution There is a tradeoff between the quality of the picture displayed and the bandwidth or data rate required to support that quality On the local network of the boat this is probably not important but when transmitting the picture over the internet you may wish to compromise the quality to save bandwidth Compression is the amount of pre processing that can be done to each image before transmitting to squash the image into a smaller size Compression values less than about 80 produce very little distortion in the image and can result in significant savings in bandwidth It does require more processing power to do the compression and then uncompress in N2KView Frame Rate is the number of frames that are transmitted every second The higher the frame rate the smoother the video Doubling the frame rate requires twice the bandwidth Resolution is the amount of pixels or dots that make up the picture The first number is the number of dots across the screen the second is the number from top to bottom
142. ances 253 9 6 2 17 Phase B Power Factor Displays the Power Factor of phase B of the AC power from a generator Component Types Digital Units Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 187 Maretran 9 6 2 18 Phase B Reactive Power Displays the Reactive Power being drawn on Phase B from a generator Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units VAr 9 6 2 19 Phase B Real Power Displays the Real Power being drawn on Phase B from a generator Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units Watts kilowatts 9 6 2 20 Phase BC Line Line Voltage Displays the voltage between Phase B and Phase C of the AC power from a generator Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Hertz Instances 253 9 6 2 21 Phase C Apparent Power Displays the Apparent Power being drawn on Phase C from a generator Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units VA Revision 3 6 3 Page 188 Maretran 9 6 2 22 Phase C Current Displays the AC RMS electrical current being sourced from a generator on phase C Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units Amperes 9 6 2 23 Phase C Frequency Displays the frequency of the AC power from a generator on phase C Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Hertz Instances 253 9 6 2 24 Phase C Line Neutral Voltage Displays the phase C to neutral RMS voltage of the AC power from a generator
143. and sound annunciators in the current operating mode New Click this button to create a new alert A dialog will appear allowing you to select a parameter and alert class and the appropriate Alert Editor dialog will appear letting you configure the new alert Edit Clicking this button causes the Alert Editor dialog to appear for the selected alert Delete Clicking this button causes the selected alert to be permanently deleted A warning dialog is displayed Pressing the Delete button on the keyboard will have the same effect Save Clicking this button causes the new Alert Operating Mode to be Set and then Alerts Setup Dialog to be closed Cancel Clicking this button causes the Alerts Setup Dialog to be closed without changing the Alert Operating Mode Revision 3 6 3 Page 266 Maretron 10 3 6 Alert Editor You initialize an alert by defining its parameters using the Alert Editor The Alert Editor page is entered 1 through the Alerts Setup Dialog see 10 3 5 or 2 directly from the Alert Status Screen see 10 3 3 Different alert classes will show different Trigger Configurations and different parameters will have different parameter sections An example of an Alert Editor is shown below Alert Editor DC Voltage Low Alert Description Lov DC Instance Enable Disable Control Enabled Disabled Operating Mode s Moored Underway Anchored Trigger Configuration Accept Re Trigger Period
144. and upward using excessive memory resulting in N2KView slowing and then crashing after a few days If after installation your AIR runtime is upgraded to one of these versions and you experience this problem we suggest that you download and install AIR version 3 1 from http airdownload adobe com air win download 3 1 AdobeAIRinstall er exe to prevent this Please contact Maretron Support at 866 550 9100 if you have any questions o N2KView will also run under Max OS Users should follow the following instructions to install N2KView manually 1 Install AIR Adobe Integrated Runtime Go to www adobe com and press the Ra to start the download Install N2KView Go to the following URL http wWww maretron com files N2KView Maretron N2KView 3 6 3 20130719 air to download and install After installation the AIR update process will take care of future updates e CPU Minimum Pentium 4 or Equivalent Recommended Pentium 4 3 0 GHz Revision 3 6 3 Page 36 Maretron e Memory Minimum 512 MB RAM Recommended 1 GB RAM on Windows XP and 2GB RAM on Windows Vista e Hard Drive Space 40 MB e CD ROM or DVD Drive e Video Card Minimum 128 MB memory Recommended 256 MB N2K View is a graphics intensive program which will allow more complex screen layouts with high power graphics engines e Network Connection 10BASE T or 100BASE TX or 802 11a b g or 3G e Display Minimum 1024x768 Resolution 32 Bit Color Video e
145. aretron com files N2KView Maretron N2KView BlackBox 3 6 3 20130719 air gt Revision 3 6 3 Page 68 Maretron lt http www maretron com files N2KView n2kview update descriptor blackbox 2 5 xml gt Plug the USB Flash Drive into the computer TSM800 TSM1330 MBB100 or USB800 while N2K View is running If the version on the USB Flash Drive is more recent than the one that is running it will prompt to be installed and the TSM800 TSM1330 MBB100 or DSM800 will restart after about 6 minutes If the version on the USB Flash Drive is the same or earlier than the one that is running then a message stating that an update is not required will be displayed Revision 3 6 3 Page 69 Maretran 8 General Concepts 8 1 Client Server Architecture The N2KView Vessel Monitoring and Control System is based on a client server architecture In this context a server is defined as a component that provides services over a network and a client is defined as a station that requests and uses those services Within the N2KView System there is one server called N2KServer and one or more stations or clients called N2KView The server component is implemented by either an IPG100 or N2KServer software running on a Windows PC and the station or client components are implemented by the N2KView software N2KView software may run on a Windows PC Mac or Maretron s MBB100 TSM800 TSM1330 or DSM800 Mobile versions of N2KView software a
146. arks will lock to the needle to indicate that the max min values are now meaningless Pressing the Reset button will move both marks to the current needle position and unlock the marks The Reset button is displayed only if the marks are enabled Revision 3 6 3 Page 174 Maretron A second wind angle component with an expanded scale at the bow of the boat is also available for sailboats This is the Close Angle component and is shown below Apparent Wind Figure 81 Wind Close Angle Component Example Min Max Markers may be added to a Close Angle Component by clicking on a check box in the Component Editor Figure 82 Close Angle Component with Min Max Marks The marks are two red triangles just inside the gauge perimeter and are pushed left or right by the needle Pressing the Reset button will move both marks to the current needle position The Reset button is displayed only if the marks are enabled Revision 3 6 3 Page 175 Maretron 9 5 30 Video The Video Component is used to display video from IP Cameras The component is square and has a user defined label at the top If the camera supports Pan Tilt and Zoom buttons under the video display will be enabled if a Component Type of Video with PTZ Controls is chosen If the camera does support the PTZ functions then the user can select a Component Type of just Video for those locations where control of the video camera is undesirable e g guest stateroom
147. ash when editing Dest Waypoint Number e Switch commands from Load Shedding are now checked that the switch responded correctly e Removed Alert Switch Actions for safety reasons Note that the DCR100 can now have channels configured to act as an Annunciator so alert switch actions that were being used to sound an external alarm should be reconfigured to use this option Version 3 6 introduces the following new features Revision 3 6 3 Page 34 Maretron e The ability to move background images to N2KServer as part of the configuration e Support for Landscape mode on the Mobile version e Support for background images on the Mobile version Version 3 6 2 introduces the following new features e Support for Maretron s SMS100 Text Messaging Module Version 3 6 3 has a number of stability improvements plus e Support for Hardware Counters and Times in the SIM100 RIM100 and DCR100 Modules e Addition of two more Push Buttons Revision 3 6 3 Page 35 Maretran 4 Prerequisites 4 1 N2KView The following requirements must be met in order to successfully run N2KView e Operating System o Windows XP Home Edition Professional or Microsoft Vista 32 or 64 bit or Windows 7 32 or 64 bit or Windows 8 32 or 64 bit N2KView runs under the Adobe Integrated Runtime AIR If AIR is not installed on the PC it will be installed as part of the N2KView installation process Maretron has had some reports of AIR version 3 2
148. ates Alerts exist in one of five states Disabled A Disabled Alert is an alarm or warning that has yet to be enabled or activated In this state no action will be taken regardless of the value of the monitored parameter A Disabled Alert May be enabled in which case it transitions to the Inactive state Inactive An Inactive alert is an alarm or warning that has been enabled but the condition causing the alert is not present If the alert condition becomes true the alert will become an Active Alert An Inactive alert may be disabled which causes it to transition to the Disabled state New alerts are created in the Inactive State Active An Active alert is an alarm or warning where the condition to trigger the alert has been met and is still present and the operator has not accepted the alert An active alert is indicated by a flashing indicator within the Alert Status Bar and on the Alerts Screen Also annunciators that are programmed to sound when this alert is active will be sounding during this state and any e mail messages that are programmed to be sent for this alert will be sent when this state is entered An active alert can be accepted by the user causing it to become an Accepted Alert or disabled by the user causing it to become a Disabled Alert H the condition causing the alert is rectified the alert transitions to the Awaiting Cancel state Revision 3 6 3 Page 257 Maretran Accepted An Accepted alert is an alarm
149. ator Light Component Example Revision 3 6 3 Page 155 Maretran 9 5 18 Indicator Beam There are 5 Indicator Beam Components Up Left Right Down Circle Each of these has similar functionality to the Indicator Light with the following additions The available colors for the beam includes None as an option This allows the beam to be programmed to disappear completely in one or more of the indicator states The beams may be moved to overlap other components or each other to create more complex beam shapes This is an example of Indicator Beams being used to show navigation lights Revision 3 6 3 Page 156 Maretron Revision 3 6 3 Page 157 Maretran 9 5 19 Line Graph Depth Graph Indicator Graph The line graph component emulates a traditional pen line graph plotter The depth graph is similar but has the lowest values at the top and the line is replaced with a solid area below the values The Indicator Graph shows the history of Indicator state The line graph and depth graph components plot values of the monitored parameter over time with the most recent values appearing on the extreme right edge of the graph and older values appearing farther to the left For ranges 10 minutes and less a red line will show the values sampled from the database every 1 second For ranges 30 minutes and greater a red line will show the average of the samples taken from the database for the sample period shown in t
150. ave selected is of the Rudder Angle type then the required major divisions should be entered here Each major division is labeled with a value Moving the cursor off the field will update the Preview 9 4 10 18 13 Averaging Period Averaging Period og min sec max 10 00 Any data stream may be averaged before being displayed This is done using a moving average filter over the period specified Entering a value of 0 seconds disables the filter Averaging data filters out short term fluctuations which can be distracting For angular values an angular average is used e g The average of 10 and 340 is 355 not 175 9 4 10 18 14 Hold Min Max Values Bi Hold Min Value Bi Hold Max Value Revision 3 6 3 Page 129 Maretron On some controls extra needles have been added to show the extents of the needle movement These are the min max marks Typically they are blue for the minimum value and red for the maximum value but on controls where the min and max cannot be strictly applied both are red and there is only a single check Outside Temperature box in the editor The marks may be brought back to the current needle position by pressing the Reset button located to the bottom left of the control o 2 D Q E o 9 4 10 18 15 Color Bands Color Bands Gauges may have color bands drawn on them Fields are provided for a low red range a low yellow range a green range a high yellow
151. avorite screens eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeea 123 9 4 10 17 Resizing Components on Favorite screens eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeea 123 94 10 18 Component EOF segetegtrgegeteeiegerhtegeteeteegeeeteE geed gedetedeedebeggegen gt 124 GE a br TC ME 125 210182 Ths 125 EE EE OE eroi eri rna nri ipeni ni 125 9 4 10 18 4 Component Type prv7429e eee RK 125 2 Pe ET eeren eee 126 BA TOTES SOUCO ecsdesasilosascsilodisnsin ubetlnbaisesstinbabetsibnbaisesstenbabesienbaisestinbtedionde 126 9 4 10 18 7 FE ee eee kes 126 E Dr d RTE e 127 9 4 10 18 9 STANCES oo csctesctsccdercdensesotiecladsdensdeoed eosdeped added ened ed edda rd mnddendet 127 9 4 10 18 10 Channel Circuit Breaker 000000noanneeaneeeennnnennne ennenen 128 9 4 10 18 11 Minimum and Maximum Values 000000aaaaaaaeeeeeeenneene neee 128 94101812 Major and Minor DIVISIONS wiisiccciensccsanexinexesenanentacpneneinnxbeonanevane 129 94101813 Averaging Period wascccscccccinzivastnsciooneainasswagsideecatinackwaduesuestide 129 9 4 10 18 14 Hold Min Max Values rrrrrrrnrnrnrrrrrrrrnrrrnrrrrrrrrrrrrrrsrrrsrrrnnnnnn 129 94101815 ee 130 Revision 3 6 3 Page 6 Maretran 94101816 Indicator e 131 9 4 10 18 17 Counter EENG 132 9 5 Available Component Types rrrrnnnnrnnnnnnrrrrrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnernnnnrrrnnnnneenennn 133 951 Analog Ke e 133 52 Anchor Ipea 134 95 3 Attitude e ee EE 137 9 54 Te E 138 9 5 5 Borderless E 140 JEG VAN 141 95 7 Gel Breaker E 142 9 5
152. ayed which will display information about N2KView including its version number and serial number both of which are necessary in the event you need to contact Maretron for technical support Press the OK button to close the dialog box A screenshot of the About Dialog is shown below KC EI About bird Tachometer Maretron N2KView Vessel Monitoring and Control System Software Version 3 6 2 20130603 N2KServer Version IPG100 3 6 1 Hardware License Key Number 527 Licenses Bought Base 5 Alerts 5 Fuel Management 5 Video 5 Control 5 Licenses Used Base 1 Alerts 1 Fuel Management 1 Video 0 Control 1 Copyrights N2KView Copyright 2013 Maretron LLP Adobe AIR Copyright 2007 2008 Adobe Systems Incorporated All Rights Reserved Adobe and Adobe AIR are either trademarks or registered trademarks in the United States and or other countries Figure 32 About Dialog If connected to an N2KServer the version number of the N2KServer or IPG100 will also be shown in the dialog The Show Diagnostics button will enable you to display extra diagnostic information should Maretron support request it This is the same screen that is displayed when the F12 button on the keyboard is pressed e g to trace email connection problems in section 9 4 5 2 7 Revision 3 6 3 Page 90 Maretran 9 4 3 Change Password Dialog Pressing Ctrl and P is a shortcut to display the Change Password Dialo
153. based on the Screens Setup Dialog On the left is the list of screens and selecting a screen will display the contents of that screen The switchable components in the screen may be selected by clicking with the mouse at which point they are surrounded with a yellow square Other components may not be selected When a switchable component is selected the three buttons at the bottom of the screen are enabled Revision 3 6 3 Page 362 rc N2KView Helm Lockout Engines Environment A C Power Heading Ice Maker Security DC Power Video Air Conditioner Load Shedding New Screen New Screen Security DCR 1 OFFI on DCR 2 Office Light OFF YON T A Lab Light OFF ON MOORED Once a breaker has been selected it may be LOCKED or UNLOCKED by pressing one of the buttons at the bottom of the screen Pressing Lock On will UNLOCK the breaker move it to the ON position and then LOCK it again Pressing Lock Off will UNLOCK the breaker move it to the OFF position and then LOCK it again Pressing Unlock will UNLOCK the breaker leaving it in its current state To exit the Breaker Lockout dialog press the Close button at the bottom left Revision 3 6 3 Page 363 Maretran 12 Load Shedding AC Power is a limited resource on a boat even more so when connected to a shore supply with limited current Load shedding enables the automated switching off of predetermined circuits such a
154. ches mercury kilopascals millimeters mercury Instances 253 9 6 20 2 Compressed Air Pressure Displays the pressure from a pressure sensor set up with a source of Compressed Air Component Types Gauge Vacuum Gauge Bar Graph Line Graph Digital Units bars millibars inches mercury kilopascals millimeters mercury Instances 253 9 6 20 3 Engine Boost Pressure Displays the Engine Boost Pressure from an Engine Component Types Gauge Vacuum Gauge Bar Graph Line Graph Digital Units bars millibars inches mercury kilopascals millimeters mercury Instances 253 9 6 20 4 Engine Coolant Pressure Displays the Engine Coolant Pressure from an Engine Revision 3 6 3 Page 233 Maretron Component Types Gauge Vacuum Gauge Bar Graph Line Graph Digital Units bars millibars inches mercury kilopascals millimeters mercury Instances 253 9 6 20 5 Engine Fuel Pressure Displays the Fuel Pressure from an Engine Component Types Gauge Vacuum Gauge Bar Graph Line Graph Digital Units bars millibars inches mercury kilopascals millimeters mercury Instances 253 9 6 20 6 Engine Oil Pressure Displays the Oil Pressure from an Engine Component Types Gauge Vacuum Gauge Bar Graph Line Graph Digital Units bars millibars inches mercury kilopascals millimeters mercury Instances 253 9 6 20 7 Hydraulic Oil Pressure Displays the pressure from a pressure sensor set up with a source of Hydraul
155. cing Revision 3 6 3 Page 78 Maretran 8 9 1 1 Device Instancing The device instance is an eight bit value ranging between 0 and 255 that every NMEA 2000 device transmits when it joins the bus and upon request thereafter This becomes important when you have multiple devices that transmit the same data It is possible for example to have two GPS antennas on a vessel with one serving as a primary antenna and others serving as backups If this is so the NMEA 2000 standard requires that the two different antennas have two different device instances If you are using a certified NMEA 2000 product the NMEA 2000 standard requires that a user be able to program the device instance in each product Consult the device documentation or contact your device manufacturer in order to determine how to program the instance into a particular device 8 9 1 2 Data Instancing Certain NMEA messages such as those from batteries tanks engines and transmissions have data instances embedded in the messages These data instances are used if programmed to relate data to specific data sources Data instances are also required by the NMEA 2000 standard to be field programmable so please consult your device s documentation for details on how to program this value In order to support plug and play operation if N2KView receives the same data from multiple devices that have the same device instance programmed it will lock on to the first
156. cisdioincstucdedevedstwobiabicontiadidubesaptdwentensdabbbuliaunniaoadethietiweriestbadtiubeieesibiiness 42 6 1 Unpack Et eenegen ket 42 6 2 Install nn Lura eres 42 FEE EEE EE e Ee aan ENE 42 6 4 Ru NEE ee dee Eeer 49 65 Jee 52 WE E e Cameras saved 62 6 7 FN 63 Se 1908 EE 67 6 8 1 Favorite Screen Tabs Laugen 67 6 8 2 Commands amp Settings VAD mesemmgeseedeemnmeidenejenmmidadepssndenkar 67 Upgrading A saaspdspeddkeke eee ee 68 7 1 ue 68 7 2 Manual leede eege 68 General COnc pts are 70 8 1 Client Server Architecture AAA 70 8 1 1 Examples of NMEA 20000 Client Server Architectures rrrrrrrrnrrrrnnnn 71 8 22 TCP IP Ee EE 74 8 3 NAT Network Address Translapon ENEE 74 8 4 PAT Port Address Translation unn 75 8 5 Static and Dynamic IP Addressing c ceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeeees 75 8 6 Software Firewall Configuration EE 76 8 7 Data Security and FPE Gen 76 8 8 Using Maretron s Cloud Server cccccccccccieeeveseseeeversienenesenenerersienenereneeerenseenenenenee 77 8 9 NMEA 2000 Considerations ononnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnernnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnn 78 SE e EE NN oE 78 8 9 1 1 Device lInstancing EE 79 8 9 1 2 Data Instancing E 79 892 Data Source TYPOS Zeg ageet EENEG 79 8 9 3 Sensor Selection nrrrnnnovrnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnennnervnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnne 79 NZ VIEW EEE EE EE EE Ee E EEr e SETE 81 9 1 General Concepts snra AAEE E AE 81 9 1 1
157. de Radius Alert Clear If the alert is active and the distance between the current GPS position and the reference position rises above the value in this field the alert will become inactive Clear Delay The distance between the current GPS position and the reference position must rise above the Inside Radius Alert Clear value for longer than the time in this field in order for an alert to become inactive Latitude The latitude of the reference position This may be typed in as lt degrees gt lt minutes gt followed by an N or S If the N or S is missing North is assumed Moving the cursor to another field will reformat the contents of this field Longitude The longitude of the reference position This may be typed in as lt degrees gt lt minutes gt followed by an E or W If the E or W is missing East is assumed Moving the cursor to another field will reformat the contents of this field Get Current Position Pressing or clicking on this button will transfer the current GPS position into the Latitude and Longitude fields 10 3 6 4 11 GPS Quality Alert The accuracy or quality of a position fix provided by a GPS is dependent on the number of satellites used to compute the position position based on less than three satellites is considered a 1D lock three satellites is a 2D lock more than three satellites is a 3D lock and more than three satellites with SBAS is a 3D DGPS lock These diff
158. dobe AIR Windows Internet Explorer IT http get adobe com air 2pramoid BUIGQ We Be Di adobe Adobe AIR Ch eh pg G Tools Your account E Contact United States Change Games ra AI Solutions Products Support Communities Adobe Company Downloads Store Adobe AIR Download the latest version of Adobe AIR Adobe AIR enables you to have your favorite web applications with you all the time Adobe AIR 1 5 3 9130 Installer Windows English 15 12 MB Different operating system Learn more System requirements Distribute Adobe AIR By clicking the Download Now button you agree to the Software License Agreement Notice that a second dialog has been opened Revision 3 6 3 Page 53 Maretron jJ Please Download and Install AIR from the Adobe website Press OK when AIR is installed Cancel Do not press the OK button in this dialog until AIR has been completely installed Press the Download Now button in the Adobe web page When the download is complete you will see the following dialog Internet Explorer Security Warning Do you want to run this software Name Adobe AIR 1 5 3 Publisher Adobe Systems Incorporated more options bent Run While Files From the Internet can be useful this file type can potentially harm your computer Only run software from publishers you trust What s the risk Press Run to start installing Adobe AIR Installing Adobe AIR Adob
159. documentation for details Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Instances 253 9 6 10 3 Comm Error Generally indicates some condition relative to engine communications that requires investigation Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Instances 253 9 6 10 4 Cranking Generally indicates that the starter on the engine is engaged Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 208 Maretran 9 6 10 5 EGR System Generally indicates a fault in the exhaust gas recirculation EGR system Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Instances 253 9 6 10 6 Emergency Stop Generally indicates that the engine was stopped using an emergency stop button Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Instances 253 9 6 10 7 High Boost Generally indicates that the supercharger turbocharger boost pressure has exceeded some engin
160. down pointing arrow to the right of the control and then select the unit from the list The preview will be updated with the unit selected In some cases only a single Unit will be available 9 4 10 18 6 Source Fuel Port Fuel Fresh Water Port Fresh Water Waste Water Port Waste Water Live Well oil Black Water Black Water On parameters that have multiple sources such as tanks this field allows to select the source of the data If label data is present on the bus for this parameter it will be appended to the source name in parenthesis This field may not always be present 9 4 10 18 7 Reference KOG Apparent Wind Direction Ground Ref Wind Direction True Wind Direction If the parameter supports multiple references the Reference field will be displayed This is a drop down list containing the set of available data references Revision 3 6 3 Page 126 Maretron for the parameter Select the desired Reference by pressing on the down pointing arrow to the right of the control and then select the Reference from the list The preview will be updated with the Reference selected 9 4 10 18 8 Instance Instance 3 DC Panel Helm v a Any 0 Upper Deck Alarms kend 1 Lower Deck Alarms 2 Miscellaneous 4 DC Panel Engine Room 5 AC Panel Galley 6 AC Panel Bridge 7 AC Panel Forepeak If more than one instance of the selected parameter can appear on the system the
161. e Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 8 15 Tilt Trim Monitors the tilt or trim of the drive Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 8 16 Trip Fuel Used Monitors the fuel used since the last reset Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 326 Maretron 10 4 8 17 Voltage Monitors the electrical power supply voltage measured at the engine Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 9 Engine Warning 10 4 9 1 Charge Generally indicates a fault in the engine s charging system Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 9 2 Check Engine Generally indicates some condition in the engine that requires investigation Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 9 3 Comm Error Generally indicates some condition relative to engine communications that requires investigation Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 9 4 Cranking Generally indicates that the starter on the engine is engaged Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentati
162. e Digital Units kilometers hour knots miles hour Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 224 Maretran 9 6 14 Heading 9 6 14 1 Heading Displays the current heading of the vessel the direction the vessel is pointing relative to true or magnetic north depending on the unit setting of the heading parameter see Section 9 4 8 3 2 on page 114 Component Types North Up Rose Course Up Rose Cardinal Digital Units Degrees True Degrees Magnetic depends on Global Settings in Units Setup tab Instances 253 9 6 14 2 Rate of Turn Displays the rate at which the heading is changing Component Types Digital Gauge Line Graph Units Degrees Minute Degrees Second Instances 253 9 6 14 3 Variation Displays the magnetic variation used to convert between true and magnetic headings Component Types Digital Units degrees When displayed the units will be appended with the method by which the variation was obtained e g Manually Calculated from WMM 2010 tables Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 225 Maretran 9 6 15 Humidity See Environment section 9 6 11 for a Humidity details 9 6 16 Ice Makers 9 6 16 1 Eskimo This component displays the status of an Eskimo Ice Maker on the system Component Types Ice Maker Instances 253 This would be the instance of the J2K100 bridge to which the Ice Maker is connected 9 6 17 Indicator 9 6 17 1 Hardware Counter Maretron s SIM100 RIM100 and DCR100 are now
163. e AIR Setup Adobe AIR Pol Installer Setu s installer w ADOBE SYSTEMS INCORPORATED Warranty Disdaimer and Software License Agreement PART I WARRANTY DISCLAIMER THE SOFTWARE AND OTHER INFO Agree Cancel When AIR is completely installed you will see the following dialog Revision 3 6 3 Page 54 Maretron Adobe AIR Setup Adobe AIR Po Installation completed Adobe AIR has been successfully installed Finish Press Finish N2K View Installer j5 Setup Maretron N2KView Installer Welcome to the Maretron N2KView Installer Setup Wizard This will install Maretron N2KView Installer 3 4 on your computer It is recommended that you close all other applications before continuing Click Next to continue or Cancel to exit Setup Figure 12 N2KView Installation Wizard Welcome Page The License Agreement screen will be shown next Please read the license agreement carefully If you agree with the terms of the license agreement please select I accept the agreement and then click Next gt to continue the installation If you select I do not accept the agreement the installer will terminate without installing the software Revision 3 6 3 Page 55 Maretron 15 Setup Maretron N2KView Installer License Agreement Please read the following important information before continuing Please read the following License Agreement You must accept the terms of this
164. e Clear Delay field the alert will become inactive 10 3 6 4 12 Direction Alert A Direction Alert is used to indicate that a heading or wind direction has changed from the reference direction more than a programmable amount For example once a heading has been established an alert can be generated if the heading Revision 3 6 3 Page 290 Maretron changes more than a specified amount Direction Alerts may also be set for wind direction The reference direction can be selected from the current direction heading or wind direction or it can be manually entered Direction Alert Parameters Direction Alert transitions to the Active state after Set Delay seconds Direction Alert transitions to the Awaiting Cancel state after Clear Delay seconds Operator Cancels i Alert Absolute Angle from Reference Direction Figure 116 Direction Alert Parameters Trigger Configuration Accept Re trigger Period amp Minutes Seconds Offset Heading Set Point degrees Set Delay Minutes Seconds Offset Heading Clear Point degrees Clear Delay Minutes Seconds Reference Direction degrees Figure 117 Trigger Configuration Direction Alert Accept Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If the condition which caused the alert remains true after the amount of Revision 3 6 3 Page 291 Maretron time
165. e N2KView System is offered as a base package corresponding to the original Standard Edition plus a number of optional modules that extend the base package to give the added functionality required Purchasing all the optional modules gives the same functionality as the original Platinum Edition This additional functionality consists of the following modules Video Display This enables N2KView to display video from Axis Ethernet cameras on the same screens as other Maretron controls Fuel Management This enables N2KView to display information which requires a combination of data from different sensors for fuel management such as Time to Empty at current Speed Distance to Empty or Fuel Economy Control This enables N2KVlew to control equipment such as breakers switches air conditioners ice makers and water makers Without this option N2KView is limited to only monitoring these devices Alerts Management This enables users to use N2KView to monitor values and automatically take an action such as sounding an annunciator or sending an email when the value exceeds a threshold When combined with the control module the alert may open or close a switch to control another piece of equipment on the vessel such as light or pump In version 2 6 the following functionality was added The categories for AC parameters have been revised and condensed to 3 to reduce the size of the top level menu entries The Alert Protocol has been c
166. e N2KView client If the configuration was saved to N2KServer with the background images available from version 3 6 0 the configuration will be retrieved from the server with the background images and saved together The download progress of each file will be reported in a progress bar When all the background images and the configuration file have been transferred a warning dialog will be displayed requiring the user to OK replacing the configuration Warning WARNING Pressing OK vill result in the current configuration being replaced by the configuration in the chosen file All the Alerts monitored in the existing configuration will be replaced by the alerts in the new configuration Press the Delete button to delete a configuration from the Server If background images were saved with the configuration they will be deletes as well The Get Configuration and Delete buttons will only be enabled if a connection to the server is established 9 4 7 Save Configuration Dialog The Save Configuration Dialog is the way to save the current configuration either to the local file system or to N2KServer A screenshot of the Save Configuration Dialog is shown below Revision 3 6 3 Page 109 Maretron Save Configuration x Save Configuration To Disk Save Configuration To Server Mo_cloud demo_ Send Configuration Close Figure 37 Save Configuration Dialog There are two options to save the current configuration 9
167. e and disable groups of alerts A lerts Setup Dialog Alert Op g Mode Disabled Moored Anchored _ Remote Alerts Play Computer Sound Underway User1 User2 _ Only show alerts active in chosen mode Depth Water Depth includes offset 0 Low Aler Depth Low Indicator Status 2 On Alert hello Vessel Data Recorder VDR Status 0 Data Unava VDR not recording GPS Lat Lon 0 Data Unavailable Alert No GPS Position Time Date Time 0 Time Alert 10 min flasher Time Date Time 0 Time Alert 5 min flasher Time Date Time 0 Time Alert Evening Figure 96 Alert Setup Dialog Alert Operating Mode In this section you may select the vessel s operating mode from one of the following choices e Disabled This selection disables all alerts on the vessel No alerts will be generated for any reason e Moored This selection sets the vessel s operating mode to Moored All alerts which are enabled in Moored mode will be enabled All other alerts will be disabled e Anchored This selection sets the vessel s operating mode to Anchored All alerts which are enabled in Anchored mode will be enabled All other alerts will be disabled e Underway This selection sets the vessel s operating mode to Underway All alerts which are enabled in Underway mode will be enabled All other alerts will be disabled Revision 3 6 3 Page 265 Maretran User 1 Th
168. e defined limit Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Instances 253 9 6 10 8 Low Coolant Level Generally indicates that the level of coolant has fallen below some engine defined limit Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 209 Maretran 9 6 10 9 Low Fuel Pressure Generally indicates that the fuel pressure has fallen below some engine defined limit Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Instances 253 9 6 10 10 Low Oil Level Generally indicates that the oil level has fallen below some user defined limit Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Instances 253 9 6 10 11 Low Oil Pressure Generally indicates that the oil pressure has fallen below some user defined limit Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Instances 253 9 6 10 12
169. e engine manufacturer s documentation for details Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 9 16 Power Reduction Generally indicates that the engine is operating in a reduced power mode due to some fault condition Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 9 17 Preheat Generally indicates that the cylinder preheaters are active Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 9 18 Rev Limit Exceeded Generally indicates that the engine s RPM has exceeded some engine defined limit Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Data Unavailable Alert Revision 3 6 3 Page 330 Maretron Instances 253 10 4 9 19 Shutting Down Generally indicates that the engine is in the process of shutting down Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 9 20 Sub Secondary Throttle Generally indicates that the engine has fallen back to a secondary throttle due to some fault detected in the primary throttle Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Data Unavailable Aler
170. e set to nothing to remove the overlay Revision 3 6 3 Page 178 Maretran 9 5 31 Watermaker N2KView can display data sent over the NMEA2000 bus by a Sea Recovery Watermaker equipped with an NMEA2000 interface With the licensing of the Control Module the watermaker may also be commanded to Stop Start and start a Flush cycle Composite Status Operation State Pre Filter Pres Pre Filter 123 psi OK Running Post Filter Pres Production Rate 120 psi 343 Operation Pres Operation galusyn 118 psi Error Salinity Status Filter Status System Status OK OK Error Stop Start Flush Figure 87 Watermaker Component Example Because the Emergency Stop cannot be restarted remotely this action requires a second step to prevent accidental activation The following confirmation message is displayed in the center of the component for 3 seconds Composite Status Operation State Pre Filter Pres Pre Fitter D 89 9 psi OK Confirm Stop REUKGIE Salinity Status Filter Status System Status OK OK Error Stop Start Flush Figure 88 Watermaker with request for Confirmation Revision 3 6 3 Page 179 Maretron If the user presses the confirm button the command will be sent to the watermaker If after 3 seconds the button has not been pressed it will be erased and no command will be sent Sending a command will not change any of the displayed parameter
171. e sure that any routers between the N2KServer and the internet are configured to forward incoming connections on port 6544 to the N2KServer computer Only certain digital components Make sure that you have the proper display dashes for data or certain transducers on the NMEA 2000 network gauge indicators are at the end and that the transducers are properly stop peg programmed with the right source type and instance number if applicable Check the Windows Event Log Applications Log section for any warning or error messages that N2KServer Windows Service may have written there N2KServer reports that the Contact Maretron to receive a firmware version of firmware in the upgrade for your USB100 USB100 is not high enough to run N2KServer Revision 3 6 3 Page 397 Maretran Select the Connections tab and open the N2KView works correctly for a Connections window Press the Connect period of time but sometimes button and look at the Connection Status stops displaying data all digital message for suggestions as to how to components display dashes for solve the problem data and gauge component indicators are at the end stop or Check that the N2KServer Windows peg Service is still running by using the N2KServer Service Manager Check that the N2KServer computer is powered on Check that the NMEA 2000 network connected to the N2KServer computer is powered on Check to make sure you are running the most recent version
172. e whether the alert will appear only on the instance of N2KView where it is defined Local or on all instances of N2KView on the network with an Alerts License Global 10 3 6 1 4 Description mm ES You may type here a text description of the alert This Description will be displayed on the Alarm Status Bar as a label for the alert and will also appear in the description column on the Alerts Screen This field must be filled in 10 3 6 1 5 Location x You may type here a location of the alert This location will be displayed on the Alarm Status Bar as part of the label for the alert and will also appear in the Location column on the Alerts Screen This field is optional Revision 3 6 3 Page 269 Maretron 10 3 6 1 6 Source Fuel Port Fuel Fresh Water Port Fresh Water Waste Water Port Waste Water Live Well oil Black Water Black Water On parameters that have multiple sources such as tanks this field allows to select the source of the data If label data is present on the bus for this parameter it will be appended to the source name in parenthesis This field may not always be present 10 3 6 1 7 Reference Reference Ground True On parameters that have multiple references such as wind this field allows to select the reference of the data This field may not always be present 10 3 6 1 8 Indicators Circuit Breakers W I Channel 1 Fire Fly Bridge Channel 2 CO Fly Bridge
173. earlier versions of USB100 drivers but will not automatically recover when NMEA 2000 power is lost or when the USB gateway is unplugged from the computer and then plugged in again Mouse Keyboard Alternatively N2KServer can be bought included in an IPG100 which will connect to the NMEA2000 bus directly Revision 3 6 3 Page 38 Maretron N2KView System Features Provides monitoring of a wide variety of NMEA 2000 data see section 9 6 for a complete list of available data types e AC Bus Parameters Average and Phase specific AC Generator Parameters Average and Phase specific AC Utility Parameters Average and Phase specific Air Conditioners to control Air Conditioners requires a compatible Air Conditioner and an N2KView Control Module Anchor Watch DC Depth Electrical Distribution to control Breakers requires a compatible breaker and an N2KView Control Module Engine Engine Warning Environment Fuel Management requires N2KView Fuel Management Module GPS Heading Humidity Ice Makers to control Ice Makers requires a compatible Ice Maker and an N2KView Control Module Indicators Navigation Pressure Vacuum Rudder Speed Distance Switch to control Switches requires a compatible breaker and an N2KView Control Module Tank Temperature Text Time Date Transmission Transmission Warning Vessel Video requires an N2KView Video Module Watermakers to control Watermakers requires a compatible
174. eck the boxs labeled Show Inactive or Show Disabled at the top of the Alert Status Screen to show inactive and disabled alerts in addition to the alerts normally shown The columns of the table may be resized by grabbing the bar to the right of the column heading and dragging it to the desired position Pressing or clicking on the column heading will sort the entries in the table in either increasing or decreasing order of the column chosen A small arrow to the right of the column heading shows which column contains the sort order and whether it is increasing or decreasing An up arrow shows that the column is sorted in increasing order You cannot sort on the Action Column the Edit Column or the What Happened column Revision 3 6 3 Page 262 Maretran Figure 95 Column Sort Indicator The rows in the table are colored and flash or remain solid in color according to the state of the alert described by the row Please refer to Section 10 3 1 fora description of how the appearance of the row changes with the alert state Action This column shows what action you may take for the alert If the alert is Active the entry in this column will read Accept Clicking on the word Accept will cause the alert to become an Accepted Alert If the alert is an Accepted Alert there will be no entry in this column If the alert is an Awaiting Cancel Alert the entry in this column will read Cancel Clicking on the
175. ed on the Alert Status Screen in the What Happened column 10 2 5 1 Available Alert Classes N2KView has several classes of alerts Different alert classes are available depending on the parameter for which an alert is being configured Low Alert The alert will become active if the monitored value drops below the value in this alert for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field High Alert The alert will become active if the monitored value rises above the value specified in this alert for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field Data Unavailable Alert The alert will become active if the monitored value is not received or is received but with a value of Data Not Available for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field On Alert The alert will become active if the monitored switch or flag becomes ON for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field Off Alert The alert will become active if the monitored switch or flag becomes OFF for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field Revision 3 6 3 Page 258 Maretron Tripped Alert The alert will become active if the monitored circuit breaker becomes Tripped for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field Disconnected Alert The alert will become active if the connection to the server is lost for more than the time specified in the Set Delay field Course Alert The
176. edited 238 Revision 3 6 3 Page 12 Maretran 9 6 23 4Total Capacity Ne 238 GENEE 239 9 6 25 6 Total Remaining E 239 9 6 24 Temperature EE 240 9 6 24 1 Bait EC RRE Lassenseumun mnvkonnjsjnesje 240 9 6 24 2Battery Temperature rnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnevnn 240 9 6 24 3 Dew Un E 240 9 6 24 4Engine Coolant Temperature rrnrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrnrnnnnnnnnerrnnnrrrrnnennennennn 240 9 6 24 5 Engine Oil Temperature EE 240 9 6 24 6 EE El e 240 9 6 24 7 Freezer Temperature lt mssssmidmeseisdnnsdveinnidesennndeviugmm kongene 241 9 6 24 8Heat le 241 9 6 24 9Heating System Temperature 241 9 6 24 10 Inside Temperature en 241 9 6 24 11 Live Well Temperature EE 241 9 6 24 12 Main Cabin Temperature 242 9 6 24 13 Outside Temperature EE 242 9 6 24 14 Refrigeration Temperature EE 242 9 6 24 15 Sea Temperature EE 242 9 6 24 16 Transmission Oil Temperature urrrrrrnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnnornnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnennn 243 9 6 24 17 User Defined nnn Temperature en 243 962418 Wind e UE 243 9623 e KE 244 KE pt ated need Sint ENAA EEEE denen edamame 244 9 6 26 TE DAG E 244 9 6 26 1 DAG eee ekte 244 9 6 26 2Local Time Offset eda 244 9 626 301000 Gu 244 0 2615 Aes 244 2026 SNE ete 245 96 266 TEE 245 9 6 26 7 Twilight MN 245 266 ST EE 245 96 27 nn EE 246 ERE JOE EE EEE RE 246 9 6 27 2 Transmission Oil Pressure een 246 9 6 27 3 Transmission Oil Temperature uuuusva4ummmnmansekvnjjlenie 246 9 6 28 Tran
177. efault shown enter it in the text box Click Next to continue Select Start Menu Folder Where should Setup place the program s shortcuts A Setup will create the program s shortcuts in the following Start Menu folder To continue click Next if you would like to select a different folder click Browse Maretron N2KView Browse Figure 15 N2KView Installation Wizard Select Start Menu Folder Page Revision 3 6 3 Page 57 Maretron 1 The Ready to Install screen will display next Please verify that all the information on this screen is as desired Click Next gt to continue J5 Setup Maretron N2KView Installer Ready to Install Setup is now ready to begin installing Maretron N2KView Installer on your computer Click Install to continue with the installation or click Back if you want to review or change any settings Destination location C Program Files Maretron N2K View Installer Start Menu folder Maretron N2KView goe Lag il Gm Figure 16 N2KView Installation Wizard Ready to Install Page m The Installing screen will display next and will show the progress of the installation Installing Please wait while Setup installs Maretron N2KView Installer on your computer Extracting files C Program Files Maretron N2KView Installer Maretron N2K View air Figure 17 N2KView Installation Wizard Installing Page Revision 3 6 3 Page 58 n We will no
178. eight which corresponds to the value of the parameter on the scale which appears immediately to the right of the bar Similar to the gauge component type a user can define different ranges of parameter values to appear different colors on the component In the case of the bar graph the filled region itself will change color between green yellow and red depending on which range the parameter value falls into Depending on the parameter you may also be able to modify the range of values appearing on the scale of the bar graph The user defined title of the bar graph appears vertically aligned on the left hand side of the bar graph The units of the parameter value being displayed appear at the bottom of the bar graph An example of a bar graph component is shown below E S LL D SA Q Be G Figure 49 Bar Graph Component Example Min Max markers may be added to a bar graph by clicking on a check box in the Component Editor These marks are associated with the control itself That Revision 3 6 3 Page 138 Maretron means that if two controls are displaying the same data each will maintain its own values for the min max marks and they can be reset independently 2 oO Ki on Figure 50 Bar Graph Example with Min Max Marks The min mark is a blue triangle to the right of the bar and is pushed upwards by the top of the bar The max mark is a red triangle just outside the3 co
179. el Consumption EA DE E 325 10 4 8 9Fuel Economy DIS NEE eutene eege tere eegen 325 104810 Fuel eegenen 325 ER NR e 325 104812 Percent Load EE 326 102813 Percent Te E 326 10 4 8 14 Tee asus 326 EE EE 326 10 4 8 16 Trip Fuel Keen dekade 326 10 4 8 17 VARE are 327 10 4 9 Engine Warning EE 327 1049 FANE 327 10 4 9 2Check Engine EE 327 TO AO SOM EERSTEN 327 10 4 9 4Cranking seit cece cia eege deed 327 1029 SEG SY EE 328 10 4 9 6Emergency SOP Lusredee deemed ei iaa ea Eaa 328 10 4 9 7 High BOOS isos sen se necedctenenetadeseactapecccadaptadond sotemeadcgtetarsaoseceadaseelvadnstenwuteds 328 10 4 9 8Low Coolant Level 328 10 4 9 9Low Fuel Pressure EEN 329 10 4 9 10 Low Oil Level seen 329 104911 Low Oil E 329 104912 Low System WEIER eege ee 329 10 4 9 13 Maintenance Needed ee 329 10 29 14 Neutral Start TEE 330 104 915 Over Temperature sic sresices tases cxenecesenndenes an anevied coesevndenecenedepedesederedevedeneds 330 104916 Power eege iegeez eegCgee be eege ege Eed Cde ege 330 10 4 9 17 Pave 330 10 4 9 18 Rev Limit Exceeded AAA 330 102919 Sh tting DOWN EE 331 10 4 9 20 Sub Secondary Throttle 331 104921 Throttle Position Sensor Luunmmmsrmneebjmnnnnem juni njeudtijnndedar 331 102922 Warning WOVEN EE 331 102498 Warning Level 2 eee 331 10 4 9 24 Water Eegeregie eege beet eeedien 332 1425 W erlbFieluumusesmsmmmmemde mjsdbdsieddnovoe 332 10 4 10 en 333 102101 B t Well Temper Ue uuvaseevmvasnemmuvvhhennnpanendde 333 10 4 10 2 Barom
180. ement appear in the lower right of the component A reset button allows the counter to be reset Digital counter components are square in aspect ratio take the same number of grids in height as they do in width An example of a digital counter component is shown below 0 Since Jan 19 2011 19 08 23 Figure 55 Digital Counter Component Example When configuring the component you may select whether the transitions to be counted are to the Off On or Error states Revision 3 6 3 Page 146 Maretran 9 5 11 Dometic Air Conditioning Heating The MarineAir Elite and CruiseAir Q Logic Air Conditioning Controls manufactured by Dometic have CAN bus support through an optional J1939 connector With the insertion of a Maretron J2K100 J1939 to NMEA 2000 Gateway http www maretron com products j2k100 php the PGNs from the Air Conditioners may be transmitted to N2KView and displayed Each Air Conditioner will require a separate J2K100 Gateway With the licensing of the Control Module the Air Conditioner may also be controlled remotely While the component is visually designed to look like a Cabin Controller for the MarineAir Elite range it will display data from both the Elite and Q Logic Controllers using either Direct Expansion or Chilled Water and fitted with the optional CAN bus network adapter The following figure shows an Elite Air Conditioner with three fan speeds and set to Auto Mode The simultaneous display of Auto
181. ent Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units Amperes 9 6 2 2 Average Frequency Displays the average frequency of the AC power from a generator on all phases Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Hertz Instances 253 9 6 2 3 Average Line Line Voltage Displays the average line to line RMS voltage of the AC power from a generator Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Hertz Instances 253 9 6 2 4 Average Line Neutral Voltage Displays the average line to neutral RMS voltage of the AC power from a generator Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Hertz Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 184 Maretran 9 6 2 5 Phase A Apparent Power Displays the Apparent Power being drawn on Phase A from a generator Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units VA 9 6 2 6 Phase A Current Displays the AC RMS electrical current being sourced from a generator on phase A Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units Amperes 9 6 2 7 Phase A Frequency Displays the frequency of the AC power from a generator on phase A Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Hertz Instances 253 9 6 2 8 Phase A Line Neutral Voltage Displays the phase A to neutral RMS voltage of the AC power from a generator Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Hertz Instances 253 9 6 2 9 Phase A Power Factor Displays the Power
182. er If a label has been entered for the indicator the label will be appended to the indicator in parenthesis Select the desired indicator by pressing on the down pointing arrow to the right of the control and then select the indicator from the list The preview will be updated with the Channel or Circuit Breaker selected 9 4 10 18 11 Minimum and Maximum Values If you have selected a gauge component a bar graph component or a digital component with a parameter that has limits the minimum and maximum values of that parameter should be entered here In the case of the gauge component and the bar graph component the minimum and maximum values are used to specify the limits on the gauge or bar graph The minimum and maximum values are specified in the units displayed at the top of the page If the component you have selected is of the Rudder Angle type then the required maximum value should be entered here If the component is displaying a percentage then the limits will be fixed at 0 and 100 Revision 3 6 3 Page 128 Maretran 9 4 10 18 12 Major and Minor Divisions Oil Pressure If the component you have selected is of the gauge type then the required major and minor divisions should be entered here Each major division is labeled with a value and between the major divisions the minor divisions are smaller unlabeled tick marks In some cases the value in the Major Divisions field will be fixed If the component you h
183. er is open closed or tripped If you have licensed the Control Module and the circuit breaker panel supports remote switching then you will able to turn the breaker On and Off by clicking on the component If the breaker has been tripped you can reset it by turning it Off and then back On Component Types Circuit Breaker Switch Instances 253 Switches Per Instance 28 Revision 3 6 3 Page 203 Maretron 9 6 9 Engine 9 6 9 1 Engine Boost Pressure Displays the boost pressure of a supercharger or turbocharger Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units kilopascals bars pounds square inch Instances 253 9 6 9 2 Engine Coolant Pressure Displays the engine s water or coolant pressure Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units kilopascals bars pounds square inch Instances 253 9 6 9 3 Engine Coolant Temperature Displays the engine s water or coolant temperature Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units Degrees Centigrade Degrees Fahrenheit Instances 253 9 6 9 4 Engine Fuel Pressure Displays the pressure of the fuel for the engine Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units kilopascals bars pounds square inch Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 204 Maretron 9 6 9 5 Engine Oil Pressure Displays the engine s oil pressure Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units kilopascals bars pounds s
184. er might not be reachable afterwards If this happens it must be reset to the factory default settings The page at http lablaptop phx aiec com says The IP address for the AXIS 241Q Video Server has been changed To access the web pages use the new IP address h After pressing OK enter the IP address that you chose in the address field at the top of the page Revision 3 6 3 Page 411 Maretran amp System Options Advanced TCP IP Settings AXIS 241Q Video Server N File Edit View History Bookmarks Yahoo Tools Help C AY 100092 2 Most Visited 4 Getting Started N Latest Headlines The following screen will ask you to select your own password for root it was pass but now you will select your own If you forget this password you will still be able to see the video but will not be able to change any of the camera configuration parameters The server can be reset to factory defaults by pressing the recessed button on the front panel but then you will need to redo this whole procedure AXIS Configure Root Password User name root Password Confirm password The password for the pre configured administrator root must be changed before the product can be used If the password for root is lost the product must be reset to the factory default settings by pressing the button located in the product s casing Please see the user documentation fo
185. erent locks are indicative of the quality or accuracy of the given position with 1D having the lowest quality and 3D DGPS providing the highest quality The GPS Quality Alert is used to alert you if the quality of the position falls below a specified quality level Revision 3 6 3 Page 289 Maretran Trigger Configuration Accept Re trigger Period amp Minutes Seconds GPS Quality Alert Set Point Set Delay ME Minutes Seconds GPS Quality Alert Clear Clear Delay 0 05 Minutes Seconds Figure 115 Trigger Configuration GPS Quality Alert Accept Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If the condition which caused the alert remains true after the amount of time in this field the alert will return to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert If a value of 0 00 is entered then the alert will never re trigger GPS Quality Alert Set Point GPS Quality Alert Set Point Set Delay When the quality of the GPS fix becomes lower than the quality specified in this field for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field the alert will become active GPS Quality Alert Set Point Clear Delay If the alert is active and the quality of the GPS fix becomes higher than the quality specified in the GPS Quality Alert Set Point field for longer than the time specified in th
186. ert Units Hertz Instances 253 Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert 10 4 1 3 Average Line Neutral Voltage Monitors the average line to neutral RMS voltage of an AC bus across all phases Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Units Hertz Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 304 Maretron 10 4 1 4 Phase A Frequency Monitors the frequency of phase A of an AC bus Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Units Hertz Instances 253 10 4 1 5 Phase A Line Neutral Voltage Monitors the voltage between Phase A and Neutral of an AC bus Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Units Hertz Instances 253 10 4 1 6 Phase AB Line Line Voltage Monitors the voltage between Phase A and Phase B of an AC bus Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Units Hertz Instances 253 Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert 10 4 1 7 Phase B Frequency Monitors the frequency of phase B of an AC bus Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Units Hertz Instances 253 10 4 1 8 Phase B Line Neutral Voltage Monitors the voltage between Phase B and Neutral of an AC bus Revision 3 6 3 Page 305 Maretron Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Units Hertz Instances 253 10 4 1 9 Phase BC Line Line Voltage Monitors the voltage between Phase B and Phase C of an AC bus
187. ert Set value for longer than the time in this field in order for an alert to become active Anchor Watch Alert Clear If the alert is active and the distance between the current GPS position and the reference position falls below the value in this field the alert will become inactive Clear Delay The distance between the current GPS position and the reference position must fall below the Anchor Watch Alert Clear value for longer than the time in this field in order for an alert to become inactive Latitude The latitude of the reference position This may be typed in as lt degrees gt lt minutes gt followed by an N or S If the N or S is missing North is assumed Moving the cursor to another field will reformat the contents of this field For the Anchor Watch Alert this field may be left blank if the alert is disabled enabling the Alert to be created in advance of anchoring Revision 3 6 3 Page 287 Maretron Longitude The longitude of the reference position This may be typed in as lt degrees gt lt minutes gt followed by an E or W If the E or W is missing East is assumed Moving the cursor to another field will reformat the contents of this field For the Anchor Watch Alert this field may be left blank if the alert is disabled enabling the Alert to be created in advance of anchoring Get Current Position Pressing or clicking on this button will transfer the current GPS position into the Latitude and Longitude
188. ess or implied It does not cover any SOFTWARE which has been subjected to damage or abuse which has been altered or changed in any way or which is operated in a manner inconsistent with the instructions for use provided by Maretron Maretron is not responsible for problems caused by the interaction of the SOFTWARE with products manufactured by others or for problems arising from errors in the data or information provided by third parties including the other NMEA 2000 instruments Except for the limited warranty regarding the magnetic and or optical media this SOFTWARE is provided AS IS without warranty of any kind either express or implied including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and any which may arise from the course of performance course of dealing or usage of trade The limited warranty provided above is made to you if you a are registered with Maretron as a user of this SOFTWARE b have fully paid the required license fee c have fully complied with the terms of the license and d are the original licensed end user No warranty is made to any other person or entity The limited warranty provided above will be effective for a period of sixty 60 following your receipt of this SOFTWARE EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY STATED ABOVE MARETRON MAKES NO WARRANTY WHATSOEVER WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE OR ITS CAPABILITY VALIDITY ACCURACY OR RE
189. essing on it When selected a yellow border will be displayed around the component Then press the Edit button at the bottom of screen A screenshot of a selected component is shown below Port Tachometer Figure 41 Selected Component in Screens Setup Mode Pressing the Edit button on the bottom of the screen will open the Component Editor with all the parameters of the component chosen 9 4 10 12 Deleting Components from Favorite Screens To remove a component from a particular favorite screen select the component on the favorite screen by pressing on it When selected a yellow border will be displayed around the component Then press the Delete button at the bottom of screen or press the Delete button on the keyboard A dialog will be displayed asking you to confirm the delete action 9 4 10 13 Cutting Components from Favorite Screens To remove a component from a particular favorite screen and place iton the N2K View Clipboard select the component on the favorite screen by pressing on it When selected a yellow border will be displayed around the component Then press the Cut button at the bottom of screen or Ctrl X on the keyboard No confirmation dialog is displayed as this action may be undone by pasting the contents of the N2KView Clipboard back to the original position Revision 3 6 3 Page 122 Maretran 9 4 10 14 Copying Components from Favorite Screens To copy a component from a particular favorite screen t
190. etric Pressure 333 194105 Dew EE 333 10 4 10 4 Engine Room Temperature EEN 333 Revision 3 6 3 Page 18 Maretran 104105 le EIERE 333 102106 Inside King Aerer 334 10 4 10 7 Inside Temperature EEN 334 10 4 10 8 Live Well Temperature ee 334 102109 Main Cabin Teppeettt eegegegeieg eege NEEN E EeN Sek 334 10421010 Outside Humidity see egen 334 10 4 10 11 Outside Temperature EEN 335 10 4 10 12 Sea Temperature EE 335 10 4 10 13 User Defined nnn Humidity ENNEN 335 10 4 10 14 User Defined nnn Temperature AEN 335 121015 ee Ke UE 335 10 4 11 Fuel EE ebe Een 336 102111 Distance To Eeer 336 102112 Time to EMp y sasnssen cd cvegewrtetec ved cv cviesed cosened oddsene 337 10 4 11 3 Total Fuel Consumption Vol JDsl 337 10 4 11 4 Total Fuel Economy Dis Mol 337 10 4 11 5 Total Fuel Remaining EE 337 102116 Total Fuel LEVEL usa Keke EEN 338 10 4 11 7 Total Fuel Remaining EEN 338 104118 Total Trip Fuel USC EE 338 EEG EE EE aai 339 10 4 12 1 Course Over Ground 339 104122 GPS Status eieiei beetebuerg Eeefer igieen 339 19024125 Lat Lon E 339 10 4 12 4 Speed Over Ground EE 339 10413 MEAN DEE 340 GE REE 0 RR ETE 340 102132 Rate of TUTA E 340 10 4 13 3 Nee 340 10 4 14 HUMI E 341 10 4 14 1 Inside e Tune EE 341 104142 Outside ll e TEE 341 10 4 14 3 User Defined nnn Humidity ENEE 341 EE 342 10 4 15 1 StatUS kuene 342 10 4 16 N2KServer N2KView Connection rnnrnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrrnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnrrnnnnen 342 10 4 16 1 Cloud Server Data Hema
191. etron 12 6 Configuration Configuration of Load Shedding is done in the Load Shedding Dialog this is accessed through the Load Shedding button in the Commands amp Settings Dialog Figure 125 Load Shedding Dialog 12 6 1 General Each Load Shedding Group is enabled disabled using the Load Group Enabled check box at the top left The Delay Between Sheds determines how often the Load Shedding Algorithm runs H this figure is too small then the result of making a shed will not have enough time to be measured by the ACM100 and reported back and additional loads will be shed unnecessarily The system will become too responsive The currents reported by the Sources will be averaged over this period Revision 3 6 3 Page 367 Maretron NOTE Changes in the Load Shedding Dialog do NOT take effect until either the Apply or Save button is pressed Save will apply the changes and exit the dialog Cancel will exit the dialog without making any changes 12 6 2 Configuring Sources The top portion of the screen shows the Sources being monitored The Sources are labeled Source 0 Source 1 Source 2 and Source 3 If the Source has been set to an ACM100 and the ACM100 supplies a label the label on the control will be changed to that supplied by the ACM100 The Digital Control shows both the current reported by the ACM100 and the Load Shedding Current A dash for the Load Shedding Current implies that
192. g N2KView allows you to set a password to protect your configuration from inadvertent changes In order to set or change the password press the Password tab which will cause the Change Password dialog box to be displayed If you are entering a new configuration password leave the Old Password text box blank If you are changing a configuration password you must enter the existing password in the Old Password text box Enter the new desired password into the New Password text box and enter it again into the Repeat New Password text box If you wish to remove the configuration password simply leave the New Password and Repeat New Password text boxes blank Once you are satisfied with the values you have entered click the OK button to apply the changes you have made A screenshot of the Change Password dialog is shown below Change Password Old Password Repeat New Password Figure 33 Change Password Dialog Revision 3 6 3 Page 91 Maretron 9 4 4 Configuration Dialog Pressing the Configuration button causes the Configuration dialog to be displayed This window allows you to configure the parameters that are used in N2KView and if N2KView is running on the MBB100 or DSM800 it allows configuration of some system parameters A screenshot of the Configuration dialog showing the Configuration tab is shown below Configuration Configuration Label
193. ge 133 Maretran 9 5 2 Anchor Watch The Anchor Watch Component is a special type of gauge that graphically displays the parameters of the Anchor Watch Alert see 10 3 6 4 9 A button on the gauge allows the alert to be set or cleared from the control and when set will enter the current vessel position into the Anchor Watch Alert As you drop anchor push the button and you have an anchor watch in place An example of the Anchor Watch Component when the Alert is disabled is shown below g Radius 100 feet Figure 45 Disabled Anchor Alert Example Note that the area inside the circle is blank and the circle is grey The text on the button is Set When the button is pressed the Alert will be enabled and the current GPS position transferred to the Alert reference position In the following figure the Anchor Alert has been enabled We can now see an anchor symbol in the middle of the circle the text on the button has been changed to Clear and the position and heading of the vessel can be seen as a red ship symbol The radius of the Alert is displayed to the bottom right of the control If the graphic is referenced to magnetic north the word mag is displayed above the radius otherwise the word true is displayed Graphically the circle represents the radius of the alert Revision 3 6 3 Page 134 Maretron 2 mag Radius 100 feet Figure 46 Enabled Anchor Alert Example If heading is not availab
194. ge to a flashing red and series of dots on the right are displayed Figure 91 Over Full Alert Status Bar s Engine Room Active Alarms appear as flashing red indicators Clicking on this indicator will cause the alarm to become an Accepted Alarm and the indicator will change to solid red Accepted Alarms appear as solid red indicators Awaiting Cancel Alarms appear as dark indicators with a red border and an x on the right hand side of the indicator When you click on this indicator the alarm will become Inactive and will be removed from the Alert Status Bar Inactive Alarms and Disabled Alarms do not appear on the Alert Status Bar starter Bat vors Active Warnings appear as flashing yellow indicators Clicking on this indicator will cause the warning to become an Accepted Warning and the indicator will change to solid yellow Revision 3 6 3 Page 260 Maretran Accepted Warnings appear as solid yellow indicators EE Awaiting Cancel Warnings appear as dark indicators with a yellow border and an x on the right hand side of the indicator When you click on this indicator the alert will become inactive and the indicator will disappear from the Alert Status Bar Inactive Warnings and Disabled Warnings do not appear on the Alert Status Bar 10 3 2 Alerts Tab The Alerts Tab appears along the top of the N2KView main screen just as any other favorite screen tab except that the Alerts Tab always appears in the uppe
195. grade degrees Fahrenheit Instances 253 9 6 11 8 Live Well Temperature Displays the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Live Well Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units degrees Centigrade degrees Fahrenheit Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 215 Maretran 9 6 11 9 Main Cabin Temperature Displays the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Main Cabin Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units degrees Centigrade degrees Fahrenheit Instances 253 9 6 11 10 Moon Phase Displays the phase of the moon at the current time and date Component Types Moon Phase Display 9 6 11 11 Outside Humidity Displays the relative humidity from a humidity sensor set up with a source of Outside Component Types Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units Percent Instances 253 9 6 11 12 Outside Temperature Displays the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Outside Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units degrees Centigrade degrees Fahrenheit Instances 253 9 6 11 13 Sea Temperature Displays the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Sea Revision 3 6 3 Page 216 Maretron Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units degrees Centigrade degrees Fahrenheit Instances 253 9 6 11 14 Sunrise Displays the local time of
196. grees with intermediate tick marks at 10 degree intervals from 0 degrees at the top to 180 degrees at the bottom on both port and starboard sides The areas on the scale between 20 degrees and 60 degrees are colored red on the port side and green on the starboard side The wind speed appears in a small digital display in the lower part of the circular gauge A user defined title appears at the top of the component and the units of the wind speed measurement appear in the lower right hand corner of the component The wind angle component is square in aspect ratio that is a wind angle component that is four grids high will also be four grids tall An example of a wind angle component is shown below Apparent Wind 4 Figure 79 Wind Angle Component Example Min Max Markers may be added to a Wind Angle Component by clicking on a check box in the Component Editor The markers show the limits of the needle movement in either direction These marks are associated with the control itself That means that if two controls are displaying the same data each will maintain its own values for the min max marks and they can be reset independently Revision 3 6 3 Page 173 Maretran True Wind Figure 80 Wind Angle Component with Min Max Marks The marks are two red triangles just inside the gauge perimeter and are pushed left or right by the needle Should either mark be pushed all the way round to meet the other mark both m
197. gular basis you will want to keep N2KView upgraded to the latest version 7 1 Automatic Updates If your PC running N2KView TSM1330 TSM800 DSM800 or MBB100 has access to the Internet through the ship s computer network N2KView will check on each startup if a later version is available If you are ready for an update then you will asked if you want to update Follow the instructions given On the TSM800 TSM1330 DSM800 and MBB100 the system will restart about 6 minutes after the update is started Automatic updates may be disabled from the Configuration Dialog see 9 4 4 1 5 7 2 Manual Updates If you do not have access to the Internet your copy of N2KView will need to be upgraded manually You will need to load the upgrade files from the Maretron website onto a USB Flash Drive on a computer that does have Internet access and then insert the USB Flash Drive into the computer TSM800 TSM1330 MBB100 or DSM800 Contact Maretron Support to verify that the version numbers of the following files are the latest versions If you are running on a computer transfer the following files onto the ROOT of the USB memory stick lt http Awww maretron com files N2KView Maretron N2KView 3 6 3 20130719 air gt lt http www maretron com files N2KView n2kview update descriptor 2 5 xml gt If you are running on a TSM800 TSM1330 MBB100 or DSM800 transfer the following files onto the ROOT of the USB Flash Drive lt http www m
198. gure 10 N2KServer Installation Wizard Completion Page rrrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnr 49 Figure 11 N2KServer Service Manager Window rrrrnnrrnnnnnnnvrnnnnrnnnvrnnnnernvnnne 50 Figure 12 N2KView Installation Wizard Welcome Page rrrnrnrrvrvvnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnr 55 Figure 13 N2KView Installation Wizard License Agreement Page 00 000 56 Figure 14 N2KView Installation Wizard Select Destination Location Page 57 Figure 15 N2KView Installation Wizard Select Start Menu Folder Page 57 Figure 16 N2KView Installation Wizard Ready to Install Page ee 58 Figure 17 N2KView Installation Wizard Installing Page ornnnrrrrrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnr 58 Figure 18 N2KView Installation Green 59 Figure 19 Maretron N2KView Installation Wizard Completion Page 61 Figure 20 N2KView Startup Warning Screen cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 63 Figure 21 N2KView Window with Tabs Displayed eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 64 Figure 22 Connections Settings Dialog museene eleven 65 Figure 23 LAN Client Server Architecture Example with USB100 71 Figure 24 WAN Client Server Architecture Example through the Internet 72 Figure 25 LAN Client Server Architecture Example with IPG100 xxnnnnnnn 72 Figure 26 Single Client Connection to IPG100 rrrrrrnnvvrnnnnvnnvrrnnnrrnnvrnnrnrrnvrnn 73 Figure 27 WAN Client
199. h PTZ In the Demo version only an additional option is provided to look at a pre recorded video clip Sources Camera Sources are defined in the Camera Setup Screen and are selected from a list presented in the Component Editor 9 6 32 Watermakers 9 6 32 1 See Recovery This component displays the status of a Sea Recovery Watermaker on the system Revision 3 6 3 Page 251 Maretron Component Types Sea Recovery Status Instances 253 This would be the instance of the J2K100 bridge to which the Watermaker is connected Revision 3 6 3 Page 252 Maretran 9 6 33 Wind There are several different types of wind measurements They are described in the following section 9 6 33 1 Wind Direction Component Types Apparent Wind Angle Close Wind Angle Component Types Ground Digital Cardinal North Up Rose Component Types True Wind Angle References Apparent Ground True Units Beaufort kilometers hour nautical miles hour miles hour 9 6 33 1 1 Apparent Displays the angle and speed of the wind relative to the vessel center line as it appears to an observer on the deck of a moving vessel does not subtract out the speed of the vessel 9 6 33 1 2 Ground Displays the angle and speed of the wind relative to true or magnetic north depending on the unit setting of the heading parameter see Section 9 4 8 3 2 on page 114 for details relative to a stationary observer calculated using heading course ove
200. hanged to match the DSM250 Line Graphs have been extended to almost all the parameters with up to 4 days history being recorded and the short term sampling rate decreased to 1 second A special depth graph has been created for depth Revision 3 6 3 Page 30 Maretron Most controls have been extended by adding min max markers that can be reset from the screen without having to go into the configuration dialog Anchor watch alert and control has been added Negative values may now be entered for temperature alerts Version 3 0 is a complete re write to take advantage of better programming languages efficiency and stability Some new features are introduced as well including Saving Configuration Files to N2KServer Support for Dometic Ice Makers Support for Dometic Air Conditioners from their Elite and Cruisair Q Logic ranges Support for Sea Recovery Watermakers Better email support Sounding of the PC Speakers for Alerts Version 3 1 re organized the parameter definitions and categories to be in line with the other Maretron Products namely the DSM250 and N2KBuilder In addition the following bugs were corrected Rudder angle order scaling was incorrect at some scale values Alerts could not be silenced if alerts were globally disabled AC Utility Line Neutral Voltage was not able to be graphed Support for displaying values from Pressure PGNs Version 3 2 introduces the following new features Multi language support
201. he Server Password text box of the N2KServer to which you are connecting NOTE this is different from the configuration protection password which is changed using the Password tab 9 4 5 1 10 Use Maretron Cloud Services This checkbox must be enabled to attempt a connection to the Maretron Cloud Server 9 4 5 1 11 Username This is the username under which the Cloud Services agreement was signed 9 4 5 1 12 Password When the Cloud Service makes a connection with the N2KServer in the IPG100 it will require a password to access the server Please set this field to the same value as you entered in the N2KServer Password of the IPG100 to which you are connecting NOTE this is different from the configuration protection password which is changed using the Password tab 9 4 5 1 13 Optional Software License s to Check Out To use the full features of N2KView additional modules may be bought The licenses for these modules are stored in the key attached to N2KServer and must be checked out to enable their functionality If you require the use of this functionality in this copy of N2KView then check the corresponding box Not checking the box may enable other users access to those features Revision 3 6 3 Page 101 Maretron These boxes may only be changed when the N2KServer is disconnected 9 4 5 1 14 Disconnect Press this button to disconnect from the server and to return the license previously granted to the poo
202. he following table Behind the red line a brown area will show the minimum and maximum values sampled over that period Hovering over the graph will display a textual representation of whatever average minimum or maximum value the cursor is over The X axis scale denoting the age of the data appears at the bottom of the line graph and the range is specified below the component Up and down arrow buttons are used to change the range The following ranges are selectable Range Period 1 minute 1 second ae 1 second ee 1 second 30 1 minute minutes 1 hour 1 minute 4 hours 1 minute 8 hours 1 minute Revision 3 6 3 Page 158 Maretran 12 hours 1 minute 10 24 hours minutes 48 hours 10 2 days minutes 10 4 days minutes The Y axis scale denoting the value of the data appears at the right of the line graph The maximum and minimum values can be set in the editor While running the graph may be moved up and down by grabbing a number on the y axis and dragging it up or down or by double clicking a number on the y axis Clicking the top number will move it to the top of the display clicking the bottom number will move it to the bottom and clicking any other number will move it to the center The user defined title of the graph appears at the top of the line graph component while the units of the measured parameter value appear in the lower right ha
203. he screen is blanked The delay may be entered in seconds or in the minutes seconds format Revision 3 6 3 Page 96 Maretran 9 4 4 3 3 Screen Resolution When this dialog is started on the MBB100 N2KView queries the underlying operating system to determine what screen resolutions are available for the connected monitor The resultant list of screen resolutions are displayed here and one may be selected by the user 9 4 4 3 4 Screen Scan Rate This list allows the user to specify the required scan rate at which the monitor is to be configured In most cases the highest scan rate can be set but we have found one case where a specific lower value must be entered 9 4 4 3 5 Update Pressing this button will cause N2KView to exit update the Screen Parameters on the computer and then restart Revision 3 6 3 Page 97 Maretran 9 4 4 4 Pair Bluetooth Device Pair Bluetooth Device Pressing this button will cause N2KView to exit and start a separate program to pair Bluetooth devices mouse and keyboard with computer When the program is complete N2KView will restart In some cases the program can take a while up to a minute to start so be patient Note that the DSM800 has an internal Bluetooth receiver the MBB100 does not so a USB Bluetooth receiver must be purchased separately and plugged it 9 4 4 5 Calibrate Touch Screen Calibrate Touch Screen The following Touch Screen Drivers have been pre loaded onto the MB100 e eG
204. here is no limit as to the length of the text that is entered the resulting component may not show all the characters 9 4 10 18 3 Use Label Most Maretron devices are capable of being programmed to transmit a textual label to identify itself on the network If the Use Label box is checked then the component will display the received label instead of the title while the data is available If the label or the data is not received by N2KView the title will be displayed as entered in the Title field During editing the preview graphic will display the label if it is being received 9 4 10 18 4 Component Type Bar Graph Digital Line Graph The Component Type drop down list is a list of the component types available for the selected parameter Depending on the parameter you selected you will have choices of different component types to use to display the parameter Select the desired component type by pressing on the down pointing arrow to the right of the control and then select the component type from the list The preview will be updated with the component type selected In some cases only a single Component Type will be available Revision 3 6 3 Page 125 Maretron 9 4 10 18 5 Units The Units drop down list is a list of the units available for the selected parameter Depending on the parameter you selected you will have choices of different units to use to display the parameter Select the desired unit by pressing on the
205. his The title of the message is pre defined and will contain the description and location of the alarm as well as a description of the type of event N2KView can send an e mail notice when an alert becomes active or inactive N2K View creates a list of recipient email addresses by concatenating the addresses in the Use Default Address field with the list of addresses in the Use Additional Address es field for each Alert Either field may be blank This combination allows an efficient way of entering common email addresses while providing the flexibility of having each alert directed to specific users Most cell phone service providers allow short emails to be sent to cell phones as Text Messages Contact your cell phone provider to obtain the email address of your cell phone or visit http www ehow com how 4448927 send email cell phone html Revision 3 6 3 Page 298 Maretran Enable Email Transmission when Alert is Triggered This check box can be used to enable or disable the transmission of Email messages for this Alert when the Alert moves into the Active State When the box is checked the emails will be sent Enable Email Transmission when Alert is Cleared This check box can be used to enable or disable the transmission of Email messages for this Alert when the Alert moves into the Inactive or Awaiting Cancel States When the box is checked the emails will be sent Use Default Address When this box is checked the Default Em
206. ic Oil Component Types Gauge Vacuum Gauge Bar Graph Line Graph Digital Units bars millibars inches mercury kilopascals millimeters mercury Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 234 Maretron 9 6 20 8 Steam Pressure Displays the pressure from a pressure sensor set up with a source of Steam Component Types Gauge Vacuum Gauge Bar Graph Line Graph Digital Units bars millibars inches mercury kilopascals millimeters mercury Instances 253 9 6 20 9 Transmission Oil Pressure Displays the Oil Pressure from a Transmission Component Types Gauge Vacuum Gauge Bar Graph Line Graph Digital Units bars millibars inches mercury kilopascals millimeters mercury Instances 253 9 6 20 10 User Defined nnn Pressure Displays the pressure from a pressure sensor set up with a source of User Defined nnn where nnn is a number from 128 to 144 Component Types Gauge Vacuum Gauge Bar Graph Line Graph Digital Units bars millibars inches mercury kilopascals millimeters mercury Instances 253 9 6 20 11 Water Pressure Displays the pressure from a pressure sensor set up with a source of Water Component Types Gauge Vacuum Gauge Bar Graph Line Graph Digital Revision 3 6 3 Page 235 Maretran Units bars millibars inches mercury kilopascals millimeters mercury Instances 253 9 6 21 Rudder 9 6 21 1 Rudder Angle Displays the angle of the vessel s rudder as indicated b
207. ide will be four grids high An example of a course up rose component is shown below Degrees mag Figure 53 Course Up Rose Component Example Revision 3 6 3 Page 144 Maretran 9 5 9 Digital The digital component shows the value of the displayed parameter in a numeric format The value of the parameter is in the center of the component the user defined title appears at the top of the component and the units of the parameter measurement appear in the lower right of the component Digital components are square in aspect ratio take the same number of grids in height as they do in width Two examples of a digital component are shown below Wind Direction Wind Speed Degrees mag Figure 54 Digital Component Examples A Digital component may have an LED appearing at the bottom center of the component When configuring the component you may select the ranges of data for which the LED is illuminated green normal yellow warning or red fault Digital Controls for trip parameters will have a Reset button in the bottom left corner Revision 3 6 3 Page 145 Maretran 9 5 10 Digital Counter The digital counter component shows a count of the number of transitions of an indicator value since the counter was last reset The count is in the center of the component with the date and time of the last reset just below it the user defined title appears at the top of the component and the units of the parameter measur
208. in the Alarm Time field and thereafter after the intervals specified in the Repeat Interval field Server Disconnected Alert The alert will become active when the connection to N2KServer is lost and thereafter after the intervals specified in the Repeat Interval field 10 3 Viewing and Configuring Alerts This section describes the different ways in which alerts may be viewed and also the ways in which they can be created deleted and edited Revision 3 6 3 Page 259 Maretron 10 3 1 The Alert Status Bar The Alert Status Bar is a small part of the overall N2KView screen that is always present when the Alerts Module has been licensed and is shown along the entire bottom of the screen the Alert Status Bar is even present in authoring mode The Alert Status Bar shows the description and location of each alert within a text box In addition the vessel s operating mode appears at the extreme right hand side of the Alert Status Bar The alerts are displayed in a left to right order with more important alerts to the left Generally the order is Active and Accepted Alarms Active and Accepted Warnings Awaiting Cancel Alarms and Awaiting Cancel Warnings Within these groups alerts are ordered in increasing priority number An example of the Alert Status Bar is shown below Eichten Figure 90 Alert Status Bar Should more alerts be displayed than can fit on the Alert Status Bar the border of the Alert Status Bar will chan
209. ine Graph Component Example rrnnrrrrrnnnnnnnrvnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnn 160 Figure 67 Depth Graph Component Exvample AE 160 Figure 68 Indicator Graph Example AAA 161 Figure 69 Moon Phase Component Example sssssssssnnsressssererrrrnrnnesseerrene 162 Figure 70 North Up Rose Component Example ssssssssesesessseeserrnrnresssrrreee 163 Figure 71 North Up Rose with Markers AA 164 Figure 72 Rate of Turn Component Example sesssssssenneeesseeenrrnnnreesseeerene 167 Figure 73 Rudder Angle Component Example rrrrnnnnnnnrnnnnnnrrrrnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnr 168 Figure 74 Rudder Angle with Min Max Marks ssronnrrrnnvrrnnnrrnnvrrnnrrrrsvrrenrerenr 169 Figure 75 Tank Component Example ssssssseeeeneseseeeennrrrrrsseerennrnnnnnnsseerennn 170 Figure 76 Tank Control Example with Min Max Marks rannnnrrrrrnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnr 171 Figure 77 Text Component Example ee 171 Figure 78 Timer Component Example ee 172 Figure 79 Wind Angle Component Example 173 Figure 80 Wind Angle Component with Min Max Marks ssnrrrrrrvnnnnnrrrrnnnnnr 174 Figure 81 Wind Close Angle Component Exvample 175 Figure 82 Close Angle Component with Min Max Marks rrnrrrrrrnnnnnnrornnnnnnr 175 Figure 83 Video Component Exvample een 176 Figure 84 3 4 Video No Border Component Example sssessssssssrrnreeeeseeereee 177 Figure 85 4 3 Video No Border Component Example ornnnnrrrrrrnn
210. ing F12 from the main screen Typical contents should be similar to this If you are having a problem with sending a test email make a copy of this portion from the log and ask your email service provider for assistance Revision 3 6 3 Page 104 Maretron Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 Sending email with subject N2KView Test Email to AAAAAAAAA maretron com Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 SMTPMailer connect to MARETRON EMAIL SERVER port 25 Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 SMTPMailer received message Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 lt 220 maretron email server maretron com Microsoft ESMTP MAIL Service Version 6 0 3790 3959 ready at Mon 7 Mar 2011 08 56 25 0700 Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 SMTPMailer sendAuthMail Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 gt EHLO MARETRON EXCH Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 SMTPMailer received message This is a test email from N2KView Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 lt 250 TURN lt 250 SIZE lt 250 ETRN lt 250 PIPELINING lt 250 DSN lt 250 ENHANCEDSTATUSCODES lt 250 8bitmime lt 250 BINARYMIME lt 250 CHUNKING lt 250 VRFY lt 250 TLS lt 250 STARTTLS lt 250 maretron email server maretron com Hello 192 168 0 72 lt 250 X EXPS GSSAPI NTLM LOGIN lt 250 X EXPS LOGIN lt 250 AUTH GSSAPI
211. ioner may be controlled remotely Component Types Air Conditioner Instances 253 This would be the instance of the J2K100 bridge to which the Air Controller is connected Units not applicable 9 6 4 2 Q Logic Air Conditioner This displays the parameters from a CruisAir Systems Q Logic Air Conditioner With the licensing of the Control Module the Air Conditioner may be controlled remotely Component Types Air Conditioner Instances 253 Units not applicable 9 6 5 Anchor 9 6 5 1 Anchor Watch The Anchor Watch Parameter is a view into the Anchor Watch Alert see 10 3 6 4 9 Revision 3 6 3 Page 198 Maretron Component Types Anchor Watch Units not applicable Instances not applicable Revision 3 6 3 Page 199 Maretran 9 6 6 DC 9 6 6 1 Battery State of Charge Displays the current energy in the battery as a percentage of its total capacity Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units Instances 253 9 6 6 2 Battery Temperature Displays the battery case temperature Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units Degrees Centigrade Degrees Fahrenheit Instances 253 9 6 6 3 Battery Time Remaining Displays the time remaining that the battery can continue to operate at its current load Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units Hours and Minutes Instances 253 9 6 6 4 Current Displays the electrical current being sourced to from the batte
212. is selection sets the vessel s operating mode to User 1 All alerts which are enabled in User 1 mode will be enabled All other alerts will be disabled User 2 This selection sets the vessel s operating mode to User 2 All alerts which are enabled in User 2 mode will be enabled All other alerts will be disabled Changing the Operating Mode may disable a number of alerts If any alerts are Active or Awaiting Cancel they will remain Active or Awaiting Cancel until acknowledged by the user when they will be disabled if they are disabled in the new operating mode Alerts that have been Accepted i e the condition causing the alert is still present will be disabled immediately if they are disabled in the new operating mode Remote Alerts Play Computer Sound When Alerts are received from another N2KView or DSM250 Alert Source the computer sound will beep while the Alert is in the Active state if this box is checked Only show alerts active in the chosen mode If this is checked then the alerts shown in the Alerts Table will be limited to those active in the chosen Operating Mode Alerts Table This table lists all the alerts defined in this instance of N2KView Clicking on a row in the table will select an alert for editing or deletion Double clicking on a row in the table will open the Alert Edit Dialog for that alert The Annunc and Email columns give a quick overview of which alerts are configured to send emails
213. isplays For example if you are motoring 100 miles out to sea with the current at the end of the 100 miles N2KView might display that you have 120 miles before you run out of fuel If you then turn around and start heading back to land this time against the current the Distance to Empty reading may change to 80 miles Therefore you must always keep in mind the direction and speed of prevailing winds and currents You must always remain aware that N2KView makes Distance to Empty and Time to Empty calculations assuming that your course and speed and the prevailing winds and currents and any other factors that may affect fuel consumption will not change Revision 3 6 3 Page 219 Maretron Because of these extremely important considerations of which you must be aware before using the fuel management features of N2KView the Fuel Management Warning screen is displayed on the following occasions 1 every time you create a component in the fuel management category and 2 the first time after starting N2KView that you open a favorites page containing a fuel management component Fuel Management Warning Maretron N2KView Vessel Monitoring and Control System WARNING By pressing Accept you acknowledge that while Maretron fuel management products are designed to be accurate and reliable they should be used only as aids for fuel management and not as a replacement for traditional fuel management techniques BEWARE Cond
214. ist of numbers in the Use Additional Phone Number s field for each Alert Either field may be blank This combination allows an efficient way of entering common phone numbers while providing the flexibility of having each alert directed to specific users Enable SMS Text Transmission when Alert is Triggered This check box can be used to enable or disable the transmission of messages for this Alert when the Alert moves into the Active State When the box is checked the messages will be sent Enable SMS Text Transmission when Alert is Cleared This check box can be used to enable or disable the transmission of messages for this Alert when the Alert moves into the Inactive or Awaiting Cancel States When the box is checked the messages will be sent Use Default Phone Number When this box is checked the Default SMS Phone Number from the Connections tab see 9 4 5 3 4 will be added to the list of addresses for this alert If no default phone number has been established then this field will be disabled The default phone number will be displayed next to the check box and may not be edited from here Use Default Phone Number 6028611798 Use Additional Phone Number s If this check box is ticked then you will be able to select extra recipients for the email from the Email Address book see 9 4 5 2 8 The recipients are selected from a drop down list Use Additional Phone Number s Selected Names Phone No _ Chairman 123 456 1
215. itions can quickly change that drastically effect time and distances to empty Figure 89 Fuel Management Warning Screen 9 6 12 1 Distance to Empty NOTE This function is available in the optional Fuel Management Module If the Fuel Management Module is not licensed the component will display Not Licensed instead of data values This component displays the distance before the selected engines use all fuel in the selected fuel tanks assuming that all factors affecting fuel consumption remain constant Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units kilometers nautical miles statute miles 9 6 12 2 Time to Empty NOTE This function is available in the optional Fuel Management Module If the Fuel Management Module is not licensed the component will display Not Licensed instead of data values Revision 3 6 3 Page 220 Maretron This component displays the time before the selected engines use all fuel in the selected fuel tanks assuming that all factors affecting fuel consumption remain constant Component Types Digital Units hours 9 6 12 3 Total Fuel Capacity Units NOTE This function is available in the optional Fuel Management Module If the Fuel Management Module is not licensed the component will display Not Licensed instead of data values This component displays the total of the capacities of all the tanks setup with tank type of Fuel and whose instance numbers match those in
216. itors the RMS voltage between Phase A and Phase B of a generator Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 2 13 Phase B Apparent Power Monitors the Apparent Power being sourced from a generator on phase B Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 2 14 Phase B Current Monitors the AC RMS electrical current being sourced from a generator on phase B Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 2 15 Phase B Frequency Monitors the frequency of phase B of a generator Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 309 Maretran 10 4 2 16 Phase B Line Neutral Voltage Monitors the RMS voltage between Phase B and neutral of a generator Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 2 17 Phase B Power Factor Monitors the Power Factor of Phase B of a generator Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 2 18 Phase B Reactive Power Monitors the Reactive Power on Phase B of a generator Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 2 19 Phase B Real Power Monitors the Real Power on Phase B of a generator Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 2 20 Phase BC Line Line Voltage Monitors the RMS voltage between Phase B and
217. ive assuming the Clear Delay is set to zero If the delays are not programmed to zero then the switch must remain Off for the Set Delay before the alert becomes active and must remain On for the Clear Delay before the alert becomes inactive 10 3 6 4 5 1 Trigger Configuration Trigger Configuration Accept Re trigger Period E Minutes Seconds Set Delay Minutes Seconds Clear Delay Minutes Seconds Figure 108 Trigger Configuration Data Unavailable Alert Revision 3 6 3 Page 280 Maretron Accept Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If the condition which caused the alert remains true after the amount of time in this field the alert will return to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert If a value of 0 00 is entered then the alert will never re trigger Set Delay If the switch being monitored is in the Off state for the amount of time specified in this field the alert will become active Clear Delay If the switch being monitored is in a state other than Off for the amount of time specified in this field the alert will become inactive Revision 3 6 3 Page 281 Maretron 10 3 6 4 6 Tripped Alert When monitoring circuit breakers the tripped alert can be used to raise an alert when the circuit breaker trips due to over
218. l operation Gateway Serial Port This dropdown selection box can be selected or deselected only when the N2KServer is stopped When N2KServer is running this box shows the identity of the NMEA 2000 gateway that the N2KServer is using to connect to the NMEA 2000 network When N2KServer is stopped you may select a gateway from the list for the N2KServer to use the next time it is started If this list is empty then either 1 you have no gateways connected to the computer and to a powered up NMEA 2000 bus or 2 all connected gateways are in use by other programs a NMEA 2000 gateway can be used by only one program at a time Automatic Startup Start N2KServer When Windows Starts this checkbox can be checked or unchecked only when the N2KServer is stopped If this checkbox is checked then the N2KServer will be started automatically after Windows is restarted regardless of whether or not anyone is logged into Windows If this checkbox is cleared then N2KServer will not start automatically You must manually start the N2KServer Service Manager and click the Start button in order to start the N2KServer Security Server Password this textbox can by typed into only when the N2KServer is stopped Choose a password and enter it into this textbox to set the server password for N2KServer No N2KView stations will be allowed to connect to this N2KServer unless they have the matching password set via N2KView s Connection dialog
219. l change color between green yellow and red depending on which range the parameter value falls into The user defined title of the bar graph appears at the top of the component The units of the parameter value being displayed appear at the bottom of the bar graph An example of a tank component is shown below Figure 75 Tank Component Example Min Max markers may be added to a tank component by clicking on a check box in the Component Editor These marks are associated with the control itself That means that if two controls are displaying the same data each will maintain its own values for the min max marks and they can be reset independently Revision 3 6 3 Page 170 Maretran Figure 76 Tank Control Example with Min Max Marks The min mark is a blue triangle to the right of the cylinder and is pushed upwards by the top of the liquid The max mark is a red triangle to the right of the cylinder and is pulled downwards by the top of the liquid Pressing the Reset button will move both marks to the current bar position When the marks are displayed the cylinder is made narrower to allow them to fit The min and max marks may be enabled and disabled independent of each other The Reset button is displayed only if either of the marks is enabled 9 5 26 Text Text may be added to a Favorite Screen by using the Text Component Text is displayed on one line in a component that is 4 times as wide as it is high The te
220. l have some limitation as to the Actions possible when the Alert is triggered Because the connection to the server has been lost it will not be possible to display this alert on other N2KView displays or on DSM250 Displays It will also not be possible to sound an annunciator It will be possible to send an email message if the computers Ethernet connection is still available 10 3 6 4 7 1 Trigger Configuration Trigger Configuration Accept Re trigger Period Minutes Seconds Set Delay 0 05 Minutes Seconds Clear Delay Minutes Seconds Figure 110 Trigger Configuration Editor Tripped Alert Accept Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If the condition which caused the alert remains true after the amount of time in this field the alert will return to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert If a value of 0 00 is entered then the alert will never re trigger Set Delay If the switch being monitored is in the Tripped state for the amount of time specified in this field the alert will become active Clear Delay If the switch being monitored is in a state other than Tripped for the amount of time specified in this field the alert will become inactive Revision 3 6 3 Page 283 Maretran 10 3 6 4 8 Outside Radius Alert The Outside Radius Aler
221. l of available licenses 9 4 5 1 15 Connect Press this button to request from the server a license of the type selected from the Optional Software License s to Check Out radio buttons The success or failure of the connection attempt will be displayed in the Connection State area of the dialog 9 4 5 1 16 Connection State This is the area on the screen which communicates the current state of the connection to the server For demo versions of N2KView this field will show Demo Mode Revision 3 6 3 Page 102 Maretran 9 4 5 2 Email Connection Section Connections Settings N2K Server Connection Email Connection SM S Text Connection SEET GENEE EXCHANGE maretror com Password urne bridge maretron com Additional Email Addresses Name chairman maretron com man Groce Tes The fields in this section are used to configure the connection to your email server The Alerts Feature of N2KView has the ability to send emails to a list of users when an alert is detected or cleared This capability is dependent on N2K View being able to establish a connection to an email server The email service is not provided by Maretron and can be the same Email service that you have for standard email If you are using Outlook as your email program all these settings can be found in the Tools gt Account Settings gt Email dialog From version 3 5 0 N2KView is capable of sending mail to secure TLS SSL servers and plain te
222. lable in the optional Fuel Management Module If the Fuel Management Module is not licensed the component will display Not Licensed instead of data values This component displays the fractional level of the fuel in all the tanks setup with tank type of Fuel and whose instance numbers match those in the supplied list This is computed by dividing the total fuel remaining by the total fuel capacity Component Types Digital Bar Graph Gauge Units 9 6 12 7 Total Fuel Rate NOTE This function is available in the optional Fuel Management Module If the Fuel Management Module is not licensed the component will display Not Licensed instead of data values This component displays the total of the fuel consumed per unit time of all selected engines Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Units imp gal hour liter nour gal hour 9 6 12 8 Total Fuel Remaining NOTE This function is available in the optional Fuel Management Module If the Fuel Management Module is not licensed the component will display Not Licensed instead of data values This component displays the total amount of fuel remaining in all the tanks setup with tank type of Fuel and whose instance numbers match those in the supplied list Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Revision 3 6 3 Page 222 Maretran Units imp gal liter gal 9 6 12 9 Trip Fuel Used This component displays the amount of fuel used by an Engine
223. le to orient the ship symbol the ship symbol is replaced by a red disk mag Radius 100 feet Figure 47 Anchor Alert without Heading Revision 3 6 3 Page 135 Maretron If the vessel moves outside the circle then the control changes to the following mag Radius 100 feet Figure 48 Anchor Alert with Alarm Note that the anchor and circle have been colored red and the symbol has been changed to an arrow showing the direction of drift The actions specified by the alert will be initiated after the programmed delay If Alerts are not licensed i e you have not bought an Alerts License the words Not Licensed will displayed in the center of the circle Revision 3 6 3 Page 136 Maretron 9 5 3 Attitude Indicator The Attitude Indicator or Artificial Horizon is used to display a combination of the ship s pitch and roll motion The blue and brown background will rotate to show the roll which is also displayed digitally The background also moves up and down to show the pitch The User defined title appears at the top and the units at the bottom right The component is square An example of an attitude indicator component is shown below Attitude Degrees Revision 3 6 3 Page 137 Maretron 9 5 4 Bar Graph The bar graph component is similar in appearance to a mercury or alcohol thermometer or a liquid gauge It consists of a vertical bar which is filled with color from the bottom of the bar graph to a h
224. lear Delay The parameter being monitored must fall below the High Alert Clear Point value for longer than the time in this field in order for the alert to become inactive The value is entered as minutes seconds If only one number is entered it will be interpreted as seconds 10 3 6 4 2 Low Alert A low alert is used to signal you when a parameter value falls below a threshold you determine For example you can set an alert to occur whenever the port engine oil pressure rises falls below 40 PSI 10 3 6 4 2 1 Parameters A low alert and associated diagram are shown in the figure below Low Alert Parameters Inactive Pn Active eel Pm Accepted d Clear Delay Low Alert Clear Point i Low Alert transitions to the Inactive state after Clear Delay seconds Low Alert transitions to the i Leem Active state after Input Signal rises g Ki Ka SI 3 2 Set Delay seconds at OS Clear Point Input Signal falls below Low Alert Set Point Figure 104 Low Alert Parameters A low alert is triggered i e becomes an active alert once an input signal has dropped below the Low Alert Set Point and the Set Delay time has elapsed If the Set Delay is set to zero then the alert is immediately triggered once the input signal drops below the Low Alert Set Point The Set Delay is used to reduce false or spurious alerts AS an example setting the Set Delay to 5 seconds will Revision 3 6 3 Page 276 Maretron e
225. led Revision 3 6 3 Page 154 Maretran 9 5 16 Indicator Light The Indicator Light component displays a value which can be either On Off or Error This component is most often used for engine or transmission warning indications The Indicator component has the appearance of a traditional physical warning light with a red bulb or LED When the monitored parameter value is not available the Indicator Light appears dim and gray in color When the monitored parameter value is in any of the defined states the Indicator Light component glows with a user defined color The user defined title of the Indicator Light component appears across the middle of the component The component is four times as wide as it is tall for example an Indicator Light component that is one grid tall will be four grids wide An example of an Indicator Light component is shown below Engine Room Blower Figure 64 Indicator Light Component Example 9 5 17 Small Indicator Light The Small Indicator Light component has the same functionality as the Indicator Light component but is square and is the only component that does not require a title It is intended to be placed on a screen with a background where its position on the background will convey its function to the user For example the following screen segment with Indicator Lights can show which of the Navigation Lights are powered on Navigation Lights Figure 65 Small Indic
226. les Hour mph Revision 3 6 3 Page 112 Maretron 9 4 8 2 7 Temperature Degrees Centigrade Degrees Fahrenheit 9 4 8 2 8 Time Format 12 Hour 24 Hour 9 4 8 2 9 Volume Imperial Gallons gal imp Liters litre US Gallons gal US 9 4 8 2 10 Wind Speed Beaufort Bft Kilometers Hour km h Nautical Miles Hour knots Miles Hour mph 9 4 8 3 Global Settings This section of the Units Setup dialog allows you to configure values that are used throughout the N2KView software Global Settings Local Time Offset Heading Course Bearing Wind True Vessel Ref 9 4 8 3 1 Local Time Offset These selection boxes allow you to configure the offset from UTC Universal Coordinated Time also known as GMT or Greenwich Mean Time For example if you were in the Eastern US you would select 4 00 during daylight savings time and 5 00 during standard time daylight savings not in effect You can configure local time in increments as small as 15 minutes Local Time Offset may be set to NMEA2000 in which case N2KView will look for the offset on the NMEA2000 bus this value can be supplied in PGN 129033 If this value is not received on the bus then as a last resort N2KView will use the time offset defined in the computer The value of the Local Time Offset can be displayed in a digital component using the Local Time Offset parameter under the Time Date category Revision 3 6 3 Page 113 Maretran 9 4 8 3 2 Heading
227. liminate any temporary transitions of the input signal above the Low Alert Set Point lasting less than 5 seconds from triggering an alert Once the alert is triggered it becomes an active alert An alert remains active until e The input signals rises above the Low Alert Clear Point and the Clear Delay time has elapsed If the Clear Delay is set to zero then the alert immediately becomes inactive once the input signal falls below the Low Alert Clear Point The Clear Delay is used to reduce false or spurious alerts e The user accepts the alert as shown in the example above 10 3 6 4 2 2 Trigger Configuration Trigger Configuration Accept Re trigger Period Minutes Seconds Low Alert Set Point Set Delay Minutes Seconds Low Alert Clear Point Clear Delay Minutes Seconds Figure 105 Trigger Configuration Low Alert Accept Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If the condition which caused the alert remains true after the amount of time in this field the alert will return to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert If a value of 0 00 is entered then the alert will never re trigger Low Alert Set Point If the value of the parameter being monitored falls below the value in this field the alert will become active Set Delay The parameter being monitored
228. lor band and is pulled downwards by the top of the bar Pressing the Reset button will move both marks to the current bar position The min and max marks may be enabled and disabled independent of each other The Reset button is displayed only if either of the marks is enabled Revision 3 6 3 Page 139 Maretran 9 5 5 Borderless Bar This is a specialized version of the Bar Graph It may only be accessed from Water Pressure Parameter and is designed to display water pressure in feet or meters The component has a 2x1 aspect ratio and the bar which is always blue occupies the entire with and grows upward as the pressure increases Multiple bars may be stacked next to each other side by side to show the water level of tanks or the water line on the hull as shown below Ka One Borderless Bar has been selected for editing in this diagram It has been created 2 wide by 4 high as shown by the yellow outline If a pressure transducer is located below the waterline as the boat sinks deeper into the water the pressure will increase and the height of the blue bar will increase giving an easy indication of how deep the boat is in the water This can be seen on the N2KView demo Revision 3 6 3 Page 140 Maretron 9 5 6 Cardinal The cardinal component shows the value of a bearing in a textual format The value wind direction is indicated by the abbreviation of the corresponding cardinal compass point E
229. ls jj Compression EW Frame Rate 2 i fps Data rate 247kbits sec 31 kBytes sec Save Cancel Figure 130 IP Camera with PTZ Controls Revision 3 6 3 Page 372 Maretron Camera Editor x OO Axis Quad Video Server 2410 IC Engine Room Network Address 127 0 0 1 Network Port Camera No Mirror Image RW Compression Frame Rate Rescdutien 704x480 v Data rate 92kbits sec 11 kBytes sec Save Cancel Figure 131 Quad Video Server without PTZ 13 1 2 Edit Fields 13 1 2 1 Type Axis Quad Video Server 2419 Axis Single Video Server 2415 Axis Q7401 Video Encoder Axis Quad Video Server 240Q Axis M3113 Network Camera H Different cameras from Axis will have different Resolutions Choosing the correct camera from the list will enable N2KView to correctly populate the Resolution field in this editor Choosing the Unknown Axis Camera will populate the list of resolutions with all the known resolutions that Axis supports Not all of these resolutions will be supported by the actual camera that you have installed and you must select a valid resolution for that camera See the documentation that comes with the camera for a list of supported values 13 1 2 2 Name This is the name by which you will identify the camera when creating a video component Revision 3 6 3 Page 373 Maretran 13 1 2 3 Network Address This is the IP Address of the c
230. ltage Please refer to the Eskimo Ice Maker documentation for further details Revision 3 6 3 Page 149 Maretron 9 5 13 Gauge The gauge component emulates a mechanical gauge with a needle whose axis is in the center of the gauge The range of values displayed by the gauge is user defined The gauge has major large numbered and minor small unnumbered tick marks You can define the number and spacing of these tick marks You can also define different colors to denote different ranges of values on the gauge component The colors green okay yellow warning and red fault are available You can optionally define one green and up to two yellow and two red ranges of values that appear on the gauge scale The value of the parameter on the scale of the gauge is pointed to by the needle The value of the parameter also appears in a small digital display in the lower center of the gauge The units of the parameter measurement appear in the lower right hand corner of the gauge and the user defined title is at the top of the gauge display The gauge components are square in aspect ratio take the same number of grids in height as they do in width An example of a gauge component is shown below Starter Battery i Figure 59 Gauge Component Example Gauge components for many parameters have an LED appearing at the bottom center of the component The color of the LED will reflect the color of the range of values red yellow or g
231. ly displayed screen may be exported to disk as an N2KView Favorite Screen File Pressing Export Screen will open a browse dialog that will enable you to select a filename for the screen The extension of the nvs will be appended to the filename Save in Mark D Name Date modif Type EG 111 28 n2kview config n2k 111 29 n2kview config n2k 112 03 n2kview config n2k Desktop default n2kview config n2k mark n2kview config n2k LJ No tab load page nvs temp nvs Revision 3 6 3 Page 118 Maretron Selecting an existing file will cause that file to be over written otherwise the file is created 9 4 10 6 Importing Screens Favorite Screens may be imported from disk Pressing Import Screen will open a browse dialog that will allow you to select an N2KView Favorite Screen nvs file EI Documents 4 Recently Changed Ei Recent Places WW Desktop More Folders Adobe CS5 Drop 5 di Adobe CS5 Drop 6 di Adobe Photoshop Elements 8 J can di DSM250 di Fort Lauderdale J Mark El esmero File name X N2KView Favorite Screen Z If the file exists the imported screen will be added to the Screen List 9 4 10 7 Resizing Screens In order to change the size of a favorite screen select its name in the Screen List and then enter the new width and or height in square grid units into the W and H textboxes respectively Press the Modify This Screen button t
232. meters nautical miles statute miles 9 6 19 7 ETA Displays the estimated time of arrival at the destination waypoint Component Types Digital Instances 253 Units 12 hours 24 hours 9 6 19 8 ETA Date Displays the estimated date of arrival at the destination waypoint Revision 3 6 3 Page 230 Maretron Component Types Digital Instances 253 Units DD MM YYYY DD MMM YYYY MM DD YYYY MMM DD YYYY 9 6 19 9 Lat Lon Displays the current latitude and longitude of the vessel Component Types Digital Instances 253 9 6 19 10 Speed Over Ground Displays the current speed over ground of the vessel Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units kilometers hour knots miles hour 9 6 19 11 Time to Go Displays the estimated time remaining until arrival at the destination waypoint assuming current speed and course remain constant Component Types Digital Instances 253 Units hh mm ss hh mm 9 6 19 12 Velocity to Waypoint Displays the speed at which the distance to the waypoint is decreasing Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 231 Maretron Units kilometers hour nautical miles hour miles hour Revision 3 6 3 Page 232 Maretran 9 6 20 Pressure Vacuum 9 6 20 1 Barometric Pressure Displays the atmospheric barometric pressure Component Types Gauge Vacuum Gauge Bar Graph Line Graph Digital Units bars millibars in
233. mic DNS service such as the ones offered freely by www dyndns org among others Please visit their websites for more information on how dynamic DNS services operate 8 6 Software Firewall Configuration If you wish to run N2KView and N2KServer on two separate computers and are running a software firewall product other than Windows Firewall please read this section Otherwise you may skip this section A firewall is designed to protect your computer from unfettered access from the Internet There are two kinds of firewalls software and hardware software firewall is a component such as Windows Firewall or Norton Internet Security A major function of these programs is to allow your computer to initiate connections out onto the Internet but to block your computer from receiving incoming connections from the Internet If you wish to be able to view your vessel s data from another computer your N2KServer computer s software firewall must be configured to allow incoming connections from N2KView stations The N2KServer makes these adjustments to the Windows Firewall software when it is installed If you are running firewall software from another vendor you may have to configure your firewall software to allow this incoming TCP protocol connection on port 6544 8 7 Data Security and Encryption Making your vessel s data available over local networks or the internet presents multiple security concerns First it is desirable to
234. mimg ENEE 342 10 4 16 2 Cloud Server Data Used een 342 10 4 16 3 Cloud Server Percent Remaining ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeenees 342 10 4 16 4 Cloud Server Percent Ueed EEN 343 KE EE 343 10417 NAVIG AON ee EAE EE E 343 10 4 17 1 Bearing Origin to Destination rrrrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvrrrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrrnnnnnn 343 10 4 17 2 Bearing to E lu EE 343 10 4 17 3 Course Over Ground EE 344 Revision 3 6 3 Page 19 Maretran 104174 Cross Track BIN edd CEA 344 10 4 17 5 Destination Waypoint Number 344 10 4 17 6 Distance to Waypoint rrnnnnnnnnnnnnnvrrnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnnrnrnnnnrrnnnnen 344 POAT AE G E EE 344 102178 Speed Over SOEN E 344 10 4 17 9 TEN GO eee eee 345 10 4 17 10 Velocity to Wavpomt e 345 10 4 18 Pressure VACUUM EE 346 10 4 18 1 Barometric Pressure 346 10 4 18 2 Compressed Air Pressure EE 346 10 4 18 3 Engine Boost Pressure 346 10 4 18 4 Engine Coolant Pressure an 346 102185 Engine Fuel EIeeeHE ueretezen eegene 346 10 4 18 6 Engine Oil Pressure 2 cccccccesccesseeteseeeecestesesnecensceneeeeasenessteesnene 347 10 4 18 7 Hydraulic Oil Freeeute gegeeegrgeteeegeteeeeg edeeCd ed ECEeeCeEdedEd ENEE 347 14188 Steam Pressure ed deeg deet deg 347 10 4 18 9 Transmission Oil Pressure EE 347 10 4 18 10 User Defined Pressure 347 10 4 19 TE 348 EE E ER ele TE e UE 348 10 4 20 50660 DRANGE enteeteba ge ussert ege EEN 349 10 4 20 1 Speed Over Ground EE 349 10 4 20 2 Speed Through
235. n Component Types Moon Phase Display 9 6 26 4 Sunrise Displays the time of sunrise for the current day and position The time zone may be entered as part of the component configuration Revision 3 6 3 Page 244 Maretron Component Types Digital Units 12 hour 24 hour 9 6 26 5 Sunset Displays the time of sunset for the current day and position The time zone may be entered as part of the component configuration Component Types Digital Units 12 hour 24 hour 9 6 26 6 Time Displays the current time The time zone may be entered as part of the component configuration Component Types Digital Units 12 hour 24 hour 9 6 26 7 Twilight AM Displays the time of nautical twilight before sunrise for the current day and position The time zone may be entered as part of the component configuration Component Types Digital Units 12 hour 24 hour 9 6 26 8 Twilight PM Displays the time of nautical twilight after sunset for the current day and position The time zone may be entered as part of the component configuration Component Types Digital Units 12 hour 24 hour Revision 3 6 3 Page 245 Maretron 9 6 27 Transmission 9 6 27 1 Gear Displays the current gear of the transmission forward neutral or reverse Display Digital Instances 253 9 6 27 2 Transmission Oil Pressure Displays the pressure of the oil in the transmission Component Types Gauge Digital Units kilopascals bars pou
236. n Degrees sec Figure 72 Rate of Turn Component Example Min Max Markers may be added to a Rate of Turn Component by clicking ona check box in the Component Editor The markers show the limits of the needle movement in either direction These marks are associated with the control itself That means that if two controls are displaying the same data each will maintain its own values for the min max marks and they can be reset independently The marks are blue and red triangles just inside the gauge perimeter and are pushed left or right by the needle Pressing the Reset button will move both marks to the current needle position The Reset button is displayed only if the marks are enabled Revision 3 6 3 Page 167 Maretron 9 5 24 Rudder Angle Order The rudder angle component appears like a mechanical rudder angle gauge There is a red needle in the center of the component and a semicircular scale appearing at the bottom component The needle is oriented such that it points the same direction as the rudder if you were standing above it looking down while facing the bow of the vessel A grey triangle under the needle shows the order given to the rudder by an autopilot The range of values displayed by the gauge is user defined The gauge has major tick marks You can define the number and spacing of these tick marks within the component editor An example of a rudder angle component is shown below Rudder Angle Order
237. n 3 6 3 Page 386 Maretran When the connection is made the Settings Dialog continues to be displayed In the diagram above and right the green check mark indicates that we are connected to the 2nd N2KServer The red line on the Cloud Server shows that this option was not enabled and so was not considered as a candidate for connecting The 1st N2KServer was considered as an option i e it was enabled but the connection was not made either because it was not required or the connection failed If more than one option is enabled the program will start at the top of the list and spend 10 seconds trying to connect to each enabled option before moving on to the next At the bottom of the list it wraps around back to the first enabled option This does imply that it may take a bit longer to make the connection if the first option is not available 14 6Download the Configuration File Press the Download Config File button This button will have been inactive until a N2KServer connection was made N2KView will request N2KServer to supply it with the list of files stored on the server and these will now be displayed below the button You should be able to see the one file that we created earlier Revision 3 6 3 Page 387 Maretron The layout of the buttons on the dialog will depend on the height and width of the mobile device Click on the button containing the filename and your configuration file will be loaded ont
238. n File to Maretron Support Pressing the Forgotten Password button will give instructions on how to get your configuration file 9 1 7 Grid Layout Concepts A favorite screen in N2KView is laid out on a grid of squares When you create a favorite screen you determine the layout by setting the width and height in terms of the number of squares that will be displayed on the screen When the favorite screen is displayed in normal operating mode it expands to fill the N2KView window as much as possible or the entire computer screen if operating in full screen mode You should choose a number of grids that is fairly small When you create or move components they snap to the grid intersections so the fewer grids you have in your layout the easier it is to place and align components It is also important to choose a number of grids that matches the aspect ratio of the window in which you plan to run N2KView in order to minimize blank space in the N2KView window For example if you are creating a favorite screen that is designed to run in full screen mode on a computer with a typical 4 3 aspect ratio you may wish to make the favorite screen 40 grids wide by 30 grids high so that the computer screen is completely filled when N2KView is operating in full screen mode However you may wish to run N2KView simultaneously with a chart plotting program letting the chart plotting program occupy the left half of the computer screen and letting N2KView occupy
239. n will be copied into the new filename giving the user a convenient way of duplicating a configuration 9 4 4 1 3 Load The Load button brings up the Load New Configuration Dialog This enables new configurations to be loaded into N2KView see section 9 4 6 9 4 4 1 4 Save The Save button brings up the Save Configuration Dialog This enables the current configuration to be saved to either the local computer or to N2KServer see section 9 4 7 9 4 4 1 5 Allow Automatic Updates from Web When checked recommended N2KView will query the Maretron website on each startup to see if a later version of N2KView is available It also controls whether the Adobe Integrated Runtime AIR will check for and download updates automatically This should be unchecked when data transfer rates are expensive such as when using a satellite data link Revision 3 6 3 Page 93 Maretron 9 4 4 1 6 Cycle Through Screens When checked N2K View will automatically cycle through the favorite screens changing the display every 10 seconds When any user interaction takes place the cycling is paused for 2 minutes after the last user interaction so as to not interfere with the actions the user is taking 9 4 4 2 Network Configuration Section The fields in this section are used to control the configuration of the network connection in the MBB100 TSM800 TSM1330 and DSM800 only Configuration Configuration Network Configuration Screen Configuration DH
240. nced 10 3 7 2 Switch Actions Tab The switch actions tab has been removed for safety reasons SE ee Revision 3 6 3 Page 296 Maretron Alert Action Editor DC Voltage Low Alert x Annunciator Actions Switch Actions Email Actions m Enable Switch Action NS 0 Andrew DCR v Please set each Commanded Switch Breaker State to the desired position for each Alert State Alert State x i I i i Commanded Inst 0 Chan 0 Inst 0 Chan 0 Inst 0 Chan 0 Inst 0 Chan 0 sjikane or ON or ON oFF ON l or ON Save Cancel Ej 124 Alert Acti Dial Switeh Acti Tal Enable Switch Action This checkboxis usedto enable switchactionsforthis Alert Instance This is the Data Instance Number of the DCR100 or other suitable NMEA2000 switch ECH tehda led er A A E aa bE Ne RON Revision 3 6 3 Page 297 Maretran 10 3 7 3 Email Actions Tab The Email Actions Tab for the Alert Actions Dialog is shown below Alert Action Editor DC Voltage High Alert x Annunciator Actions Email Actions SM S Text Actions Enable Email Transmission when Alert is Triggered Enable Email Transmission when Alert is Cleared Message when Alert is Triggered Message when Alert is Cleared Save Cancel Figure 122 Alert Actions Dialog Email Actions Tab Please note that the e mail server must be properly configured please refer to Section 9 4 5 2 for details on how to do t
241. nd Cameras N2KView version 2 5 introduces a video component that may be used to monitor cameras connected to the N2KView computer using the ship s Ethernet network The NMEA2000 bus is not used to transfer the camera video streams or to control the cameras Video Monitoring requires the optional Video Module to be licensed Having the video display embedded within N2KView has the advantage that the user can see the video and the gauges simultaneously and all the N2KView Alert monitoring is active with the active alerts always visible at the bottom of the screen The following IP cameras have been tested with N2KView e AXIS 212 PTZ e AXIS 215 PTZ e AXIS P3301 e AXIS Q7401 e AXIS M3113 PTZ e any other AXIS camera supporting the VAPIX protocol In addition analog cameras may be connected to an Axis video server which is then connected to the N2KView computer using Ethernet e AXIS 24185 This is a Single Channel Encoder Used to convert analog camera NTSC PAL to Internet Protocol IP e AXIS 240Q This is a Four Channel Encoder e AXIS 241Q This is a Four Channel Encoder Finally a USB camera may be connected directly to the computer although this has limitations 1 The USB camera must be located close to the computer due to the limitation on the cable length 2 The image from the USB camera will only be available on one screen and may not be transmitted to another computer Revision 3 6 3 Page 370 Maretron 13
242. nd corner of the line graph component The line graph component is square in aspect ratio for example a line graph component that is eight grids tall will be eight grids wide An example of a line graph component is shown below Revision 3 6 3 Page 159 Maretron Compressed Air Pressure Avg 2437 at 19 41 46 Figure 66 Line Graph Component Example And the following figure shows an example of the depth graph Water Depth includes offset 0 0 10 0 20 0 30 0 40 0 10m 7 5m 5m 2 5m 0m A 10mins v Figure 67 Depth Graph Component Example The following figure shows an example of an Indicator Graph The colors of the graph are user selectable in the Component Editor Revision 3 6 3 Page 160 Maretron Fwd Hatch Switch Figure 68 Indicator Graph Example Revision 3 6 3 Page 161 Maretron 9 5 20 Moon Phase The moon phase component is a picture of what the moon looks like at the current date and time In the center of the component is a picture of the moon with the proper percentage lit depending on the moon phase A user defined title appears at the top of the component and a description of the current moon phase Full Moon First Quarter etc appears at the bottom of the moon phase component The moon phase component is square in aspect ratio for example a moon phase component that is four grids wide will be four grids high An example of a moon phase component is shown belo
243. ndicate that the max min values are now meaningless Pressing the Reset button will move both marks to the current needle position and unlock the marks The Reset button is displayed only if the marks are enabled Revision 3 6 3 Page 164 Maretron 9 5 22 Push Buttons To supplement the toggle switches there are five different push buttons Backlit Pushbutton fe Ni R fa N Proa er Ved fr 3 Switehy Wide Backlit Pushbutton Stbd Nav Stbd Nav d Light Wide Pushbutton Revision 3 6 3 Page 165 Maretron In each case the on off and error colors are specified by the user Push buttons may be configured to be toggle i e you press it one to go on and then again to go off or momentary i e when you stop pressing it will return to the off position All the pushbuttons may be overlaid with LOAD SHED LOAD CONTROLLED ALERT CONTROLLED and LOCKED warnings in the same way as the Circuit Breaker see 9 5 6 for more details 9 5 23 Rate of Turn The rate of turn component is a special type of gauge that displays the rate at which the vessel s heading is changing either in Degrees per Minute or Degrees per Second The User defined title appears at the top and the units at the bottom right The value is also displayed in digital form with turns to Port being shown as negative numbers An example of the Rate of Turn component is shown below Revision 3 6 3 Page 166 Maretran Rate of Tur
244. nds square inch Instances 253 9 6 27 3 Transmission Oil Temperature Displays the temperature of the oil in the transmission Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Units Degrees Centigrade Degrees Fahrenheit Instances 253 9 6 28 Transmission Warning 9 6 28 1 Check Transmission Generally indicates some fault condition in the transmission that requires attention Please consult the transmission manufacturer s documentation for details Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 246 Maretron 9 6 28 2 Low Oil Level Generally indicates that the oil level in the transmission has fallen below some transmission defined limit Please consult the transmission manufacturer s documentation for details Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Instances 253 9 6 28 3 Low Oil Pressure Generally indicates that the oil pressure in the transmission has fallen below some transmission defined limit Please consult the transmission manufacturer s documentation for details Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Instances 253 9 6 28 4 Over Temperature Generally indicates that the operating temperature of the transmission exceeds some transmission defined limit Please consult the transmission manufacturer s doc
245. ne Component Types Digital Units Hours Instances 253 9 6 9 12 Percent Load Displays the current load on the engine as a percentage of its rated load Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units percent Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 206 Maretron 9 6 9 13 Percent Torque Displays the current torque being provided by the engine as a percentage of its rated torque Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units percent Instances 253 9 6 9 14 Tachometer Displays the rotational speed of the engine Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units revolutions minute Instances 253 9 6 9 15 Tilt Trim Displays the tilt or trim of the drive Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units percent Instances 253 9 6 9 16 Voltage Displays the electrical power supply voltage measured at the engine Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units Volts Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 207 Maretron 9 6 10 Engine Warning 9 6 10 1 Charge Generally indicates a fault in the engine s charging system Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Instances 253 9 6 10 2 Check Engine Generally indicates some condition in the engine that requires investigation Please consult the engine manufacturer s
246. ne Line Voltage Displays the voltage between Phase C and Phase A of an AC Utility Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Hertz Instances 253 9 6 3 29 Total Apparent Power Displays the Total Apparent Power being drawn on all phases from an AC Utility Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Revision 3 6 3 Page 196 Maretron Instances 253 Units VA 9 6 3 30 Total Power Factor Displays the Total Power Factor of all phases of an AC Utility Component Types Digital Units Instances 253 9 6 3 31 Total Reactive Power Displays the Total Reactive Power being drawn on all phases from an AC Utility Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units VAr 9 6 3 32 Total Real Power Displays the Total Real Power being drawn on all phases from an AC Utility Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units Watts kilowatts 9 6 3 33 Total kWh Export Displays the Total kilowatt Hours exported to an AC Utility Component Types Digital Instances 253 Units kilowatt hours Revision 3 6 3 Page 197 Maretron 9 6 3 34 Total kWh Import Displays the Total kilowatt Hours imported from an AC Utility Component Types Digital Instances 253 Units kilowatt hours 9 6 4 Air Conditioning Heating 9 6 4 1 Elite Air Conditioner This displays the parameters from a MarineAir Systems Elite Air Conditioner With the licensing of the Control Module the Air Condit
247. needs to log into the computer to start N2KServer if N2KServer has been configured to start when Windows starts Since N2KServer is a Windows service and the N2KServer Service Manager interacts with this service the N2KServer Service Manager must be run from a Windows account with administrator privileges This is a restriction of the Microsoft Windows security architecture Revision 3 6 3 Page 395 Maretron 16 Troubleshooting If you notice unexpected operation of the Maretron N2KView System follow the troubleshooting procedures in this section to remedy simple problems Symptom Troubleshooting Procedure Select the Commands amp Settings Tab and No data on the N2KView screen open the Connections dialog Press the all components display dashes Connect button and look at the for the data value and gauge Connection Status message for indicators are at the end stop suggestions as to how to solve the peg problem Make sure that N2KServer is running on the computer whose Host address is specified in the Connections window You can confirm this using N2KServer Service Manager Make sure that the NMEA 2000 gateway on the N2KServer computer is plugged into a powered on NMEA 2000 network and to a USB port on the N2KServer computer and is not being accessed by another program You can confirm this by stopping the N2KServer service and making sure that the NMEA 2000 gateway you are using to interface to the NMEA 2000 network appea
248. nmnse j dene 356 104251 Check EE le EE 356 102252 Low Oil Leger eeneg 356 104253 Low Oil Pressure eg ieegdeuggengeeddZeeeeerkgd eege e eg od 356 10 4 25 4 Over Temperature EEN 356 102255 Su PE 357 10 426 Vesuv 358 102261 lee eeneg 358 104252 Port Trim bk aveeasnesdmsmdnsdemadednde 358 104265 Roll eege 358 102264 Starboard Trim Ab gmeavsvvtesmmmjenunkmisjudjenedsmeering 358 10 4 27 Vessel Data Hecorder EEN 359 194271 VDR Eeer beeegetieripegiee e eiert Eeefer igieen 359 10 4 27 2 VDR Memory Used rrnrrvvrnnnnnnnrrnnnnnrrrrrnnnnnnnrrrnnnnrrrrnnnnnensrrnnnnnrrnnneen 359 10 4 27 3 VDR Memory Available rrrnnnornnnnnrrrrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrnnnen 359 102274 VDR Percent Used EE 359 10 4 27 5 VDR Percent Gvetleble eszegktgssNEeEREuENEgENENE ENSCH Neen 359 10 428 WINO EEE 360 10 4 28 1 Wind Direction EE 360 10 4 28 2 Mg SPEL Lunar adeen 360 11 Breaker TEE 361 11 1 Displaying LOCKED EE E 361 11 2 Locking and Unlocking a Breaker en 361 12 1680 Sed DEE 364 21 SUE Ge 364 122 AS EE 364 EA EEE go EE EEE seauuatl rear wees TOSE EOE eT oaen 365 124 See 365 12 5 eebe EE 365 12 6 e Me D en sc ccccessdasethetctcer dricista ad lnanci reece tmes dcteineycuiet de niitnasdinagdaecucdecemtnasteebnantna 367 12 6 1 SOTO A eeng 367 126 2 COMMOUIING Ee EE 368 1263 ee Te Ee E 369 13 Video and Cameras eege 370 13 1 Camera Eeer 371 Revision 3 6 3 Page 21 Maretran 13 1 1 Examples of Camera Getnp 372 Camera Editor x J IECH
249. nnererenn 135 Figure 48 Anchor Alert with Alarm eesrasnnnononnannnnennnnannnvnnnnnnnnnnnennernnnennnnenen 136 Figure 49 Bar Graph Component Example sssssssssssrrnreeessereenrrnnnresseernne 138 Figure 50 Bar Graph Example with Min Max Marks eerrrnnnnrrrrrrnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnr 139 Figure 51 Cardinal Component Exvample AEN 141 Figure 52 Rocker Switch Component Example rrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnr 142 Figure 53 Course Up Rose Component Example 144 Figure 54 Digital Component Examples rrrnnnnnrrrrrrnnnnnnvrnnnnnrrrrnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnn 145 Figure 55 Digital Counter Component Example ssssssssesssesesssesrrrrnnressssrree 146 Figure 56 Air Conditioner Component Example sssssssseeneessseserrrnnnnessserree 147 Figure 57 Q Logic Air Conditioner Component with Aux Hesat 148 Revision 3 6 3 Page 25 Maretran Figure 58 Ice Maker Component Example rnnnrrrvnnnnnnnnrrnnnnrrrrrnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnr 149 Figure 59 Gauge Component Example enn 150 Figure 60 Gauge with Min Max Markers A 151 Figure 61 GPS Status Component Example rrnrrrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnr 152 Figure 62 Inclinometer Component Exvample AAA 153 Figure 63 Inclinometer with Min Max Marks rrrnnrrnnnnrnnvrrnnnnrnnvrrnnrrrrnvrnenrerenn 153 Figure 64 Indicator Light Component Example 155 Figure 65 Small Indicator Light Component Exvample 155 Figure 66 L
250. nnnnnrnnnnnnnr 177 Figure 86 16 9 Video No Border Component Example sssssssssssrerneeeseerree 178 Figure 87 Watermaker Component Exvample 179 Figure 88 Watermaker with request for Confirmation urrrnnvrrnnrnvnnvrnnnrrrnnr 179 Figure 89 Fuel Management Warning Green 220 Figure 90 EE 260 Figure 91 Over Full Alert Status Bar eernrnnnnnnnnnvrnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnn 260 Figure 92 Alerts Tab Platnum EE 261 Figure 93 Alerts Tab Standard eeeennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnn 261 Figure 94 Alert Status STEEN avvente 262 Figure 95 Column Sort INdIl6ator ungene 263 Figure 96 Alert Setup Dialog 265 Figure 97 Alert Editor Exvample ENEE 267 Figure 98 Alert Editor Alert Definition Section rrrrnnvvrnnnnnnnvrrnnnnrnnvrnnnrrrenr 268 Figure 99 Channel Drop Down Liskuuasssenemememeinnnhvvhnbeinsdee 270 Figure 100 Instance Drop Down et 271 Figure 101 Alert Editor Buttons EE 272 Figure 102 High Alert Parameters AEN 274 Revision 3 6 3 Page 26 Maretron Figure 103 Trigger Configuration High Alert 275 Figure 104 Low Alert Parameters AEN 276 Figure 105 Trigger Configuration Low Alert 277 Figure 106 Trigger Configuration Data Unavailable Alert 278 Figure 107 Trigger Configuration On Alert 279 Figure 108 Trigger Configuration Data Unavailable Alert 280 Figure 109 Trigger
251. nnnnnrnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrrnnnnnne 307 10 4 2 5Phase A Apparent Power 308 10 4 2 6Phase A el sccriecncsciscktuince otciccttnasdeenvastdettenstbrtatanldacuererdnonesenteuncuactnns 308 10 4 2 7Phase A Freoguency EE 308 10 4 2 8Phase A Line Neutral Voltage AAA 308 10 4 2 9Phase Power Factor egebueertdekengrkeehec eher 308 10 4 2 10 Phase A Reactive Power 308 102211 Phase A Real Power gege Mee 309 10 4 2 12 Phase AB Line Line Voltage rrnnrrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrnnnn 309 10 4 2 13 Phase B Apparent Power 309 104214 Phase B UN ae 309 104 215 Phase B Frepueneg einee eesgee ege EKgeE ES SEE ENEE 309 10 4 2 16 Phase B Line Neutral Voltage EEN 310 10 4 2 17 Phase B Power Factor ee 310 10 4 2 18 Phase B Reactive Power 310 104219 Phase B Real Power eeestiergreugregeeguege Edge gege ege gegen 310 10 4 2 20 Phase BC Line Line Voltage rrrnrrrrvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnrrrnnnnn 310 10 4 2 21 Phase C Apparent Power 311 10 4 2 22 Phase C Current EE 311 10 4 2 23 Phase C Freouency EE 311 10 4 2 24 Phase C Line Neutral Voltage AEN 311 10 4 2 25 Phase C Power Factor ceekCgsSENENeERENENENENENENESENSREOENENENE NES 311 10 4 2 26 Phase C Reactive Power 311 10 4 2 27 Phase Real POWGE sisscccccccecscecapsxinscitenteediganeiel exceed desided eg 312 10 4 2 28 Phase CA Line Line Voltage EE 312 10 4 2 29 Total Apparent Power 312 10 4 2 30 Total Power Factor o ccicccecccccctececdesiesetcnctncendeenenenerssecsicee
252. nrise The alert will trigger at Sunset every day e Twilight AM The alert will trigger at Nautical Twilight every morning e Twilight PM The alert will trigger at Nautical Twilight every evening Alarm Time Entering a number without the colon will assume that the hours are zero The field will reformat when the cursor is moved to a different field Time Zone The Time Zone in which the alert time is compared to the current time The time zone is chosen from a drop down list The list includes a value of Local which means that an alarm set for 7 00 will be triggered at 7 00 am local time even when the time zones change Repeat Interval The alert will become active again after the period specified in this field For example if the Alarm Time were set to 8 00 and the Repeat Interval were set to 1 00 1 hour zero minutes the Alarm would become active again at 9 00 10 00 and so on The field will reformat when the cursor is moved to a different field If a value of 0 00 is entered then the alert will not repeat Revision 3 6 3 Page 293 Maretron Time Alert Clear Point Time Alerts may be accepted automatically according to one of the following options e Time The time may be specified directly by setting the Time Alert Clear Point e Sunrise The alert will be accepted at Sunrise every day e Sunrise The alert will be accepted at Sunset every day e Twilight AM The alert will be accepted at Nautical Twilight every
253. o make the changes The favorite screen will now be displayed with the new grid settings If you changed the favorite screen to have more grids than it previously had all of the existing components will appear in the upper left corner of the new favorite screen If you change the favorite screen to have fewer grids than it previously had then all of the components that would fall off the lower and or right edges of the favorite screen with the newly defined size will be removed from the favorite screen configuration Revision 3 6 3 Page 119 9 4 10 8 Setting a Background Image An image file jpg png gif swf may be displayed behind the controls either just for fun or give context to the components The example below shows a Favorite Screen where components that show the status of the Navigation Lights have been placed on an image of the yacht EX N2KView Helm Navigation Lights 9 4 10 9 Deleting a Background Image Pressing the Delete button will delete the image 9 4 10 10 Adding an Component to a Favorite Screen To add a component to a Favorite Screen start by defining the space where the component will be placed Move the mouse cursor to the top left square where the component will be placed press the mouse button and then move the cursor to the bottom right corner of the area As you do that a light grey area will be Revision 3 6 3 Page 120 Maretron drawn on the screen to define the area where the
254. o ensure that only your N2KView software which must be programmed with the same password can view your network data Steps to configure and start N2KServer the first time Click the Live Network Data radio button Select an NMEA 2000 gateway from the Gateway Serial Port dropdown list Check the Start N2KServer When Windows Starts checkbox Select a password and enter it into the Server Password text box then click the Set button Click the Start button N2K Server is now ready to accept connections and send NMEA 2000 data to N2KView stations on the network Note the IP address of this computer and proceed with N2KView installation Revision 3 6 3 Page 51 Maretron 6 5 Install N2KView Please follow the following steps to install the N2KView station part of the N2KView system a Insert the N2KView CD ROM into your computer s CD ROM drive b The installer will automatically start unless you have disabled AutoPlay on the CD ROM drive If this is the case open the CD ROM drive in Windows Explorer and double click on the file autorun inf The installer will now check if a previous version of N2KView 3 x has been installed If this is the first installation of N2KView skip to section d Automatic upgrading from N2KView 2 x is no longer supported To upgrade your configuration file from 2 x to 3 4 please contact Maretron Technical Support c Uninstalling previous versions of N2KView
255. o the N2KView Clipboard select the component on the favorite screen by pressing on it When selected a yellow border will be displayed around the component Then press the Copy button at the bottom of screen or Ctrl C on the keyboard 9 4 10 15 Pasting Components into Favorite Screens If a component has been saved on the N2KView Clipboard the Paste button will be enabled To paste the component define an area on the screen as you would to create a new component and then press the Paste button at the bottom of the screen or Ctrl V on the keyboard The component will be resized to fit the new area Pasting a component does not remove it from the N2KView Clipboard so this action may be repeated 9 4 10 16 Moving Components on Favorite screens To change the location of a component on a particular favorite screen select the component by pressing on it then drag it to the new desired location and release the mouse button or remove your finger from the screen You may not move a component to a location where it overlaps one or more other components If you try to do this the component will turn red and on release of the mouse button will jump back to a legal position 9 4 10 17 Resizing Components on Favorite screens To change the size of a component on a particular favorite screen select the component by pressing on it then press the blue double headed arrow icon in the lower right hand corner of the highlighted component
256. o the iPhone While downloading an hourglass will be overlaid on the screen and a progress bar will display the progress of the download When the download is complete the Settings Screen will be displayed Note that the iPhone stores only one active configuration file The next time you start up this will be the configuration in the phone and it should connect automatically to your server Pressing the blue X will exit the Settings Screen 14 7 About Screen You may view the About Screen from the Settings Screen by pressing the About N2K View button Revision 3 6 3 Page 388 Maretron Software Version 3 6 0 20121023 Server Version 3 6 0 License Key No 527 Base Licenses Used 1 5 Alerts Licenses Used 1 5 Fuel Man Licenses Used 1 5 Control Licenses Used 1 5 Video Licenses Used 1 5 kummen The Server Version and license details will only be populated if you are connected to an N2KServer Revision 3 6 3 Page 389 Maretron 14 8 Alerts Press anywhere on the screen to display the tabs for the favorite screens The first tab is the Alerts tab If you have an Alerts license it will be enabled and Pressing it will display the Alerts Page Pressing the blue X will close the Alerts Page and return you to the page you were looking at before entering the Alerts Page Only remote Alerts are displayed in the Alerts Page They are also displayed at the bottom of the screen in a Status Bar just like the PC ver
257. oad New Configuration x Load the Default Load Default Load Configuration From Disk Get Configuration Load Configuration From Server Files on Server Delete Close he EE EE rn EE EE Figure 36 Load New Configuration Dialog There are three options to load a new configuration 9 4 6 1 Load the Default The default configuration will be loaded as the new configuration This will show a wide sample of available component types and can be used as a reference for new designs 9 4 6 2 Load Configuration from Disk Pressing the Get Configuration button in the this section will open a browser on the local computer The user then finds the required configuration and selects the file A warning dialog will be displayed requiring the user to OK replacing the configuration Revision 3 6 3 Page 108 Maretran Warning WARNING Pressing OK vill result in the current configuration being replaced by the configuration in the chosen file All the Alerts monitored in the existing configuration will be replaced by the alerts in the new configuration 9 4 6 3 Load Configuration from Server N2KServer has the capability of storing configuration files on behalf of N2KView When this dialog opens N2KServer will provide a list of the files currently stored on the Server as a drop down list of Files on Server Scroll down to the required file to select it and then press the Get Configuration button to transfer the file to th
258. olor Yellow v When the parameter type is an indicator the Colors fields allow you to enter different colors for each of the states of the indicators Select the desired color by Revision 3 6 3 Page 131 Maretron pressing on the down pointing arrow to the right of the control and then select the color from the list 9 4 10 18 17 Counter Options What do you want to count M Times Off Times On E e e Times in Error When the parameter type is an indicator and the Component Type is a Digital Counter the Counter Options fields allow you to specify which transitions of the indicator you wish to count Revision 3 6 3 Page 132 Maretron 9 5 Available Component Types This section lists the different types of components that are available to view parameters in N2KView The types of component available depend on the parameter being displayed Section 9 6 below lists the different component types available for each parameter type 9 5 1 Analog Clock The analog clock component emulates a traditional clock To the bottom right of the clock the units will show the time zone offset am or pm The label at the top is user defined The analog clock component is square in aspect ratio for example an analog clock component that is eight grids tall will be eight grids wide An example of an analog clock component is shown below Local Time Local am Figure 44 Analog Clock Component Example Revision 3 6 3 Pa
259. on Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 Mon Mar 7 08 56 21 GMT 0700 2011 From AAAAAAAAA maretron com To AAAAAAAAA maretron com Subject N2KView Test Email This is a test email from N2KView Revision 3 6 3 SMTPMailer sending data gt Date 07 Mar 2011 08 56 21 0700 Page 105 Maretran Mon Mar 7 08 56 22 GMT 0700 2011 SMTPMailer received message Mon Mar 7 08 56 22 GMT 0700 2011 lt 250 2 6 0 lt MARETRON EMAIL SERVER00000008 maretron email server maretron com gt Queued mail for delivery Mon Mar 7 08 56 22 GMT 0700 2011 mail was sent OK Mon Mar 7 08 56 22 GMT 0700 2011 SMTPMailer closed 9 4 5 2 8 Email Address Book The Email Address Book contains up to 8 additional email addresses identified by a name of your choosing and a test button These entries may be selected within each alert as a destination for emails 9 4 5 3 SMS Text Connection Section Connections Settings N2K Server Connection Email Connection SMS Text Connection Carrier T Mobile SMS Phone Number 1 602 535 9771 oe due 6028611798 Test Additional Phone Numbers Name 123 456 1234567 1234561234568 Manager The fields in this section are used to configure the phone number to which Text messages may be sent In addition the status of the SMS100 is displayed The Alerts Feature of N2KView has the ability to send SMS Text Messages to a list of users when an alert is detected or cleared This capability is dependent on N2KView being able to e
260. on for details Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Data Unavailable Alert Revision 3 6 3 Page 327 Maretron Instances 253 10 4 9 5 EGR System Generally indicates a fault in the exhaust gas recirculation EGR system Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 9 6 Emergency Stop Generally indicates that the engine was stopped using an emergency stop button Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 9 7 High Boost Generally indicates that the supercharger turbocharger boost pressure has exceeded some engine defined limit Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 9 8 Low Coolant Level Generally indicates that the level of coolant has fallen below some engine defined limit Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 328 Maretran 10 4 9 9 Low Fuel Pressure Generally indicates that the fuel pressure has fallen below some engine defined limit Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253
261. on location C Program Files Maretron N2KServer Start Menu folder Maretron N2KServer Additional icons Create a desktop icon Create Quick Launch icon Figure 6 N2KServer Installation Wizard Ready to Install Page h The Installing screen will display next and will show the progress of the installation Revision 3 6 3 Page 46 Maretron J5 Setup Maretron N2KServer o Installing Please wait while Setup installs Maretron N2KServer on your computer 4 Extracting fles C Program Files Maretron N2KServer SentinelKesw dil Figure 7 N2KServer Installation Wizard Installing Page The Hardware Setup screen will display next Please follow the instructions and plug the red Hardware License Key dongle into an available USB port Also plug your Maretron NMEA 2000 gateway into an available USB port Wait for Windows to indicate that these devices are both ready to use Click Next gt to continue 5 Setup Maretron N2KServer elt SS Hardware Setup Install the Hardware License Key and Gateway E Please plug the red N2KServer Hardware License Key and the NMEA 2000 gateway for example USB100 into avatable USB ports After Windows has indicated that both devices are ready for use please press Next to continue the installation Figure 8 N2KServer Installation Wizard Hardware Setup Page Revision 3 6 3 Page 47 Maretran The Passwords screen will display next You
262. onditioners and battery chargers so the limit of 10 loads should not be a limit on most systems Revision 3 6 3 Page 364 Maretran Due to the variety of links between the sources and the loads N2KView may switch off loads that are not connected to the overloaded source This is the safest way to ensure that all the sources are protected under all conditions without reprogramming the system each time the Power Distribution is changed The estimated Current Draw for each load must be programmed into N2KView in the Load Shedding Dialog Only Loads controlled by the Moritz AC box Moritz DC box or Maretron s DCR100 are candidates for load shedding The Moritz DC box and DCR100 would need to switch an AC load indirectly through a relay 12 3Startup On startup Load Shedding will always be disabled To enable Load Shedding open the Commande amp Settings Tab and then press the Load Shedding button Click on the Load Shedding Enabled box and press Apply or Save 12 4Shedding Loads If enabled N2KView will start shedding loads switching off the breakers in order when the current reported by any of the sources meet or exceed the Load Shedding Current configured by the user for that source The current is averaged over the Delay Between Sheds period specified in the Load Shedding Dialog In the case of a multi phase source the current reported will be the average of the maximum currents reported by each phase If individual phase cu
263. onitors the Reactive Power on Phase B of a Utility Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 3 19 Phase B Real Power Monitors the Real Power on Phase B of a Utility Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 3 20 Phase BC Line Line Voltage Monitors the RMS voltage between Phase B and Phase C of a Utility Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 3 21 Phase C Apparent Power Monitors the Apparent Power being sourced from a Utility on phase C Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 3 22 Phase C Current Monitors the AC RMS electrical current being sourced from a Utility on phase C Revision 3 6 3 Page 317 Maretron Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 3 23 Phase C Frequency Monitors the frequency of phase C of a Utility Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 3 24 Phase C Line Neutral Voltage Monitors the RMS voltage between Phase C and neutral of a Utility Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 3 25 Phase C Power Factor Monitors the Power Factor of Phase C of a Utility Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 3 26 Phase C Reactive Power Monitors the Reactive Power on Phase C of a Utility Alert Ty
264. onnection Email Connection SM S Text Connection Available N2KServer IP Addresses N2KServer IPG100 SN 1620002 found at 10 0 0 67 N2KServer IPG100 SN 1639907 found at 10 0 0 43 Figure 35 Connections Settings Dialog The connection settings dialog can be configured with alternative ways to access the server Whenever the Connect button is pressed it will try to connect to the first N2KServer if this fails it tries the 2 and then if this fails it tries the Cloud Server This sequence is repeated until a connection is made Having the Use xxx Server box unchecked will cause this option to be skipped Once a connection is made it is held and the other options are not tried On a laptop you may configure the 15 server with the local IP address of the server on the vessel and check the Cloud Server That way N2KView will Revision 3 6 3 Page 99 Maretran attempt the local connection first if you are off the boat the local connection will fail and you will fall back to the Cloud Server Or if you have a primary IPG100 and backup USB100 with a PC server on your network enter both their IP Addresses and if the primary fails you will automatically fall back to the backup 9 4 5 1 1 Available N2KServer IP Addresses If N2KView detects any N2KServers on the local network it will populate this with a list of the servers found It gives the serial number and IP Address of the Server But PC based servers and IPG100s are listed
265. or warning which was Active and has been accepted by the user An Accepted alert is indicated by a solid indicator in the Alert Status Bar and a solid color on the Alert Status Screen annunciators are silenced Normally an alert is a serious matter that requires immediate attention and requires a deliberate attempt to remove the condition that caused the alert Sometimes it isn t practical to immediately remove the condition that caused the alert accepting the alert will silence the annunciators while the appropriate user action is being taken To prevent an alert that has accepted by the user from being forgotten an accepted alert will transition back to being Active after a period of time set by the user If the condition causing the alert is rectified cleared the alert will transition to the Inactive state You may disable the alert at this time causing it to become a Disabled Alert Awaiting Cancel An Alert in the Awaiting Cancel state is an alert where the condition that caused the alarm or warning has been removed without the alert being accepted while it was Active To avoid such alerts from being missed by the user the alert is required to be cancelled You may cancel the alert at this time causing it to become an nactive Alert or you may disable the alert causing it to become a Disabled Alert Should the condition trigger the alert again the alert will transition back to the Active state incrementing a counter which is display
266. ore Options If you selected Start Application after Installation N2KView will be run automatically Revision 3 6 3 Page 60 Maretron 15 Setup Maretron N2KView Installer Completing the Maretron N2KView Installer Setup Wizard Setup has finished installing Maretron N2K View Installer on your computer The application may be launched by selecting the installed icons in the Start Menu folder desktop or Quick Launch bar Click Finish to exit Setup V Register this copy of N2KView required for support Figure 19 Maretron N2K View Installation Wizard Completion Page After pressing Finish you will be given the opportunity to register your software and start using N2KView Please make sure to register your software in order to qualify for technical assistance The installation is now complete To run the N2KView software click on the N2KView icon in the Start Menu desktop or Quick Launch bar When N2KView starts you will be given the option to enter the demo mode which has simulated data or to accept the terms of the license agreement and start monitoring live data Revision 3 6 3 Page 61 Maretran 6 6 Installing Cameras N2KView is designed to display data from IP cameras produced by AXIS Communications The cameras are connected to the computer running N2KView via Ethernet The following cameras are currently supported Axis 212 PTZ Network Camera This is a wall mounted camera with software
267. ot applicable 10 4 16 3 Cloud Server Percent Remaining Monitors the percentage of Data Bandwidth remaining to the Cloud Server for the current month Revision 3 6 3 Page 342 Maretran Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Instances not applicable 10 4 16 4 Cloud Server Percent Used Monitors the percentage of Data Bandwidth used to the Cloud Server for the current month Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Instances not applicable N2KServer Monitors the status of the connection to N2KServer Alert Types Server Disconnected Alert Instances not applicable 10 4 17 Navigation N2KView is not a primary navigator that is it does not provide means for entering and storing waypoint and route data N2KView can receive information on the current leg of the voyage from a primary navigation device such as a chart plotter or PC with navigation software and NMEA 2000 interface and display the following information 10 4 17 1 Bearing Origin to Destination Monitors the direction from the origin waypoint to the destination waypoint Alert Types Direction Alert Data Unavailable Alert 10 4 17 2 Bearing to Waypoint Monitors the bearing to the destination waypoint Alert Types Direction Alert Data Unavailable Alert Revision 3 6 3 Page 343 Maretron 10 4 17 3 Course Over Ground Monitors the current course over ground Alert Types Course Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 17 4 Cross Track Error Monitors
268. peed or barometric pressure and possibly also by a particular instance of that data type for example the speed of the Port Engine All of the available parameters that N2KView can display are listed in Section 9 6 on page 181 A device is required to be connected to the NMEA 2000 bus and producing the relevant data for it to be displayed 9 1 4 Components Each parameter may be displayed by a component A component is a graphical display that is generally dedicated to the display of the value of a parameter Examples of components include the digital display a gauge and a bar graph A Revision 3 6 3 Page 81 Maretron complete listing of available component types appears in Section 0 on page 133 If data is not available for a component the component will display a dash and the indicators for gauge type components will be at the end stop or peg More complex components such as the compass will show a dimmed needle to indicate data not being available Where secondary data is not available to perform a calculation to get the required parameter every effort is made to inform the user what secondary data is missing e g If variation is not available to convert Magnetic Heading to True Heading the digital display will show No VAR 9 1 5 Favorite Screens and Parameter Display N2KView employs the concept of favorite screens These screens are user customizable to display a group of components which generally will dis
269. pes Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 3 27 Phase C Real Power Monitors the Real Power on Phase C of a Utility Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 318 Maretran 10 4 3 28 Phase CA Line Line Voltage Monitors the RMS voltage between Phase C and Phase A of a Utility Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 3 29 Total Apparent Power Monitors the Total Apparent Power being sourced from a Utility on all phases Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 3 30 Total Power Factor Monitors the Total Power Factor of a Utility across all phases Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 3 31 Total Reactive Power Monitors the Total Reactive Power on all phases of a Utility Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 3 32 Total Real Power Monitors the Total Real Power on all phases of a Utility Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 3 33 Total kWh Export Monitors the Total kilowatt hours exported from a Utility Revision 3 6 3 Page 319 Maretron Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 3 34 Total kWh Import Monitors the Total kilowatt hours imported to a Utility Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Da
270. play related parameters such as engine data navigation data tank levels and so on N2KView comes with the Alerts screen plus eight pre defined favorite screens Engines DC Systems AC Systems Navigation Environment Tanks and Miscellaneous You may use the favorite screens as provided modify them or delete them and create your own screens from scratch There is no limit to the number of favorite screens you can create The set of favorite screen plus the configuration of the alerts and cameras is called the system configuration The system configuration may be saved to disk either as a backup or for transfer to another computer or saved directly to N2KServer where it may be downloaded by another N2KView Client 9 1 6 Protecting the System Configuration Once the configuration has been set up it may be protected by a password which prevents further authoring of the configuration by unauthorized users The authoring password is set in the Change Password Dialog see section 9 4 3 Any attempt to enter a dialog that has the potential to change the configuration will result in the Password Dialog being displayed Revision 3 6 3 Page 82 Maretran Enter Password You must enter the authoring password before Continuing Forgotten Password The password is encrypted and stored within the Configuration File itself Should you forget the password Maretron can help you retrieve it after sending a copy of your Configuratio
271. pplies 19 2Configure the camera a Start the AXIS Camera Management Tool by selecting it in the list of All Programs under the Windows Start menu Revision 3 6 3 Page 407 Maretron Adobe Device Central CS3 Za Adobe ExtendScript Toolkit 2 S Adobe Extension Manager CS3 Adobe Flash CS3 Professional Adobe Flash CS3 Video Encoder amp Apple Software Update e AXIS Camera Management e Default Programs Internet Explorer E PowerDVD DX EE TetPad IE Windows Calendar B Windows Contacts ll Windows Defender SCH Windows Fax and Scan Windows Live Messenger Download Gi Windows Mail D Windows Media Player Windows Meeting Space Windows Movie Maker Windows Photo Gallery amp Windows Update SA E 8 Va CG GER b The resulting screen will show the cameras on the network that have been detected In this case two video servers were found in the network Note the address allocated to the server you will need to enter it in the Camera Editor of N2KView This can either be the IP address 10 0 0 94 or the camera s name if the address is provided dynamically from a DNS Server axis 00408c93ad7a phx aiec com agement File Edit View Tools Help P BB 8 BH 2 ws SB 0 B Search AssignIP Upgrade Add Edit User Configure Template Editor Apply Template Home Page Refresh Views G i E mn Ki N Devi Name Status Address Serial Number Model 7 B R AXIS 2415 00408C8D936C Credentials
272. quare inch Instances 253 9 6 9 6 Engine Oil Temperature Displays the engine s oil temperature Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units Degrees Centigrade Degrees Fahrenheit Instances 253 9 6 9 7 Exhaust Gas Temperature Displays the temperature of the engine s exhaust gases Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units Degrees Centigrade Degrees Fahrenheit Instances 253 9 6 9 8 Fuel Consumption Units Displays the engine s fuel usage volume distance This is the inverse of fuel economy Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph imp gals kilometer liters kilometer gals kilometer imp gals nautical mile liters nautical mile gals nautical mile imp gals statute mile liters statute mile gals statute mile Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 205 Maretron 9 6 9 9 Fuel Economy Displays the engine s fuel usage distance volume Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units kilometers imp gal kilometers liter kilometers gal nautical miles imp gal nautical miles liter nautical miles gal statute miles imp gal statute miles liter statute miles gal Instances 253 9 6 9 10 Fuel Rate Displays the rate of fuel consumption for the engine Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units imp gal hr Liter hr gal hr Instances 253 9 6 9 11 Hours Displays the number of hours of operation reported by the engi
273. r left tab position If the Alerts Module is licensed pressing or left clicking on the Alerts Tab causes the Alerts Screen to appear EJ N2kView Helm Figure 92 Alerts Tab Platinum Alerts are not licensed in the Base version of N2kView The Alerts Tab will appear semi transparent and will not respond to pressing or clicking EI N2kView Helm Test Wind Ne Figure 93 Alerts Tab Standard 10 3 3 Alert Status Screen The Alert Status Screen is a tabular listing of alerts in log form where you can view all pending and past alerts Extensive sorting capabilities allow you to Revision 3 6 3 Page 261 Maretron quickly find alerts of interest An example of the Alert Status Screen is shown below R GY N2kView Helm Alert Status EZ Show Inactive J Show Disabled ion ree ste ce ts Lean zeng Le wit Bes 2010 02 26 00 30 08 Awaiting Helm Deactivated Engine Room Condition Rectified without ACCEPT Accept Edit 2010 02 26 00 30 57 Active Helm 14 9v 72 Starter Batt Volts Se Accept Edit 2010 02 26 00 30 57 Active Helm 14 9V 101 House Batt Volts i __ _ Cancel Edit ITT Cet Helm Deactivated o Fie Starter Batt Volts House Batt Vots 8 E Fire Aft Dock E UNDERWAY Figure 94 Alert Status Screen The Alert Status Screen consists of a table with several rows Each row of the table describes an alert Be default Inactive Alerts and Disabled alerts are not shown You may ch
274. r or contemporaneous representations or agreements of the parties whether written or oral No waiver or modification of any of the terms hereof shall be valid unless in writing and signed by the parties No waiver of any breach shall be deemed a waiver of any subsequent breach If any provision of this Agreement is held to be invalid or unenforceable the remaining provisions shall not be affected Revision 3 6 3 Page 406 Maretron 19 Example of Setting up the AXIS Quad Video Server 241Q Please read the installation manual that came with your video server This chapter should not be considered a substitute for reading the Axis documentation 19 1Install the AXIS Camera Manager a Insert the disk supplied with the video server into the computer and navigate to the Axis Camera Management Setup program If the autorun feature of the CD does not work the setup program can be found at lt cd drive gt AutoPlay Software ACMSetup exe J Setup AXIS Camera Management Sex Welcome to the AXIS Camera Management Setup Wizard This will install AXIS Camera Management 2 00 on your computer It is recommended that you close all other applications before continuing Click Next to continue or Cancel to exit Setup b Continue to press next until the installation is complete and then press Finish c Connect the camera to the server and the server to the network and connect their respective power su
275. r Delay below High Alert Clear Point Ten Inactive Pen Active Pen Awaiting Cancel High Alert transitions to the Awaiting Cancel state after Clear Delay seconds Operator Cancels Alert Figure 102 High Alert Parameters A high alert is triggered i e becomes an active alert once an input signal has risen above the High Alert Set Point and the Set Delay time has elapsed If the Set Delay is set to zero then the alert is immediately triggered once the input signal rises above the High Alert Set Point The Set Delay is used to reduce false or spurious alerts As an example setting the Set Delay to 5 seconds will Revision 3 6 3 Page 274 Maretron eliminate any temporary transitions of the input signal above the High Alert Set Point lasting less than 5 seconds from triggering an alert Once the alert is triggered it becomes an active alert An alert remains active until e The input signals falls below the High Alert Clear Point and the Clear Delay time has elapsed If the Clear Delay is set to zero then the alert immediately transitions to the Awaiting Cancel once the input signal falls below the High Alert Clear Point as shown in the example above e The user accepts the alert in which case it transitions into the Accepted state The Clear Delay is used to reduce false or spurious alerts 10 3 6 4 1 2 Trigger Configuration Trigger Configuration Accept Re trigger Period Minutes Seconds High Alert Set
276. r Windows Genice ee 392 15 1 2 N2KServer Service MANAG aieiecevssedesesiensseeuanesavaysuaneeersuenavevdunvavanbvenanennne 392 15 1 3 Minimizing N2KServer Service Manager 395 15 1 4 Terminating N2KServer Service Manager 395 15 1 5 Security and User Accounts ee 395 16 Troubleshooting EE 396 17 Technical Suppor E 400 18 Maretron Software License Agreement 401 Revision 3 6 3 Page 22 Maretron 19 Example of Setting up the AXIS Quad Video Server 2410 407 19 1 Install the AXIS Camera Managet cccceeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeenensseeenes 407 19 2 Configure the camera mnnrnrnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnevnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnrnnnennnnnnenen 407 Revision 3 6 3 Page 23 Maretron Table of Figures Figure 1 Maretron N2KServer Setup Wizard Welcome Page 43 Figure 2 N2KServer Installation Wizard License Agreement Page 44 Figure 3 N2KServer Installation Wizard Select Start Menu Folder Page 44 Figure 4 Select Destination Location Page rr rnvrnnnnnnnnvnnnrnnnnnvnnnnnrnnvennnnnnnnene 45 Figure 5 N2KServer Installation Wizard Select Additional Tasks Page 46 Figure 6 N2KServer Installation Wizard Ready to Install Page 46 Figure 7 N2KServer Installation Wizard Installing Page rrrrrrrrrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnr 47 Figure 8 N2KServer Installation Wizard Hardware Setup Page 47 Figure 9 N2KServer Installation Wizard Passwords Page seeseeeeeseeeeee 48 Fi
277. r ground COG and speed over ground SOG 9 6 33 1 3 True Displays the angle and speed of the wind relative to the vessel centerline vessel s speed is subtracted from apparent wind direction calculated using speed through water STW or speed over ground SOG depending on the unit setting of the Wind True Vessel Referenced parameter under Global Settings on the Units screen see Section 9 4 8 3 on page 114 for details Revision 3 6 3 Page 253 Maretran 9 6 33 2 Speed References Apparent Ground True Component Types Apparent Digital Wind Angle Line Graph Component Types Ground Digital Component Types True Digital Wind Angle Units Beaufort kilometers hour nautical miles hour miles hour Revision 3 6 3 Page 254 Maretran 10 Alerts 10 1Overview The optional Alerts Module of N2KView contains a comprehensive alerts capability allowing an alert to be issued when a parameter value crosses the threshold that you choose You may set alerts for almost any parameter that you can view with N2KView N2K View alerts work with multiple instances of N2KView Stations and DSM150 Displays http www maretron com products dsm150 php DSM250 Displays http Awww maretron com products dsm250 php You can define alerts as being either local appearing only on the N2KView Station on which you defined them of global appearing on all N2KView Stations on the network that are equipped with a Alerts Module
278. r more information Pressing OK will display the video in the default quad steam format Change the source to match the camera that you are installing AXIS a AXIS 241Q Video Server Live View Setup Help gt format Source Motion JPEG Video 3 v Revision 3 6 3 Page 412 Maretron i lf required rotate the picture in the image page by clicking on Setup at the top of the screen then Video and Image on the left and navigate down to the Image menu under the camera number of your choice Remember to press Save after selection the correct rotation AXIS a AXIS 241Q Video Server Live View Setup Help Basic Configuration Image Settings O Image Appearanxe Video A Image ep Image Live View Config Event Configuration System Options Mace text dene ze at too v of image About j Test that you can see the video by selecting Live View at the top of the page If you are requested to install the Axis Media Control Plugin do so Set the Source to match the input to which you have connected your camera on the server You may need to change the Video Format to Motion JPEG to see a picture Revision 3 6 3 Page 413 Maretron AXIS a AXIS 241Q Video Server Live View Setup Help Revision 3 6 3 Page 414
279. r privileges as those privileges are required by Windows in order to install device drivers Revision 3 6 3 Page 42 Maretron Insert the N2KServer CD ROM into your computer s CD ROM drive The installer will automatically start unless you have disabled AutoPlay on the CD ROM drive If this is the case double click on the CD ROM drive in Windows Explorer to start the installer The Welcome screen will be shown next Please press Next gt to continue the installation Fey Setup Maretron N2KServer fo kel Welcome to the Maretron N2KServer Setup Wizard This wil install Maretron N2KServer 2 2 0 on pour computer It is recommended that you close all other app cations before contrwing Click Next to continue or Cancel to ext Setup Hen Ga Figure 1 Maretron N2KServer Setup Wizard Welcome Page The License Agreement screen will be shown next Please read the license agreement carefully If you agree with the terms of the license agreement please select I accept the agreement and then click Next gt to continue the installation If you select I do not accept the agreement the installer will terminate without installing the software Revision 3 6 3 Page 43 Maretron JB Setup Maretron N2KServer el BIS License Agreement Please read the following important information before continuing Please read the following License Agreement You must accept the terms of thes agreement
280. r14 Mg Annunciator18 I Annunciator 22 Il Annunciator 26 E Annunciator 30 Mg Annunciator 3 Mg Annunciator7 Mg Annunciator11 Mg Annunciator15 Mg Annunciator19 I Annunciator 23 I Annunciator 27 I Annunciator 31 Save Cancel Figure 119 Alert Action Editor Dialog Annunciator Actions Enable Annunciators This is a single check box that can be used to disable all the annunciators for this Alert Revision 3 6 3 Page 295 Maretron Enable Computer Sound This check box can be used to disable this computer s sound for this Alert It does not disable the sounds generated by remote N2KView stations or DSM250s in response to this Alert Tone N2KView supports the presence of up to sixteen different annunciators on the vessel All annunciators must sound with the same tone which is selected from a drop down list Tone General Emergency v No Tone Fire Carbon Monoxide Continuous Figure 120 Annunciator Tone Selection Annunciators For each alert you may choose which annunciators sound the selected tone For example you may wish the annunciator in the owner s stateroom to sound in the event of a general emergency or if smoke is detected but not if the engine coolant temperature is too high If the annunciator has been programmed with a label N2KView will get the label from the annunciator and append the label to the instance number This makes it easier to know which annunciator is being refere
281. re available for iPod Touch iPhone iPad and most Android devices The service offered by the server to the stations clients is access to the NMEA 2000 network data that the server receives from the NMEA 2000 network via its NMEA 2000 gateway The network over which this service is offered is implemented as a TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol network which is discussed in the next section Revision 3 6 3 Page 70 Maretran 8 1 1 Examples of NMEA 20000 Client Server Architectures N2KServer may run on a Windows PC using Maretron s USB100 gateway see Figure 23 and Figure 24 or N2KServer may run directly on an IPG100 see Figure 26 USB100 Figure 23 LAN Client Server Architecture Example with USB100 Figure 23 shows an example of a Local Area Network LAN connection including the PC to NMEA 2000 network connection through a USB100 gateway A copy of N2KServer must run on the PC connected to the USB100 and an N2KView Hardware License Key must be plugged in to the PC to supply sufficient licenses for the maximum number of simultaneously connected clients N2KView clients may run on either the PC connected to the USB100 or to another PC connected to the router or to a laptop or mobile device connected wirelessly Revision 3 6 3 Page 71 Maretron gt goo L v USB100 A EA TZ Z kT Figure 24 WAN Client Server Architecture Example through the Internet Figure 24
282. red by the alert is met 10 2 3 Alert Priority Each alert has a priority which you can define ranging from 0 to 4000 with 0 the highest or most important priority and 4000 the lowest or least important priority Alerts can be ordered many different ways on the Alerts Screen For example ordering by priority is done by clicking on the column header entitled Priority or listing the log entry chronologically is done by clicking on the column header entitled time Data can be sorted on any column by clicking the column heading Revision 3 6 3 Page 256 Maretran 10 2 4 Vessel Alert Operating Modes You can configure alerts to operate in one or more fixed operating modes 1 disabled 2 moored 3 underway or 4 anchored This allows you to easily enable or disable groups of individual alarms depending on the vessel s operating mode The Vessel Alert Operating Mode is set under the Alerts Setup tab Disabled All alerts are disabled This mode should be used when the vessel is in storage drydock or otherwise out of operation Moored This mode is used when the vessel is secured to a structure that is permanently attached to the ground like a pier wharf dock or mooring buoy Underway This mode is used when the vessel is not moored nor anchored Anchored This mode is used when the vessel is secured to the sea floor with an anchor User 1 This is a user defined mode User 2 This is a user defined mode 10 2 5 Alert St
283. reen to which the needle is pointing Min Max markers may be added to a gauge by clicking on a check box in the Component Editor These marks are associated with the gauge itself That means that if two gauges are displaying the same data each will maintain its own values for the min max marks and they can be reset independently Revision 3 6 3 Page 150 Maretron Starter Battery Figure 60 Gauge with Min Max Markers The min mark is a blue triangle just outside the color band and is pushed to the left by the needle The max mark is a red triangle just outside the3 color band and is pushed to the right by the needle Pressing the Reset button will move both marks to the current needle position The min and max marks may be enabled and disabled independent of each other The Reset button is displayed only if either of the marks is enabled Revision 3 6 3 Page 151 Maretron 9 5 14 GPS Status The GPS Status component shows the following data about the selected GPS receiver GPS operating mode 2D 3D DGPS Satellite signal strength up to 12 satellites Satellite azimuth and elevation up to 12 satellites Position HDOP Horizontal dilution of precision Time Date Accuracy of position calculation The satellite that is being used as the SBAS satellite is highlighted in red A user defined title appears at the top of the GPS status component The GPS status component is square in a
284. renbeceneesradenias 312 10 4 2 31 Total Reactive Power 312 10 4 2 32 Total Real EE Hva 313 10 4 2 33 Total kWh Export 313 10 4 2 34 Total KWh IMP OM sec cesc ccd nsesecioieendedsicvedetadinndedndalvedvadebaddedevmdesdstedebnds 313 10 43 AG NEY E 314 10 4 3 1 Average UTEN 314 10 4 3 2Average Frequency EE 314 10 4 3 3Average Line Line Voltage ee 314 10 4 3 4Average Line Neutral Voltage rrnnnnvrrrrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnnrnrnnnnrrnnnnen 314 10 4 3 5Phase A Apparent e 314 TONS GP SEE E 315 10 43 Phase A Frequency A eeeeieieger en geed 315 10 4 3 8Phase A Line Neutral Voltage AAA 315 Revision 3 6 3 Page 16 Maretron 10 4 3 9Phase A Power Factor EEN 315 10 4 3 10 Phase A Reactive Power 315 10 4 3 11 Phase A Real Power 315 10 4 3 12 Phase AB Line Line Voltage EE 316 102313 Phase B Apparent POW E 316 10 4 3 14 Phase B e DI EE 316 10 43 15 Phase e H woiscescsscucicccunossegessooaionbdesioennisasdabngepegannieseiaoadanans 316 10 4 3 16 Phase B Line Neutral Voltage rrrrrvrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnrrnnnnen 316 10 4 3 17 Phase B Power Factor ggeemgredtiegedeg ieperikegZeteed deeeeed ege det ege eregt 317 10 4 3 18 Phase B Reactive e 317 10 4 3 19 Phase B Real Power 317 10 4 3 20 Phase BC Line Line Voltage EE 317 10 4 3 21 Phase C Apparent Power 317 10 4 3 22 Phase e EE 317 10 4 3 23 Phase a le E 318 10 4 3 24 Phase C Line Neutral Voltage sssssssnenneeeeeeennrnnrnrnnserrrrnrnnnnnneene 318 10 4
285. resent on the Hardware License Key Standard Licenses this will show the number of Standard Licenses that are present on the Hardware License Key Statistics Number of Client Connections this shows the number of N2KView stations currently connected to the N2KServer Messages Transmitted this shows the total number of NMEA 2000 messages transmitted to the connected stations since the N2KServer was last started Messages Received this shows the total number of messages received from N2KView stations since the N2KServer was last started The Start button is used to start the N2KServer and the Stop button is used to stop the N2KServer NMEA 2000 Data Selection Simulated Data this radio button can be selected or deselected only when the N2KServer is stopped When this radio button is selected the N2KServer will Revision 3 6 3 Page 393 Maretron output a selection of simulated NMEA 2000 messages that are sufficient to populated the favorite screens that are in the configuration file that is shipped with the N2KView station This selection should be used only for demonstration or testing purposes Live Network Data this radio button can be selected or deselected only when the N2KServer is stopped When this radio button is selected the N2KServer will output data from the NMEA 2000 gateway which is selected in the Gateway Serial Port dropdown list This radio button should be selected for norma
286. ress of the N2KServer computer This change in the port address is known as the ability to do Port Address Translation as well as Network Address Translation Not all routers have this ability please consult the documentation that came with your router for details N2KView must then be set up to request a connection to the WAN IP Address of the router and the new port number 8 5 Static and Dynamic IP Addressing If you wish to use N2KView to view data from an N2KServer on a WAN through an Internet connection please read this section If your N2KServer and N2KView computers are on the same LAN you may skip this section If you request a Static IP Address from your ISP when you set up your Internet connection the WAN IP address will always be the same If you didn t make this request your ISP will assign you a Dynamic IP Address which may actually Revision 3 6 3 Page 75 Maretran change from time to time In this way the ISP only needs to have enough addresses to cover its customers who are connected to the Internet at any given time If you stop or lose your Internet connection your Dynamic IP address will be released and may be reassigned to someone else If you wish to connect to an N2KServer from outside your vessel s LAN via an Internet connection you have two choices First you can request a static IP address from the ISP for your vessel secondly you may register your N2KServer s IP address with a dyna
287. ressure Monitors the pressure of a user defined fluid type Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 347 Maretron 10 4 19 Rudder 10 4 19 1 Rudder Angle Monitors the angle of the vessel s rudder as indicated by the rudder sensor Alert Types High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Units degrees Instances 4 Revision 3 6 3 Page 348 Maretron 10 4 20 Speed Distance 10 4 20 1 Speed Over Ground Monitors the speed over ground of the vessel relative to the earth not the water Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 20 2 Speed Through Water Monitors the speed of the boat relative to the water Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 20 3 Total Log Monitors the total distance traveled by the vessel since the log indicator was installed Alert Types High Alert Data Unavailable Alert 10 4 20 4 Trip Log Monitors the distance traveled by the vessel since the trip indication of the log indicator was last reset Alert Types High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Revision 3 6 3 Page 349 Maretran 10 4 21 Tank 10 4 21 1 Level Monitors the level of fluid in the tank as a percentage of its capacity Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Source Fuel Fresh Water Waste Water Live Well Oil Black Water Reserved 0 7 Instances 16 10 4 21 2 Remaining Moni
288. rrent leg of the voyage from a primary navigation device such as a chart plotter or PC with navigation software and NMEA 2000 interface and display the following information 9 6 19 1 Bearing Origin to Destination Displays the direction from the origin waypoint to the destination waypoint Component Types Digital Instances 253 Units True Magnetic depends on Global Settings in Units Setup tab 9 6 19 2 Bearing to Waypoint Displays the bearing to the destination waypoint Component Types Heading Digital Instances 253 Units True Magnetic depends on Global Settings in Units Setup tab 9 6 19 3 Course Over Ground Displays the current course over ground Component Types North Up Rose Course Up Rose Cardinal Digital Instances 253 Units Degrees True Degrees Magnetic depends on Global Settings in Units Setup tab Revision 3 6 3 Page 229 Maretran 9 6 19 4 Cross Track Error Displays the cross track error minimum distance from the boat to the programmed route Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units kilometers nautical miles statute miles 9 6 19 5 Destination Waypoint No Displays the number of the destination waypoint in the current route Component Types Digital Instances 253 Units number 9 6 19 6 Distance to Waypoint Displays the distance to the destination waypoint Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units kilo
289. rrents are not reported then the average phase current will be used Breakers that are Locked will not be considered for Load Shedding Sources that do not report current will not be protected for Load Shedding Sources that do have a Load Shedding Current or whose Load Shedding Current has been set to zero will not be considered for Load Shedding This is the way to indicate to N2KView that a source is not being used 12 5Restoring Loads If enabled shed loads will be restored in reverse order when N2KView calculates that adding the load back will not cause the current for each source to rise above 90 of the Load Shedding Current for that source The assumption that the current drawn by the load to be restored may increase the current required by Revision 3 6 3 Page 365 Maretron any of the sources by that amount ensures that none of the sources may be overloaded Breakers that are Locked will not be considered for restoring Only breakers that have been turned off previously by N2KView because of Load Shedding will be considered for restoration The Breaker Status reported in the Load Shedding Dialog will be Load Shed If any source has a Load Shedding Current programmed i e the source is known be in use and the current reported by that source is not available displayed as a dash NO loads will be restored When load shedding is disabled all loads that have been shed will be restored Revision 3 6 3 Page 366 Mar
290. rs in the Gateway Serial Port list in the N2MServer Service Manager Make sure that the IP address of the computer running N2KServer is entered into the Server IP Address textbox on the Connection page of the N2KView station Make sure that the Server Port Number textbox of the Connection page of the N2KView station has the value 6544 in it Make sure that the value entered into the Enter the Encryption Password textbox on the Connection page of the N2KView station matches the value entered into the Revision 3 6 3 Page 396 Maretran Server Password textbox of N2KServer Service manager Make sure that the IP address of the N2KServer computer is accessible from the computer running the N2KView station You can verify this by opening a command prompt in Windows go to the Start menu then select Accessories and then click on Command Prompt In the command propt window that enters type telnet lt ip address gt 6544 If this connection succeeds you will see just a blank screen with a flashing cursor and you have confirmed the IP address is visible If the connection fails with a message sich as Count not open connection to the host on port 6544 Connect Failed then the IP address is not visible and you should try the remedies that follow in this list or consult a networking expert Make sure that any firewall software on the N2KServer computer is configured to allow incoming connections on port 6544 Mak
291. rt Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 10 2 Barometric Pressure Monitors the atmospheric barometric pressure Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 10 3 Dew Point Monitors the current dew point based on outside air temperature and humidity Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert 10 4 10 4 Engine Room Temperature Monitors the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Engine Room Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 10 5 Heat Index Monitors the current heat index based on outside air temperature and humidity Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 333 Maretran 10 4 10 6 Inside Humidity Monitors the relative humidity from a humidity sensor set up with a source of Inside Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 10 7 Inside Temperature Monitors the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Inside Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 10 8 Live Well Temperature Monitors the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Live Well Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 10 9 Main Cabin Temperature Monitors the temperature from a temperature
292. rt kilometers imp gal kilometers liter kilometers gal nautical miles imp gal nautical miles liter nautical miles gal statute miles imp gal statute miles liter statute miles gal 10 4 11 5 Total Fuel Remaining NOTE This function requires the optional Fuel Management Module and Alerts Module to be Licensed Monitors the total amount of fuel remaining in all selected fuel tanks Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Revision 3 6 3 Page 337 Maretran Units imp gal liter gal 10 4 11 6 Total Fuel Level NOTE This function requires the optional Fuel Management Module and Alerts Module to be Licensed This component monitors the fractional level of the fuel in all the tanks setup with tank type of Fuel and whose instance numbers match those in the supplied list This is computed by dividing the total fuel remaining by the total fuel capacity Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Units 10 4 11 7 Total Fuel Remaining NOTE This function requires the optional Fuel Management Module and Alerts Module to be Licensed Monitors the total amount of fuel remaining in all selected fuel tanks Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Units imp gal liter gal 10 4 11 8 Total Trip Fuel Used NOTE This function requires the optional Fuel Management Module and Alerts Module to be Licensed Monitors the total amount of fuel used by selected engines
293. rver o 2 8 Completing the Maretron N2KServer Setup Wizard Setup has finished installing Maretron N2KServer on your computer The application may be launched by selecting the installed icons Click Finish to exit Setup d Stat N2KServer Service Manager d Register this copy of N2KServer required for support Back LS Figure 10 N2KServer Installation Wizard Completion Page 6 4 Run N2KServer Note Before running N2KServer please make sure your USB gateway is connected to a USB port on your computer and also to a powered NMEA 2000 network The N2KServer Service Manager program is used to start stop and configure N2KServer The service manager s dialog box shown below has the following sections Revision 3 6 3 Page 49 Maretron a M N2KServer Service Manager Version 3 4 0 3 e Bx General N2KServer Status Running sec Hardware License Key Number 00659 Stop Available Used Base 1 0 Alerts 1 0 Fuel Management 1 0 Video 1 0 Control il 0 Statistics Number of Client Connections 0 Messages Transmitted 0 Messages Received 0 NMEA 2000 Data Selection Cc Cc Gateway Serial Port COM61 USB100 S N 1179904 Automatic Startup r Security Server Password AJ Figure 11 N2KServer Service Manager Window General This section shows whether the N2KServer is running as well as the serial number of the N2KServer Hardware License Key dongle It also
294. ry Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units Amperes Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 200 Maretran 9 6 6 5 Power Displays the DC power currently being provided by the battery Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units Watts kilowatts Instances 16 9 6 6 6 Ripple Voltage Displays the ripple voltage measured at the battery Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Volts Instances 253 9 6 6 7 Voltage Displays the voltage measured at the battery Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Volts Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 201 Maretran 9 6 7 Depth 9 6 7 1 Transducer Offset Displays the offset being used by a depth transducer Positive values represent distance from transducer to water line and negative values represent distance from the transducer to the keel Component Types Digital Units feet fathoms meters Instances 253 9 6 7 2 Water Below Transducer Displays the current reading from a depth transducer Component Types Digital Line Graph Units feet fathoms meters Instances 253 9 6 7 3 Water Depth includes offset Displays the current reading from a depth transducer plus the Transducer offset Component Types Digital Line Graph Units feet fathoms meters Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 202 Maretron 9 6 8 Electrical Distribution 9 6 8 1 Circuit Breaker Displays whether the specified circuit break
295. s Revision 3 6 3 Page 84 Maretron 9 2 Using N2KView This section describes how to operate the N2KView program after it is installed 9 2 1 The Opening Screen When you start N2KView the program will display an opening screen shown in Figure 29 below listing the title and software version of the program and asking you to accept the following agreement WARNING By pressing Accept you acknowledge that while Maretron products are designed to be accurate and reliable they should be used only as aids to navigation and vessel monitoring and not as a replacement for traditional aids and techniques If you accept the warning press the Accept button and the program will change into operational mode If you do not accept the warning press the Exit button and the program will terminate Maretron N2KView Vessel Monitoring and Control System Software Version 3 2 20110111 WARNING By pressing Accept you acknowledge that while Maretron products are designed to be accurate and reliable they should be used only as aids to navigation and vessel monitoring and not as a replacement for traditional aids and techniques kennen kenn me kene Figure 29 N2KView Opening Screen Alternatively pressing the Enter Demo Button will take you into a demo mode which showcases all the possible components with simulated data Revision 3 6 3 Page 85 9 2 2 The Operational Mode Screen Once you have accepted the
296. s Video components are only available with the purchase of a Video module When displaying video one of several component types may be chosen 9 5 30 1 Video and Video with PTZ Controls LLI amp GB Figure 83 Video Component Example This layout matches the format of the digital control The first option Video will not display the control buttons whether the camera has PTZ capabilities or not Use this component type when you do not want the viewers to have control over the camera The second option will only display the PTZ controls if the camera has PTZ capability Revision 3 6 3 Page 176 Maretran 9 5 30 2 3 4 Video No Border Figure 84 3 4 Video No Border Component Example This component is designed to show video from cameras that are mounted sideways The title and controls are overlaid semi transparently on the video The video picture will be stretched to fit the display area The title may be set to nothing to remove the overlay 9 5 30 3 4 3 Video No Border Figure 85 4 3 Video No Border Component Example The video picture will be stretched to fit the display area The title may be set to nothing to remove the overlay Revision 3 6 3 Page 177 Maretron 9 5 30 4 16 9 Video No Border Figure 86 16 9 Video No Border Component Example This is designed to show video from cameras with widescreen aspect ratios The video picture will be stretched to fit the display area The title may b
297. s Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 351 Maretron 10 4 22 6 Engine Room Temperature Monitors the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Engine Room Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 22 7 Exhaust Gas Temperature Monitors the temperature of the engine s exhaust gases Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 22 8 Freezer Temperature Monitors the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Freezer Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 22 9 Heat Index Monitors the current heat index based on outside air temperature and humidity Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 22 10 Heating System Temperature Monitors the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Heating System Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 352 Maretron 10 4 22 11 Inside Temperature Monitors the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Inside Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 22 12 Live Well Temperature Monitors the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Live Well Alert Types Low
298. s Only when the watermaker has received the command and transmits new device parameters on the bus will the component to be updated with the new parameters received on the bus For details on the commands and values displayed please refer the documentation supplied with the watermaker Revision 3 6 3 Page 180 Maretron 9 6 Available Data Types The N2KView system organizes the various available data types into a two level system of data Categories and data Types Each data category consists of a number of closely related data types 9 6 1 AC Bus 9 6 1 1 Average Frequency Displays the average frequency of all AC phases on an AC bus Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units Hertz 9 6 1 2 Average Line Line Voltage Displays the average line to line RMS voltage of an AC bus Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Volts RMS Instances 253 9 6 1 3 Average Line Neutral Voltage Displays the average line to neutral RMS voltage of an AC bus Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Volts RMS Instances 253 9 6 1 4 Phase A Frequency Displays the frequency of phase A on an AC bus Revision 3 6 3 Page 181 Maretron Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Instances 253 Units Hertz 9 6 1 5 Phase A Line Neutral Voltage Displays the RMS voltage between phase A and neutral of an AC bus Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units Volts RMS Instances 253
299. s 2C and what products are required to generate the data to be d isplayed 3F gt Revision 3 6 3 Page 80 Maretran H N2KView This section details the configuration and operation of the N2KView station component of the N2KView System 9 1 General Concepts 9 1 1 Touch Screen Operation N2K View was designed so that all functions in operational mode can be performed with either a mouse or a touch screen It is still required to have a mouse and a keyboard to perform configuration of N2KView 9 1 2 Keyboard Operation A keyboard is required to configure N2KView There are a number of fields that need to be entered with text In normal operation if a keyboard is connected short cuts can be used to easily navigate from screen to screen In case there is no keyboard connected to the computer a virtual keyboard will be displayed on the screen the first time there is a need to enter textual data Pressing a key on a physical keyboard will remove the virtual keyboard from the display If you are using a physical keyboard and then unplug the physical keyboard this action cannot be detected by the program and the virtual keyboard will not appear The program needs to be restarted to enable the virtual keyboard again 9 1 3 Parameters The key concept of N2KView is the display of parameters A parameter is a piece of information about some function of the vessel The parameter is defined by a particular data type such as engine s
300. s Help v e A _ http 10 0 0 92 operator basic shtml w G Google P 2 Most Visited gt Getting Started A Latest Headlines Y 2 Search Web IJ amp Mail Shopping AXISA AXIS 241Q Video Server Live View Setup Help e Set the following parameters in the Users Page Note that after setting the parameters you will need to press the Save button at the bottom of the page i Enable anonymous login ii Enable anonymous PTZ control login Revision 3 6 3 Page 409 AXIS Basic Configuration nstructions 1 Users Sa Video amp Image Live View Config Event Configuration System Options About Maretran AXIS 241Q Video Server Live View Setup Help Users 2 User List User Name User Group Administrator Add Modify Remove User Settings d Enable anonymous viewer login no user name or password required Maximum number of simultaneous viewers limited to 20 0 20 Subsequent viewers will see blank image Ji Enable anonymous PTZ control login no user name or password required Save Reset f Set the following parameters in the TCP IP Page In this example we are hard coding the IP Address which is suitable for a simple network If you have a router e g a wireless router connected to your network then choose the option Obtain IP address via DHCP Note that after setting the parameters you will need to press the Save button at the bottom of
301. s Setup Screen 9 4 10 1 1 Screen List The Screen List appears in the upper left hand corner of the Screens Setup screen This list contains the names of all of the favorite screens you have defined In order to configure a particular favorite screen select its name in the Screen List by pressing on it Revision 3 6 3 Page 117 Maretron 9 4 10 2 Adding Screens In order to define a new favorite screen type the desired favorite screen name into the Title text box then enter the desired width of the favorite screen In square grids into the W text box and the desired height of the favorite screen in square grids into the H text box Finally press the Add New Screen button to add the newly defined favorite screen to the list and display the new empty favorite screen so that you can begin adding components to it 9 4 10 3 Deleting Screens In order to remove a favorite screen from your configuration select its name in the Screen List and then press the Remove Screen button 9 4 10 4 Renaming Screens In order to change the name of a favorite screen select its name in the Screen List edit the favorite screen s name in the Title text box under Screen Properties to the desired value and then press the Update Properties button The favorite screen will now appear in the screen list with the new name 9 4 10 5 Exporting Screens The layout of the current
302. s and other intellectual property in and to the SOFTWARE are and shall remain in Maretron and its suppliers To the extent that you may acquire any right or interest in or to the SOFTWARE other than the rights and license expressly granted to you herein you agree that you shall be deemed to have assigned such rights to Maretron This license shall not be considered a sale of the SOFTWARE 13 SEVERABILITY If any provision or any part of a provision of this Agreement shall be held invalid or unenforceable then the remaining portions of that provision and the remainder of the Agreement shall be construed as if not containing the particular invalid or unenforceable provision or portion thereof and the rights and obligations of each party shall be construed and enforced accordingly 14 ASSIGNMENT This Agreement and the license granted herein are personal to you and except as otherwise provided for herein they may not be transferred or assigned This Agreement and all terms and conditions contained herein shall be inure to the benefit of and be binding upon Maretron s successors and assigns Revision 3 6 3 Page 405 Maretron 15 WAIVER Failure to insist upon strict compliance with any of the terms or conditions of this Agreement shall not be deemed a waiver of such term or condition 16 ENTIRE AGREEMENT This Agreement contains the entire understanding of the parties hereto relating to the subject matter hereof and superseded all prio
303. s means that the address is static which makes the computer easier to find or assigned at each startup by a DHCP server typically found as part of a router The router can be configured to reserve a specific address for the computer and then assign that same address each time at startup If the router chooses a different address each time then the computer may be difficult to find on the network This is nota problem for a client such as N2KView but servers such as N2KServer or the IPG100 must be at a known address 8 3 NAT Network Address Translation If you wish to use N2KView to view data from an N2KServer on a WAN through an Internet connection please read this section If your N2KServer and N2KView computers are on the same LAN you may skip this section In the early days of the Internet each computer connected to the Internet had its own P address With the explosive growth of the Internet the number of distinct IP addresses is starting to run out It is no longer practical for an Internet Service Provider ISP to provide its customers with individual IP addresses for each component the customer wishes to connect to the Internet Rather the ISP Revision 3 6 3 Page 74 Maretron normally assigns each customer a single IP address and a router implementing Network Address Translation NAT is connected to the Internet connection sometimes referred to as the Wide Area Network or WAN connection on one side and to the
304. s true after the amount of Revision 3 6 3 Page 279 Maretron time in this field the alert will return to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert If a value of 0 00 is entered then the alert will never re trigger Set Delay The condition for the parameter being monitored must be in its error condition for at least the set delay time before the alert will become active An interesting use of the set delay when monitoring a bilge pump for example is to set the Set Delay to a large value say 20 minutes Now if the bilge pump runs for more than 20 minutes at a time the alert will be triggered Clear Delay The condition for the parameter being monitored must be not in its error condition for at least the clear delay time before the alert will become cleared 10 3 6 4 5 Off Alert As opposed to high and low alerts that are associated with analog input signals i e many different possible input values there are also switch alerts that are associated with a binary input value sometimes called on or off yes or no enabled or disabled set or reset active or inactive The switch alert is similar to the high and low alert except that there are no set or reset points The mere fact that the switch is seen as Off causes the alert to become an active alert assuming the Set Delay is set to zero Likewise if the switch being monitored is seen as On then the alert becomes inact
305. s water heaters and battery chargers when the load drawn from the supply exceeds a specified current This extra capacity then enables the use of other loads that require immediate use such as hair driers From version 4 5 N2KView will be equipped with two groups of Load Shedding to satisfy the needs of owners with two independent power systems Load Shedding requires the optional Control Module to be licensed 12 1Sources Each N2KView Load Shedding group is designed to monitor 4 power Sources simultaneously typically two generators and two shore supplies The Load Shed current is set up individually for each power source and the Load Shedding software will try to ensure that the current drawn from each of these sources does not exceed the current set Exceeding the current of a Utility Shore Supply will typically trip a breaker while exceeding the capability of a generator may damage the generator Sources may be Single Phase Split Phase or Three Phase Each Source requires a Maretron ACM100 to be connected to report the current supplied by that source For best performance the ACM100 should be configured as follows in the advanced configuration page e Damping Period V I F 100 ms e NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Phase A B C and Average Basic Quantities 500ms 12 2Loads N2KView Load Shedding can switch up to 10 loads Typically the only loads that one chooses to switch off are water heaters driers air c
306. se 261 10 3 4 Alerts Setup Tab Lummmsmenmvmmensn i emnvendnoktmaueniignekelee 264 1035 Alerts Setup Tele eougeeugegez eigegegege e C gedeeeedEgCeeed ege CdeegEe 265 VE RENN 267 10 3 6 1 Alert Definition Section u muwsskrnmnarssidmeniseres mms 268 103610 Eegeregie 268 10 3 6 1 2 PO EE 268 10 36 13 50006 gegen 269 103 6 ASS GROG N isene e EE E E E 269 10 3 6 1 5 SCAR EE 269 ln e Dee 270 VISET E le 270 Revision 3 6 3 Page 14 Maretran 10 3 6 1 8 Indicators Circuit Breakers ceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 270 WE 271 10 3 6 2Alert Enablement ccccccncscsenenesccescnencnenorentnesenehenencrandnessueceuecdnentnenenescueucnds 271 10 36 21 Enable Disable Control Laine s uminnbdtntsriee 271 103622 Operating MOGI SY sisusse Jemen 272 10 3 6 3Alert Editor Buttons Liane gen 272 10 3 6 3 1 Save and RE 272 10 3 6 3 2 ACON S rennene 272 le E 272 EEE ctr ccsusterereuteese ey venue viveyeeryhyaybenubueyiveyieaubewyieeusaautueybevimmbite 273 19 364 eege 274 EN Rei 274 10 3642 En EE 276 10 3 6 4 3 Data Unavailable Alert 278 10 3 6 44 al EE 279 12545 Off Ala 280 103646 Tripped EE 282 10 3 6 4 7 Server Disconnected Alert mrrrrrnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnn 283 10 3 6 4 8 Outside Radius Alert 284 10 3 6 4 9 Anchor Watch Alert EE 286 10 3 6 4 10 Inside Radius Met eenseiegriegeggeegegeegege gege eke EE NeeNe 288 10 3 6 4 11 GPS Quality Alert 289 10236412 Direction Alert Luummummni
307. se A of a generator Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 2 29 Total Apparent Power Monitors the Total Apparent Power being sourced from a generator on all phases Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 2 30 Total Power Factor Monitors the Total Power Factor of a generator across all phases Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 2 31 Total Reactive Power Monitors the Total Reactive Power on all phases of a generator Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 312 Maretron 10 4 2 32 Total Real Power Monitors the Total Real Power on all phases of a generator Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 2 33 Total kWh Export Monitors the Total kilowatt hours exported from a generator Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 2 34 Total kWh Import Monitors the Total kilowatt hours imported to a generator Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 313 Maretran 10 4 3 AC Utility 10 4 3 1 Average Current Monitors the average AC RMS current from a utility across all phases Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 3 2 Average Frequency Monitors the average frequency of the
308. seiensmmssjinejemininjmnh vunne 290 10 3 6 4 13 Course Alert enn 292 10 3 6 4 14 TmeAlent eeaeee ennnen ennenen ennenen nenen 292 10 3 7 Alert Actions RE EE 295 10 3 7 1 Annunciator Actions Tab EE 295 10 3 7 2 Switch Actions WAD vo sncttetetaassnactineutecetuastidussantdautunstbiaivenbsantwechbietwasssauicine 296 10 3 7 SEN Actions Tes 298 10 3 7 4Conditions for Sending an Email 300 10 3 7 5Email Message Format ENEE 300 10 3 7 6SMS Text Actions Tab 301 1024 Available Alerts vene 304 1041 AG BUS serer 304 10 4 1 1 Average Frequency EE 304 10 4 1 2Average Line Line Voltage ee 304 10 4 1 3Average Line Neutral Voltage AAA 304 10 4 1 4Phase A Frequency uansett iciceoeesouseeessduseosnees 305 10 4 1 5Phase A Line Neutral Voltage rrnnnnvrrrvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrrnnnnnne 305 10 4 1 6Phase AB Line Line Votage an 305 10 4 1 7 Phase B Freoguency EE 305 10 4 1 8Phase B Line Neutral Voltage AAA 305 10 4 1 9Phase BC Line Line Voltage ann 306 104110 Phase C FrEquendyum uunuuimmnmmininda mmeidneejdedoatttdemia n 306 10 4 1 11 Phase C Line Neutral Voltage AEN 306 Revision 3 6 3 Page 15 Maretran 10 4 1 12 Phase CA Line Line Voltage sesssssssennneeeseeeernnrnnnesserrrrrnnrnnneee 306 1042 AC GAGN are 307 10 4 2 1 Average e CT sscccccencianaieresnetenetcnanorentnedenehenencrandneisneuoueseremtnanenusguentnas 307 10 4 2 2Average Frequency EEN 307 Ee ER Ee 307 10 4 2 4 Average Line Neutral Voltage ornnnnvrrrnnnn
309. sensor set up with a source of Main Cabin Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 10 10 Outside Humidity Monitors the relative humidity from a humidity sensor set up with a source of Outside Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 334 Maretran 10 4 10 11 Outside Temperature Monitors the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of outside Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 10 12 Sea Temperature Monitors the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Sea Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 10 13 User Defined nnn Humidity Monitors the relative humidity from a humidity sensor set up with a source of User Defined nnn where nnn is a number from 128 to 144 Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 10 14 User Defined nnn Temperature Monitors the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of User Defined nnn where nnn is a number from 128 to 144 Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 10 15 Wind Chill Monitors the current wind chill based on outside air temperature and wind speed Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Revision 3 6 3 Page 3
310. sersessensersensens 101 9 4 5 1 11 eege eege gege dmudimdet 101 TELE PNG 101 9 4 5 1 13 Optional Software License s to Check Out 101 9 4 5 1 14 D SCONNEC EE 102 9 4 5 1 15 Connect EE 102 9 4 5 1 16 Connection SE Luaosamseanaanaaaamaanneoendaaneddaesne 102 9 4 5 2 Email Connection Section wicidvcicinesidiascicsdasaisnedatanasanevadaeadcsadavadavadaecddenes 103 9 4 5 2 1 Outgoing SMTP GenverhName 103 94522 EEN 103 9 4 5 2 3 Mail Account Userhame 104 9 4 5 2 4 Password EEN 104 945 25 Emal HOGS EEN 104 9 4 5 2 6 Default Email Address 104 TN Ve 104 9 4 5 2 8 Email Address Book 106 9 4 5 3 SMS Text Connection Section rrrvnnnnnnrrnnnnrrrrrvnnnnnnnernnnnrrrrrrnnnennennn 106 TET Eneste 107 94532 SMS Phone Ti e 107 92505 Signal Strength avsa 107 9 4 5 3 4 Default Phone Number 107 FASE TET 107 9 4 5 3 6 Phone BOOK Lavsssosensaegamuaaonaanndnnnaamumeannidet 107 9 4 6 Load New Configuration Dialog 107 9 4 6 1 L ad the BEEN EE 108 9 4 6 2 Load Configuration from Disk 108 9 4 6 3 Load Configuration from Server rrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnennn 109 9 4 7 Save Configuration Dialog 109 9 4 7 1 Save Configuration to Disk 110 9 4 7 2 Save Configuration to Server munningen 110 9 4 8 Units Setup Dialog eege ere eege 111 EE ARGU AGS acu caaccdapandinadeaeiansegennondahisanadnndenaseatbas Los aaeehieasidagedaaLeoetaahas 111 9 4 8 2 Default Late eerste 112 9 4 8 2 1 Atmospheric PDreseure 112 9 4 8 2 2 DEP d EE 11
311. shall either destroy or return to Maretron any and all copies of the SOFTWARE 7 GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS THE FOLLOWING ADDITIONAL RESTRICTIONS AND DISCLAIMERS MAY APPLY TO YOU Revision 3 6 3 Page 402 Maretron a U S GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS This SOFTWARE and accompanying documentation is provided with restricted rights Use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 or subparagraphs c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52 227 19 as applicable Manufacturer is Maretron LLP 9014 N 23rd Ave Suite 10 Phoenix AZ 85021 8 LIMITED WARRANTY AND DISCLAIMER Maretron warrants that the magnetic and or optical media on which this SOFTWARE is recorded is free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and operation Maretron does not warrant that this SOFTWARE is error free that it will perform without interruption or that it is compatible with products manufactured by any person or entity other than Maretron This SOFTWARE utilizes NMEA 2000 data for information which may contain errors Maretron does not warrant the accuracy of such information and you are advised that errors in such information may cause the SOFTWARE to give inaccurate readings The above warranty is exclusive and is in lieu of all others expr
312. sion of N2KView Fire Engine Room Active Alarms appear as flashing red indicators Clicking on this indicator will cause the alarm to become an Accepted Alarm and the indicator will change to solid red Accepted Alarms appear as solid red indicators Awaiting Cancel Alarms appear as dark indicators with a red border and an x on the right hand side of the indicator When you click on Revision 3 6 3 Page 390 Maretran this indicator the alarm will become Inactive and will be removed from the Alert Status Bar Inactive Alarms and Disabled Alarms do not appear on the Alerts Page starter Batt vors Active Warnings appear as flashing yellow indicators Clicking on this indicator will cause the warning to become an Accepted Warning and the indicator will change to solid yellow Accepted Warnings appear as solid yellow indicators neet SI Awaiting Cancel Warnings appear as dark indicators with a yellow border and an x on the right hand side of the indicator When you click on this indicator the alert will become inactive and the indicator will disappear from the Alert Status Bar Inactive Warnings and Disabled Warnings do not appear on the Alerts Page Revision 3 6 3 Page 391 Maretran 15 N2KServer This section describes the operation of the N2KServer server component of the N2KView Vessel Control and Monitoring System 15 1N2KServer Components N2KServer is not a single program but consists of two components
313. smission EE 246 9 6 28 1 Check IESSE sgegieeggiegggeektergget ieg Sieger gebiet sbeuniepstesedeusbeoniahnus 246 9 6 28 2Low EE E 247 9 6 28 3Low Oil Pressure EE 247 96 26 ele 247 96285 SAM DINE Va endene 247 EE Eegtegeeh 248 6290 E ar Oe 248 Revision 3 6 3 Page 13 Maretran GP 248 9 6 29 3 Port Trim Tab EE 248 LEE Ko eege 249 9 6 29 5Starboard Trim Tab Luumsamsmmenmnlsnnrinsimisisvstevrbvetvovdsdndsekes 249 CEET Vessel D ta FC COMIC epeenene aner 250 9 6 30 1 VDR Eed deed dee 250 9 6 30 2 VDR CPA ee 250 9 6 30 3VDR Memory Used EEN 250 9 6 30 4VDR Memory Available 0 cccecceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeteeneeneeeeeeeees 250 9 6 30 5VDR PS eee 251 9 6 30 6VDR Percent Available o oo cece cecccceeessceeeseeeeeseueeeeeueeeeeuesesueeeeeueess 251 NT VENN 251 Ge EEE EN PE ee i el alae 251 9632 Watermakers uuuwamamnmaana lt nsionunseiaieidaenvndadmreidrsi dine ddvvsam 251 96321566 Recovery eege EENEG EEGEN 251 1605 TT EE 253 9 6 33 1Wind Direction EE 253 LI APA EE 253 RE GR EN MR 253 EE NN 253 96 332 IT OE EE aE 254 10 En EE 255 10 1 e EEE EEE 255 10 2 Alert CGoncents EEN 256 10 2 1 Alert e 256 10 2 2 Alert Terminology sorre ninne narin aa a eaaa ia 256 102 3 Alert Ge E 256 10 2 4 Vessel Alert Operating Modes en 257 10 2 5 Alert States E 257 10 2 5 1 Available Alert Classes 258 10 3 Viewing and Configuring Alerts AEN 259 10 3 1 The Alert Status Bar EE 260 10 3 2 Alerts E 261 10 38 WEE CT unna kekaet bind ada
314. spect ratio for example a GPS status component that is four grids wide will be four grids high An example of a GPS status component is shown below GPS Status 3D DGPS 4 15 2 8 34 21 26 29 205 N 82 0 884 W 00 13 52 Alt 0 m 02 14 2006 HDOP 4 0 Acc 11 9m Figure 61 GPS Status Component Example Revision 3 6 3 Page 152 Maretron 9 5 15 Inclinometer The inclinometer is used to display the ship s roll as reported from the compass It is calibrated so that the red needle always points down The User defined title appears at the top and the units at the bottom right The component is square An example of an inclinometer is shown below Degrees Figure 62 Inclinometer Component Example Min Max Markers may be added to an Inclinometer Component by clicking on a check box in the Component Editor The markers show the limits of the needle movement in either direction These marks are associated with the control itself That means that if two controls are displaying the same data each will maintain its own values for the min max marks and they can be reset independently Degrees Figure 63 Inclinometer with Min Max Marks Revision 3 6 3 Page 153 Maretron The marks are two red triangles just inside the gauge perimeter and are pushed left or right by the needle Pressing the Reset button will move both marks to the current needle position The Reset button is displayed only if the marks are enab
315. stablish a connection to cellular network Revision 3 6 3 Page 106 Maretran 9 4 5 3 1 Carrier This is the name of your mobile Carrier displayed only when an SMS100 has been detected on the NMEA2000 bus 9 4 5 3 2 SMS Phone Number This is the phone number of the SMS card installed in the SMS100 9 4 5 3 3 Signal Strength This is the strength of the mobile phone signal as reported by the SMS100 9 4 5 3 4 Default Phone Number To make configuration easier it is possible to send all Text Messages to a common phone number H this number then the change only needs to be made in one place 9 4 5 3 5 Test The Test button is used to establish that the SMS connection is working without having to generate an Alert Press the button and an SMS Text will be sent to the phone number specified in the Default Phone number field 9 4 5 3 6 Phone Book The SMS Text Phone Book contains up to 8 additional phone numbers identified by a name of your choosing and a test button These entries may be selected within each alert as a destination for Text Messages 9 4 6 Load New Configuration Dialog The Load Configuration Dialog is the way to change the currently running configuration This can be helpful from shore station that is monitoring multiple vessels or where different people on the same vessel prefer different screen layouts A screenshot of the Load New Configuration Dialog is shown below Revision 3 6 3 Page 107 Maretron L
316. t Instances 253 10 4 9 21 Throttle Position Sensor Generally indicates a fault in the throttle position sensor Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 9 22 Warning Level 1 Generally indicates some engine specific warning condition Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 9 23 Warning Level 2 Generally indicates some engine specific warning condition Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Revision 3 6 3 Page 331 Maretran Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 9 24 Water Flow Generally indicates a lack of water flow in cooling system Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 9 25 Water In Fuel Generally indicates that water has been detected in the engine s fuel Please consult the engine manufacturer s documentation for details Alert Types On Alert Off Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 332 Maretran 10 4 10 Environment 10 4 10 1 Bait Well Temperature Monitors the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Bait Well Alert Types Low Alert High Ale
317. t Maretron fuel management products are designed to be accurate and reliable however they should be used only as aids for fuel management and not as a replacement for traditional fuel management techniques BEWARE Conditions can quickly change that drastically effect time and distance to empty You should not use the fuel management data types unless you fully understand all the parameters associated with fuel management All fuel tanks and all engines must be included when setting up N2KVlew plus there must be accurate fuel rate sensors installed on the vessel and accurate speed information in order for N2KView to properly display fuel management information You should also note that fuel levels may contain significant error if the boat is not sitting level in the water e sailboat heeled over or a power boat riding bow up won t necessarily report the correct amount of fuel Even when setup correctly N2KView should be used only as an aid and not the sole source for fuel management information NOTE These functions are available in the optional Fuel Management Module If the Fuel Management Module is not licensed the component will display Not Licensed instead of data values The Distance to Empty and Time to Empty measurements are calculated based on the conditions that are prevalent at the time Changes in wind and current can drastically change the Distance to Empty and Time to Empty measurements that N2KView calculates and d
318. t is used to signal an alert whenever the vessel moves outside a programmable distance in any direction away from a reference point expressed as a longitude and latitude This alert is useful when the vessel is anchored or moored and the vessel should not drift outside a perimeter and if it does an alert is activated The point of reference can be selected from the current position or it can be manually entered Error Reference source not found Figure 109106 Outside Radius Alert Parameters shows an Outside Radius Alert and associated parameters 10 3 6 4 8 1 Parameters Outside Radius Alert Parameters Alert transitions to p Vessel moves the Active state Gm Active more than Set after Set Delay rad Radius away from rd men Awaiting Cancel the Reference Point Outside Radius ron Inactive Outside Radius Alert transitions to the Awaiting Cancel state after Clear Delay seconds Le 3 i i Set Delay T i Operator Cancels i Alert Vessel moves closer than Clear Radius away from the Reference Point D E D o Q e o Gi g 7 E 2 o E 5 g 3 Di Q9 o sS 4 Q Figure 111 Outside Radius Alert Parameters 10 3 6 4 8 2 Trigger Configuration Outside Radius Alert Revision 3 6 3 Page 284 Maretron Trigger Configuration Accept Re trigger Period amp Minutes Seconds Outside Radius Alert Set EET Set Delay Minutes Seconds Outside Radius Alert Clear E Clear Delay Minutes Seconds
319. ta Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 4 Anchor 10 4 4 1 Watch Monitors the vessel position relative to a preset Latitude and Longitude Alert Types Anchor Watch Alert Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 320 Maretran 10 4 5 DC 10 4 5 1 Battery State of Charge Monitors the current energy in the battery as a percentage of its total capacity Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 5 2 Battery Temperature Monitors the battery case temperature Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 5 3 Battery Time Remaining Monitors the time remaining that the battery can continue to operate at its current load Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 5 4 Current Monitors the electrical current being sourced to from the battery Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 5 5 Power Monitors the DC power currently being provided by the battery Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 321 Maretron 10 4 5 6 Voltage Monitors the voltage measured at the battery Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 5 7 Ripple Voltage Monitors the ripple voltage at the battery Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 322 Maretran
320. tes gt followed by an N or S If the N or S is missing North is assumed Moving the cursor to another field will reformat the contents of this field Revision 3 6 3 Page 285 Maretron Longitude The longitude of the reference position This may be typed in as lt degrees gt lt minutes gt followed by an E or W If the E or W is missing East is assumed Moving the cursor to another field will reformat the contents of this field Get Current Position Pressing or clicking on this button will transfer the current GPS position into the Latitude and Longitude fields 10 3 6 4 9 Anchor Watch Alert The Anchor Watch Alert is very similar to the Outside Radius Alert being tailored to anchoring It is used to signal an alert whenever the vessel moves a programmable distance in any direction away from an anchor point expressed as a longitude and latitude This alert is useful when the vessel is anchored or moored and the vessel should not drift outside a perimeter and if it does an alert is activated The point of reference can be selected from the current position or it can be manually entered or it may be entered by pressing a button on the Anchor Watch Component see section 9 5 2 10 3 6 4 9 1 Instancing Anchor Watch Alert When editing an Anchor Watch Alert the instance number of the GPS supplying the vessel s position must be specified 10 3 6 4 9 2 Trigger Configuration Anchor Watch Alert While the units of the r
321. the cross track error minimum distance from the boat to the programmed route Alert Types High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Units kilometers nautical miles statute miles 10 4 17 5 Destination Waypoint Number Monitors the number of the destination waypoint Alert Types Data Unavailable Alert 10 4 17 6 Distance to Waypoint Monitors the distance to the destination waypoint Alert Types Low Alert Data Unavailable Alert Units kilometers nautical miles statute miles 10 4 17 7 Lat Lon Monitors the current latitude and longitude of the vessel Alert Types Inside Radius Alert Outside Radius Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 17 8 Speed Over Ground Monitors the current speed over ground of the vessel Revision 3 6 3 Page 344 Maretron Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 17 9 Time to Go Monitors the estimated time remaining until arrival at the destination waypoint assuming current speed and course remain constant Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert 10 4 17 10 Velocity to Waypoint Monitors the speed at which the distance to the waypoint is decreasing Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Revision 3 6 3 Page 345 Maretron 10 4 18 Pressure Vacuum 10 4 18 1 Barometric Pressure Monitors the atmospheric barometric pressure Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253
322. tors the amount of fluid in the tank Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Source Fuel Fresh Water Waste Water Live Well Oil Black Water Reserved 0 7 Instances 16 10 4 21 3 Total Level Monitors the level of fluid in all selected tanks as a percentage of their total capacity Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Source Fuel Fresh Water Waste Water Live Well Oil Black Water Reserved 0 7 10 4 21 4 Total Remaining Monitors the total amount of fluid in all of the selected tanks Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Source Fuel Fresh Water Waste Water Live Well Oil Black Water Reserved 0 7 Revision 3 6 3 Page 350 Maretron 10 4 22 Temperature 10 4 22 1 Bait Well Temperature Monitors the temperature from a temperature sensor set up with a source of Bait Well Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 22 2 Battery Temperature Monitors the battery case temperature Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 22 3 Dew Point Monitors the current dew point based on outside air temperature and humidity Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert 10 4 22 4 Engine Coolant Temperature Monitors the engine s water coolant temperature Alert Types Low Alert High Alert Data Unavailable Alert Instances 253 10 4 22 5 Engine Oil Temperature Monitors the engine s oil temperature Alert Type
323. ts are only Licensed instead of a numeric fully operational when the Fuel value Management Module has been licensed If you wish to use these features please ensure that you have purchased a license for the Fuel management Module and that you have requested a license for the Fuel Management Module in the Connection Dialog If these steps do not solve your problem please contact Maretron Technical Support refer to Section 17 for contact information Revision 3 6 3 Page 399 Maretron 17 Technical Support If you require technical support for Maretron products you can reach us in any of the following ways Telephone 1 866 550 9100 Fax 1 602 861 1777 E mail support maretron com World Wide Web _http www maretron com Mail Maretron LLP Attn Technical Support 9014 N 23 Ave Suite 10 Phoenix AZ 85021 USA Revision 3 6 3 Page 400 Maretron 18 Maretron Software License Agreement WARNING CAREFULLY READ THIS ENTIRE SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THE ENCLOSED SOFTWARE PROGRAM THIS AGREEMENT IS LEGALLY BINDING UPON YOU EITHER AN INDIVIDUAL OR ENTITY AND MARETRON LLP BY OPENING THE SEALED SOFTWARE PACKAGE AND OR BY USING THIS SOFTWARE YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE SOFTWARE LICENSE RESTRICTIONS ON USE LIMITED WARRANTY AND DISCLAIMER IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS PROMPTLY RETURN THE SOFT
324. tting device For instance you probably would want to use a Data Unavailable Alert for the Depth gt Current Depth parameter since it would be advisable to know if the depth sounder were to stop transmitting a depth reading or became unable to determine the depth due to fouling or some other reason On the other hand if you were to seta Data Unavailable Alert on Engine gt Engine Water Temperature parameter you would then get an alert every time the ignition was switched off and the engine s ECU stopped transmitting data 10 3 6 4 3 1 Trigger Configuration Trigger Configuration Accept Re trigger Period Minutes Seconds Set Delay Minutes Seconds Clear Delay Minutes Seconds Figure 106 Trigger Configuration Data Unavailable Alert Accept Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If the condition which caused the alert remains true after the amount of Revision 3 6 3 Page 278 Maretron time in this field the alert will return to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert If a value of 0 00 is entered then the alert will never re trigger Set Delay If a valid value for the parameter being monitored is continually not received or has an invalid value for the amount of time specified in this field the alert will become active Clear Delay The parameter
325. u for purchasing the Maretron N2KView Vessel Monitoring and Control System The N2KView system enables you to have complete visibility to the state of your vessel from anywhere on your vessel or anywhere in the world with Internet access This manual guides you through the installation configuration and usage of the N2KView system Please read it carefully and follow the instructions closely when installing configuring and using your N2KView System N2KView does not interact directly with the NMEA 2000 bus It requires a copy of N2KServer to provide its data over an Ethernet connection N2KServer may either run in the same PC as N2KView or in a different PC N2KServer requires a Maretron USB100 to connect the PC to the N2K bus Alternatively N2KServer may run in a Maretron IPG100 which connects directly to the NMEA 2000 bus See section 8 1 for more details and examples of how to configure N2KView and N2KServer Revision 3 6 3 Page 28 Maretron Software Version This manual corresponds to N2KView Version 3 6 3 and N2KServer Version 3 6 This manual is applicable to versions of N2KView running on the following platforms PC Macs Linux computers Maretron MBB100 Maretron DSM800 Maretron TSM800 Maretron TSM1330 Apple iPod Touch Apple iPhone Apple iPad Android 3 2 phones and tablets including Nook Color Nook Tablet and Kindle Fire Revision 3 6 3 Page 29 Maretran Software Editions Beginning with Version 3 4 th
326. umentation for details Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Instances 253 9 6 28 5 Sail Drive Generally indicates that the sail driver mode in the transmission has been activated Please consult the transmission manufacturer s documentation for details Component Types Indicator Light Small Indicator Light Digital Counter Timer Indicator Graph Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 247 Maretran 9 6 29 Vessel 9 6 29 1 Attitude Displays the pitch of the vessel rotation about the horizontal axis perpendicular to the ship s keel and the roll rotation about the horizontal axis parallel to the ship s keel Component Types Attitude Indicator Units Degrees Instances 253 9 6 29 2 Pitch Displays the pitch of the vessel rotation about the horizontal axis perpendicular to the ship s keel Component Types Digital Line Graph Units Degrees Instances 253 9 6 29 3 Port Trim Tab Displays the position of the vessel s port trim tab Component Types Trim Bar Graph Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 248 Maretran 9 6 29 4 Roll Displays the roll of the vessel rotation about the horizontal axis parallel to the ship s keel Component Types Digital Inclinometer Line Graph Units Degrees Instances 253 9 6 29 5 Starboard Trim Tab Displays the position of the vessel s starboard trim tab Component Types Trim Bar Graph Instances
327. unit it receives data from until either 1 it stops receiving data from the first unit in which case it will switch to the second unit or 2 it starts receiving data from another unit with higher Priority in which case it will transmit the data from that unit 8 9 2 Data Source Types The NMEA 2000 standard provides for the transmission of data from similar devices but for different sources For example the NMEA 2000 standard supports six different types of fluid tanks Fuel Oil Live Well Fresh Water Waste Water and Black Water It further supports up to sixteen tanks of each of these types It is the responsibility of the person installing the NMEA 2000 system to ensure that each tank level sender is programmed with the appropriate fluid type and tank instance 8 9 3 Sensor Selection Of course one key to making the N2KView System work is making sure that your NMEA 2000 network has the proper sensors to provide the information you wish Revision 3 6 3 Page 79 Maretran to monitor using N2KView Section 9 6 on page 181 contains a listing of all of the data types that can be monitored using N2KView To see what Maretron sensors provide data for each of the listed data types you may download the latest Maretron Capability Matrix from the Knowledge Base on the Maretron website lt http www maretron com support knowledgebase knowledgemanager question s 468 What type of informationt can be viewed on Maretron 2 7s display roduct
328. unning and you know the IP Address Port Number it should be 6544 and Password for the Server Touch the screen to display the tabs and then press the Settings button If the Settings button is not visible it will always be near the top of the list then scroll the list down This will display the Settings Page In this page you specify how you want to connect to the N2KServer directly or through the Maretron Cloud Services which parameters to use and which licenses to request Press the 15 N2KServer Button if you have a direct connection to N2KServer Revision 3 6 3 Page 383 Maretran If you choose to use this N2KServer enter the IP Address Port and Password into the fields and check the Use this Server box Entering data for the second N2KServer is done in like manner Having two options here allows the typical user to specify a local IP Address as the first server to be used while on the boat and a global Internet IP Address as the second server to be used while away from the boat Having both IP addresses in the phone allows the software to automatically switch over to cell phone communications when the local router is out of range To use the Maretron Cloud Service extra agreement required press the Cloud Server button Revision 3 6 3 Page 384 Maretran m Use Cloud Server remm Here you are given fields to specify the Username of your Cloud Server account and the password required
329. ur benefit on a maximum of one 1 of your own personal computers The SOFTWARE is in use on a computer when it is loaded into temporary memory i e RAM or installed into permanent memory e g hard disk CD ROM or other storage Revision 3 6 3 Page 401 Maretron device of that computer Maretron expressly reserves any and all rights that it may have in or to the SOFTWARE which are not expressly licensed by Maretron to you hereunder 3 OTHER RESTRICTIONS Except for the initial loading of the SOFTWARE described in Section 2 above you shall not a copy duplicate reproduce or publish the SOFTWARE b electronically transfer the SOFTWARE to multiple computers over a network c distribute copies of the SOFTWARE to others by any means whatsoever d modify adapt translate reverse engineer disassemble or decompile the SOFTWARE in any way or create derivative works i e works which include or are derived from any portion of the SOFTWARE based on the SOFTWARE e modify adapt translate or create derivative works based on the printed electronic or written materials f assign rent exchange lend lease or sublease the SOFTWARE or g sell or transfer the SOFTWARE In no event shall you make any use of the SOFTWARE for commercial purposes except as expressly permitted herein it being understood that except as so expressly permitted your sole rights with respect to the SOFTWARE shall be to use the SOFTWARE for your own benefit
330. ve after the Set Delay has expired While the Test is in progress the Test button changes to a Stop Test button which can be used to stop the test The alert will transition to the Inactive state after the Clear Delay has expired 10 3 6 3 2 Actions This button opens the Alert Action Editor for the chosen alert see section 10 3 7 10 3 6 3 3 Save Pressing the Save button will save the alert Information in the database and exit the editor The Save button will be grayed out if the editor contains inconsistent or missing information Revision 3 6 3 Page 272 Maretron 10 3 6 3 4 Cancel Pressing the Cancel button will exit editor without saving the alert information Revision 3 6 3 Page 273 10 3 6 4 Trigger Configurations Maretron Because each alert type has a different trigger configurations layout each alert type is presented in a different section 10 3 6 4 1 High Alert A high alert is used to signal you when a parameter value rises above a threshold you determine For example you can set an alert to occur whenever the freezer temperature rises above 0 C 10 3 6 4 1 1 Description A high alert and associated diagram are shown in the figure below c A LO q 3 2 g High Alert Parameters High Alert transitions to the Active state after Set Delay seconds Input Signal rises above High Alert SetPoint High Alert Set Point High Alert Clear Point Input Signal falls gt Clea
331. w Bilge Pump 1 OFF ff on Bilge Pump 2 OFF TRIP Figure 52 Rocker Switch Component Example When a breaker or switch is being controlled by an Alert the control is overlaid with an ALERT CONTROLLED symbol Users should take note that the switch may be activated without warning and must be considered alive even though it is in the OFF position Revision 3 6 3 Page 142 Maretran When a breaker or switch is being controlled by the N2KView Load Controller the control is overlaid with a LOAD SHED or LOAD CONTROLLED symbol Users should take note that the switch may be activated or deactivated without warning and must be considered alive even though it is in the OFF position AG Ch 4 OFF ON AG Ch 8 op ON Peis be Switches that have been LOCKed in either the on or off position are overlaid with a yellow LOCKED symbol Revision 3 6 3 Page 143 Maretron 9 5 8 Course Up Rose The course up rose component is a compass rose in which a red needle always appears at the top and the face of the compass rotates so that the red needle points in the direction indicated by the measured parameter value The values N W E and S appear at the four cardinal compass points and decimal labels appear every 30 degrees The user defined title appears above the compass rose The course up rose component is square in aspect ratio for example a moon phase component that is four grids w
332. w Moon Phase Waning Gibbous Moon Figure 69 Moon Phase Component Example Revision 3 6 3 Page 162 Maretran 9 5 21 North Up Rose The north up rose component is a compass rose in which north always appears at the top and a red needle points in the direction indicated by the measured parameter value The values N W E and S appear at the four cardinal compass points and decimal labels appear every 30 degrees The user defined title appears above the compass rose The north up rose component is square in aspect ratio for example a moon phase component that is four grids wide will be four grids high An example of a north up rose component is shown below Degrees mag Figure 70 North Up Rose Component Example Min Max Markers may be added to a North Up Rose by clicking on a check box in the Component Editor The markers show the limits of the needle movement in either direction These marks are associated with the control itself That means that if two controls are displaying the same data each will maintain its own values for the min max marks and they can be reset independently Revision 3 6 3 Page 163 Maretran Figure 71 North Up Rose with Markers The marks are two red triangles just inside the gauge perimeter and are pushed left or right by the needle Should either mark be pushed all the way round to meet the other mark both marks will lock to the needle to i
333. w install N2KView If this is the first time that N2KView is being installed the following screens will be displayed BE 3 Are you sure you want to install this application to your computer EI Application Install Publisher Maretron LLP Application Maretron N2KView Install Cancel Installing applications may present a security risk to you and your computer Install only from sources that you trust Ka Publisher Identity VERIFIED Figure 18 N2KView Installation Screen Press Install Maretron N2KView is signed and verified for your protection 4 Application Install ol Maretron N2KView Description N2KView NMEA2000 Bus Monitoring Software Installation Preferences Fi Add shortcut icon to my desktop Fi Start application after installation Installation Location C Program Files Continue Cancel Press Continue Revision 3 6 3 Page 59 o p Maretron D Application Install Maretron N2KView Installing application Cancel When the installation is complete the Cancel button will change to Finish Press Finish N2KView may start up at this time If you have files to convert from version 2 x do not press Accept at this point If N2KView is being updated the following screen will be displayed D Application Install Maretron N2KView Installed Version 3 4 20111014 Version to be Installed 3 4 20111015 gt Replace Cancel M
334. will need to provide a name for your account the server key number that will be associated with your account and decide on a level of data that you will require The levels are e 25 GByte per month This will be suitable for most users who are not monitoring video remotely e 50 GByte per month This will be suitable for users that have little remote video monitoring e 100 GByte per month This should be suitable for users with high remote video requirements Once your contract is approved enable Cloud Services on the IPG100 using N2KAnalyzer or a DSM250 At this point the IPG100 will start trying to make a connection to the Cloud Server Data from the NMEA2000 bus will not be transmitted to the Cloud Server when no N2K View clients are connected but there will be some data transmission to manage the link On the N2KView Client enable Cloud Services in the Connection Dialog and enter the name you specified in the account If N2KServer is protected with a password recommended then this password must be entered in the Connections Dialog Add controls and alerts to N2KView so that you can monitor your use of bandwidth Revision 3 6 3 Page 77 Maretron 8 9 NMEA 2000 Considerations 8 9 1 This section describes some requirements for the NMEA 2000 networks to be monitored with N2KView Instancing The one aspect of NMEA 2000 that you need to be aware of as a user of N2KView is the concept of instance numbers or
335. xt Email servers 9 4 5 2 1 Outgoing SMTP Server Name This is the name of your mail server 9 4 5 2 2 Port This is the port number through which the email connection is established Normally Port 25 is correct for Plain and 465 for SSL TLS Revision 3 6 3 Page 103 Maretran 9 4 5 2 3 Mail Account User Name This is your username on the mail server 9 4 5 2 4 Password This is the password required to access your account on the mail server 9 4 5 2 5 Email Address This is the email address that will appear in the from area of the emails sent by N2KView While this address does not have to be filled in for emails to be sent it is advised to put an address in here so that you recognize the email sender when you receive it Also some email spam programs may mark emails without a sender as spam 9 4 5 2 6 Default Email Address To make configuration easier it is possible to send all emails to a common address If this address changes then the change only needs to be made in one place 9 4 5 2 7 Test The Test button is used to establish that the Email connection is working without having to generate an Alert Press the button and an email will be sent to the address specified in the Default Email Address field From AAAAAAAAA To AAAAAAAAA CC Subject N2KView Test Email This is a test email from N2KView A detailed log of the email activity will also be stored by N2KView and may be viewed by press
336. xt is entered as the title of the component An example of the Text component is shown below Navigation Lights Figure 77 Text Component Example 9 5 27 Timer The timer component shows the elapsed time an indicator value has been in a specified state since the timer was last reset The elapsed time is in the center of Revision 3 6 3 Page 171 Maretran the component with the date and time of the last reset just below it the user defined title appears at the top of the component and the units of the parameter measurement appear in the lower right of the component reset button allows the timer to be reset Timer components are square in aspect ratio take the same number of grids in height as they do in width An example of a Timer component is shown below Status 00 00 00 Since Jan 19 2011 19 16 35 hh mm ss Figure 78 Timer Component Example When configuring the component you may select the indicator state in which the timer will increment i e the Off On or Error states Revision 3 6 3 Page 172 Maretran 9 5 28 Vacuum Gauge A Vacuum Gauge is the same as a Gauge but the needle will move clockwise with decreasing pressure 9 5 29 Wind Angle The wind angle component is similar in appearance to traditional mechanical wind angle gauges An outline of a boat s hull appears in the center of the component and a red needle points directly into the wind The gauge is labeled in increments to 30 de
337. y the rudder sensor Component Types Rudder Angle Digital Units Degrees Instances 253 9 6 21 2 Rudder Angle Order Displays the angle of the vessel s rudder as indicated by the rudder sensor as well as the angle to which a vessel s rudder has been commanded be an autopilot or steering mechanism Component Types Rudder Angle Units Degrees Instances 253 9 6 21 3 Rudder Order Displays the angle to which a vessel s rudder has been commanded be an autopilot or steering mechanism Component Types Digital Units Degrees Instances 253 Revision 3 6 3 Page 236 Maretron 9 6 22 Speed Distance 9 6 22 1 Speed Over Ground Displays the speed over ground of the vessel relative to the earth not the water Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units kilometers hour knots miles hour Instances 253 9 6 22 2 Speed Through Water Displays the speed of the boat relative to the water Component Types Gauge Digital Line Graph Units kilometers hour knots miles hour Instances 253 9 6 22 3 Total Log Displays the total distance traveled by the vessel since the log indicator was installed Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units kilometers nautical miles statute miles 9 6 22 4 Trip Log Displays the distance traveled by the vessel since the trip indication of the log indicator was last reset The value may be reset by pressing a button on the bottom left of the component Component T
338. ypes Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units kilometers nautical miles statute miles Revision 3 6 3 Page 237 Maretron 9 6 23 Tank 9 6 23 1 Capacity Displays the fluid capacity of the tank Component Types Digital Units imp gal Liter gal Source Fuel Fresh Water Waste Water Live Well Oil Black Water Reserved 0 7 Instances 16 9 6 23 2 Level Displays the level of fluid in the tank as a percentage of its capacity Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Line Graph Units percent Source Fuel Fresh Water Waste Water Live Well Oil Black Water Reserved 0 7 Instances 16 9 6 23 3 Remaining Displays the amount of fluid in the tank Component Types Digital Units imp gal Liter gal Source Fuel Fresh Water Waste Water Live Well Oil Black Water Reserved 0 7 Instances 16 9 6 23 4 Total Capacity Displays the total fluid capacity of all selected tanks Revision 3 6 3 Page 238 Maretron Component Types Digital Units imp gal Liter gal Source Fuel Fresh Water Waste Water Live Well Oil Black Water Reserved 0 7 Instances 16 9 6 23 5 Total Level Displays the level of fluid in all selected tanks as a percentage of their total capacity Component Types Gauge Bar Graph Digital Units percent Source Fuel Fresh Water Waste Water Live Well Oil Black Water Reserved 0 7 Instances 16 9 6 23 6 Total Remaining Displays the total amount of fluid

9.4 Configuration

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents